iiiiiiiwms

ffmmM:

CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY

UNDERGRADUATE LIBRARY

DATE DUE

^V^^

mnTm{}
GAYLORD

PRINTED

PJ 4567.H29"l921 '""""' '""'"'^

'^iniiiSiiite,'i;SM^,!f.=;

IN U S./

Cornell University
Library

The

original of this

book

is in

the Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright

restrictions in

the United States on the use of the

text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924014411759

WILLIAM

HARPER'S

R.

Elements of Hebrew
BY

AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

NEW AND

REVISED EDITION
BY

J.

M.

POWIS SMITH,

Ph.D.

FsoiESSOR OF Ou} Testament Language and Litesatuu

IN TBI UNivEBSny or Chicago

CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS

NEW YORK

CHICAcdl

SAN FRANCISCO

'rioBTON

ATLANTA

DALLAS

COPVSIGHT, 1921, BY

CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS

Printed in the United States of America

All rights reserved. No part of this book

may he reproduced in any form without
the permission of Charles Scritner's Sons

PREFACE
The

Since that time

1885.

Elements op Hebrew appeared

sixth edition of Harper's

it

students beginning the study of Hebrew, and has gained for

secure position

among elementary

much

years

thirty-five

of

late President

Harper himself was, of course,

this,

and frequently expressed

which Harper's Elements remained unaware.

The

Elements.

of the

brew has been so

fully conscious of

a new edi-

his eagerness to bring out

pressure of

premature death denied him

The value

been made in the study of

progress has

The

his

itself

But during the past

text-books.

Hebrew grammar,

tion of the

in

has served the needs of large numbers of

however, and

official duties,

this privilege.

Harper manner

approach to the study of He-

of

clearly demonstrated in the experience of successive

generations of students that the perpetuation of the text-books in

which

it is

embodied seems called

vision has been undertaken.

form and method of the

corporated in the

new

To

for.

this

Effort has been

end the present

made

edition are only such as

to preserve the

The changes

original as far as possible.

re-

in-

seem demanded by

the present status of our knowledge of

Hebrew and Semitic grammar.

The more important

may

(1)

The

by Sievers

of these changes

{Metrische Studien, vol.

I, p. 22),

Xautzsch (Hebr. Grammatik, 28th

been made along the

some marked changes

it

modem

and approved by Gesenius-

ed., 1909).

line of bringing

with the results of the

but

be noted here.

half-open syllable has been eliminated, as was suggested

this departure,

many

they find them in this new

biliteral

into accord

This involves

Hebrew vowel-eystem;

from known

errors;

and

students in our best colleges are learning the

newer phonetic principles and

accorded the

beginning has

even in a book for beginners,

since beginners are entitled to protection

further because

study of phonetics.

in the treatment of the

seems well to make

(2)

Hebrew grammar

will

field.

welcome them as old

(3)

explanation of the so-called

3

friends

when

frank acceptance has been

^"^ and

Yy

FREFACB
This point of view seems more nearly in accord-

verbs and nouns.

ance with the

and

facts,

simpler for beginners.

as far here as

it

makes the study of these forms

likewise

The

biUteral hypothesis has not been carried

might well be in a more advanced grammar,

cation being confined to the

more apparent

its

appli-

cases, for the sake of sim-

plicity.

It remains to express

my

sense of obligation to

two

Professor Ira Maurice Price has read the

leagues.

manuscript and in proof, and has done

printing.

To

manuscript, I

much to
who

Professor Martin Sprengling,

am

especially grateful for

gestions, the acceptance of

worth of the book.

which

my

my

is

problematical.

"To

err is

read the book in

greatly increase the

own; I cannot hope to have

human;

can hope only that the present edition

to this

work

of

my

in

insure accuracy in

escaped error in the presentation of a subject beset with so

that

col-

numerous and valuable sug-

will, I trust,

Its errors are

of

work both

may

much

to forgive, divine 1"

give a

new

lease of

I
life

greatest teacher.
J.

The Univbbsitt op Chicaqo,

Jan.

1,

1921.

M. Powis

Smith.

PEEFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION

The

first

Elements was

edition of the

second, in October, 1882;

in

November, 1883; the

the

first

issued in July, 1881;

the

the third, in February, 1883; the fourth,

fifth, in

November,

1884.

All these editions,

excepted, were printed from one set of plates, with only such

changes and additions, from time to time, as the use of the same

The

would permit.

plates

peculiar circumstances of publication ex-

plained, although they could not excuse, the incomplete,

imperfect, treatment accorded in these editions to very

many

of the

While the present edition lays no claim to completeness,

subjects.

or to freedom from error,

and

plete

and often

it will

certainly be found

perfect than preceding editions.

gret that regular

and

not permitted him to

that

amount

The author can only

re-

most exacting nature, have

special duties of a

^ve

more nearly com-

of time, or that attention to

the preparation of the book, which justice to the subject, to those

who may use the book, and to himself, demanded.

The present edition, which contains nearly one hundred
and

pages,

editions,

Some

is

and

entirely re-written, differs considerably

radically

from other grammars now

of the distinguishing features of the

grammar

additional

from the former

in

common

use.

deserve, perhaps,

special mention:
1)

For the purpose, not of aiding the beginner to pronounce, but

of teaching the exact force

and value

of the several consonant-

and

vowel-sounds, a minute system of transliteration has been employed,

by which the attention

of the student

is

directed from the very be-

ginning to the details of the vowel-system.

made in Hebrew
edge of which
2)

all effort is

its

little,

by

far, is

merely groping in darkness.

tolerably exhaustive treatment,

any that has yet appeared

sounds.

Too

study, of the vowel-system, without a correct knowl-

Each sound

is

in English,

more complete perhaps than

is

given of the various vowel-

treated separately, the laws which regulate

occurrence and the grammatical forms in which

carefully noted.

it

appears being

PEEPACE
important distinctions, not heretofore generally recog-

3) Certain

nized

by American

e. g.,

(a)

teachers, are indicated throughout the

(),

the tone-long e

Segholates, in

H"^

contracted from

nouns before the pronominal

fects before ,"1^;

which

a,

is

seen in

Imperfects and Participles, and elsewhere;

(I75-)

naturally long e

heightened from

grammar;

(c)

ay,

the

^, and in certain Imper-

suffixes Tl,

the 6 obscured from

(6)

which occurs in plural

k,

as distinguished from the

6= aw.
new Paradigm-word

4) Instead of adopting a

weak

verbs, the verb

X^

'S guttural verb,

retained, with such variation as the

is

weak verb under

particular
for the

7 JO p

consideration demanded;

ODD

fo""

^^

it

5) In the

this

method.

Many

in the treatment of noun-formation.

Experience has shown that, in this way,

rapidly and

pQ^

e. g.,

^")i verb, ^!lp for the

There can be no objection to

verb.

grammarians have adopted

for each class of

men

learn the verb

more

more thoroughly.
treatment of the strong verb, the student

is

referred, in

every case, to the primary form or groundrform from which the form
in use has arisen in accordance with the phonetic laws of the lan-

That treatment which

guage.

which occurs in the Perf. 3 m.

is

is

the

made

weak

Nor

will it

to explain the forms of

How

verb.

verb.

with stems having the form

or Impf. 3 m.

weak verbs from

simple to derive

ground-form of 753p''.

of

at the

it

same

Hebrew gram-

be otherwise so long as the

absurd, for example, to derive

/bp^; but how

sg., is,

The bugbear

and unsatisfactory.

time, unscientific

mar

starts

sg.,

efiFort

those of the strong

Q^p^ from a form

from a form

like

like bCDp""" ^'^

Together with the form in use, the student

should learn also the primary form from which the usual form

This method

derived.

which

will

will furnish

be not only more

is

a knowledge of the language,

scientific,

but also more

lasting.

6) Particular attention is given to the subject of noun-formation,

and on

this is

based the treatment of noun-inflection.

method which would teach the primary forms

also teach the
7)

That

The same

of verbal stems, will

primary forms of noun-stems.

fiction of

Hebrew grammarians, the connecting-vowel, has


PEEPACB
been practically discarded.

The vowels

The Hebrew has no

connecting-vowels.

incorrectly called connecting-vowels are the relics of old

These case- or stem-endings, summarily

case- or stem-endings.

dis-

posed of in current grammars imder the head of "paragogic" vowels,

are restored to the position which their existence

and occurrence

demand.

But

What

asked.

it is

has a beginner to do with

all

Why

this?

should a grammar which proposes only to consider the "elements"

up these subjects?

of the language, take

specialists, of

what

service

exegetical purposes ?

Our reply

The experiment of

1)

to

is it

teaching

him who

is

this

While

this

may do

for

studies

Hebrew only

for

men something about Hebrew gram-

mar, of giving them only a superficial knowledge, has been tried for

and

half a century;

it

has

failed.

take no interest in the study, learn

and

almost before

forget,

acquired.

it is

Men
little

instructed in this

learned, the little that they

no other reason, the adoption

If for

by the lamentable

manner

or nothing of the language,

of a

may have

new system

is

any

practical

Those who take up the study of Hebrew are men, not

children.

justified

failure of the old to furnish

results.

2)

Why

should they not learn, as they proceed, the explanation of this

Why

or that fact?

Construct (^top)
ing the pretonic

is

should the student be told that the Infinitive

formed from the Absolute (7^l0p) by

qame? ?

Is it not better that he should learn at once

that the 6 of the Construct

from

is

from

while the 6 of the Absolute

ii,

and thus be enabled to grasp

a,

all

3)

The

best way, always, to learn a thing

first, it is

more

difficult.

If there is

is

the more firmly those two

great phonetic laws of the language, heightening

at

reject-

is

and obscuration f

the right way, even

if,

a difference between the 5 of

the Imperfect, Imperative and Infinitive Construct on the one hand,

and the 6

what

is

of the Infinitive Absolute

gained by passing over

it

and Participles on the

other,

in silence ?

4) In order to learn any subject, the student must be interested in

that subject.
scientific

Is

he not more

likely to

be interested in an accurate,

treatment, than in an arbitrary, superficial treatment?

The treatment adopted

in the

Elements

is

an inductive one, so

PREFACE
far as

was

it

possible to

make

it

In the discussion of each sub-

such.

ject there are first given sufficient data, either in the

taken from the text, or of Paradigms, to form

The words

from the early chapters of Genesis, with which

cited are

the student

is

supposed to be familiarizing himself, as the subjects

are being taken up.

example, a word

is

these chapters furnished no suitable

Where

taken from some other book, the chapter and verse

It is intended that the student shall feel

being cited in each case.

in all his

work that he

is

dealing with the actual facts of the language,

After the presentation of the

and not with hypothetical forms.

by these

"facts," the principles taught

While the book

as possible.

of words

way

a basis for the work.

is

facts are stated as concisely

an elementary

treatise and, for this

reason, does not

aim to take up the exceptions and anomaUes of the

language,

be foimd to contain a treatment of

tial,

it will

and to include everything

of importance

all

that

which can be

In the treatment of the strong and weak verbs, a

list is

each class of the more important verbs belonging to this

may be

list

used as an exercise, or merely for handy

The author
terial

essen-

is

classified.

given imder

This

class.

reference.

lays no claim to originality so far as concerns the

employed; there

is

indeed

little

room

ma-

for originality in this line.

In the matter, however, of arrangement, and of statement, he confidently believes that a kind of help is here afforded the student

which

cannot be found elsewhere.

In the work of preparation, the best and latest authorities have

been freely used.

Special

acknowledgment

Bickell, Gesenius (Kautzsch),

is

due the grammars of

and Davidson; but valuable aid has

been received from those of Green, Nordheimer, Kalisch, Land,

Ewald, Olshausen, Konig, Stade, and Bottcher.

For

his assistance in the preparation of the

printer,

and

for

Mr. Frederic
his

J.

manuscript for the

many valuable suggestions, the author is indebted to

Gumey, of Morgan Park. He desires also to express

thanks to Mr. C. E. Crandall, of Milton, Wis., for aid rendered by

him

in the verification of references

sheets,
skill

and

to Rev.

He

is

in the revision of the proof-

John W. Payne, of Morgan Park,

and care exhibited

the book.

and

in the typographical finish

under obligations,

still

111.,

for the

and accuracy

further, to Professors C.

of

R.

FBEFACE

Brown, of Newton Centre,

of Chicago,

S.

and F. B. Denio,

Burnham,

of

Hamilton^ E. L. Curtis,

of Bangor, for useful suggestions

and

corrections.

It

is

generally conceded that in America

we

great revival in the department of Semitic study.

hope that this volume

needed awakening.

may

on the eve of a

are

It

is

the author's

contribute something toward this greatly

Trusting that the

new

edition

with the same favor as those which have preceded

may be
it,

received

and that

its

shortcomings will be as far as possible overlooked, he places the book,

although with

many

misgivings, in the hands of those

who

favor the

Inductive Method.

W. R. H.
MoBQAN Pabk,

III., Sept. 1, 1885.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART FIRSTORTHOGRAPHY.
THE LETTERS.

I.

Page

Sec.
1.

Alphabet

2.

Bemarks on the Pronunciation of Letters

Eemarks on the Forms of Letters
The Classifloation of Letters

3.
4.

VOWELS.

11.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

The Vowel-Signs
The Vowel-Letters
The ClMslflcation of the Vowel-Sounds
The Names of the Vowels
Simple and Compoimd wa

10.

Vocal Swa

11.

Silent

12.

DlgeS-Lene
Dage5-F6rte
Omission of DigeS-POrte
Kinds of Da#eS-P6rt5
M&ppllj: and Eafg

13.
14.
15.
16.
18.

MaWfSf
M6eg

19.

K'rfi

20.

The

17.

22
22
24
25
26
26
27

Swa
III.

17
IS
19
19

OTHER

POINTS.
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33

and K^eiv

24.
25.

IV. THE ACCENTS.

Place of the Accent
Shifting of theTone
The Table of Accents
Bemarks on the Table of Accents
The Consecution of the more common Accents
A Table showing the Consecution of the Accents

26.

Kinds of SyUables

27.

Syllabification

42
42

28.

Quantity of the Vowel in Syllables

43

29.

VI.
Short Vowels
Naturally Long Vowels

21.

22.
23.

V.

30.

31.
32.
33.
34.
35.

36.
37.
38.

35
36
36
37
38
40

SYLLABLES.

EUPHONY OP VOWELS.
44
46
50
52
54
54
55
55
59
60

Tone-Long Vowels
Eeduced Vowels
The A-Class Vowels
The 1-Class Vowels
The U-Class Vowels
Changes of Vowels
Tables of Vowel-Changes
Pause
11

CONTENTS

12

See.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.

44.

EUPHONY

OF
VII.
Assimilation
Rejection
Addition, Transposition, Commutation
The Peculiarities of Laryngeals
The Wealmess of n and n
The Weakness of 1 and 1

CONSONANTS.

Page
62
62
63
64
66
67

PART SECONDETYMOLOGY.
INSEPARABLE PARTICLES.

VIII.
45.

The

46.
47.

He

73
74
74
75
76

Article

48.

InterrogatiTe
The Inseparable Prepositions
The Preposition JD

49.

Wiw Conjunctive

50.

The Personal Pronoun

51.
52.

Pronominal Suffixes
The Demonstrative Pronoun

53.
54.

The
The

65.

Roots

IX.

PRONOUNS.
77
78
80
80

Relative Particle
Interrogative Pronoun

81

X.
56.

Classes of Verbs

67.

Inflection

58.

The Verb-Stems

THE VERB.
82
82
83
84

XI.

THE TBI-LITERAL VERB.

The Strong Verb

General View of the Tri-Literal Verb-Stems
The K&l Perfect (Active)
The ijai Perfect (Statlve)
The Remaining Perfects
The ISai Imperfect (Active)
The K&l Imperfect (Statlve)
The Remaining Imperfects
The Imperatives
The Infinitives
The Participles
Special Forms of the Imperfect and Imperative
The Perfect and Imperfect with W4w Conversive
The Verb with Suffixes
General View of the Strong Verb
A.

69.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.

66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.

B.

Classes of Laryngeal Verbs

74.

Verbs
Verbs
Verbs

76.

'o
'y

"S

C.
The Weak Verb
Classes of Weak Verbs

78.

Verbs Pe Nfln

79.

Verbs Pe 'AlSf (h'b)

Verbs Pe Wiw (I'o)
Verbs Pe Yad (>'d)
Verbs i"> or i"?, called n'S
Verbs L&n6d 'AlBf (kS)

81.

82.

83.

99
100
102
104
109

110
110

Laryngeal
Laryngeal
Laryngeal

77.

80.

96
98

The Laryngeal Verb

73.
75.

87
87
88
89
90
91
93
94

(j'b)

HI
II3
II5

'.!'.!!.!.....!'.'.."..!

!!!!!!!!!!!!!

117
I17
118
120
121
123
124
128

CONTENTS
Sec

13

BI-LITERAL VERBS.

XII.

Page

84.

Classes of Bl-Literal Verbs

130

85.
86.

The "Ayln-Doubled Verb

The Middle-Vowel Verb

87.

A Comparative View of the Verb Forms

131
136
142

88.

The Inflection of Nouns

Nouns with One, Originally Short, Formative Vowel
Nouns with Two, Originally Short. Formative Vowels
Noims with One Short and One Long Formative Vowel
Nouns with One Long and One Short Formative Vowel
Nouns with the Second Radical Reduplicated
Nouns with the Third Reidical Reduplicated
Nouns with m and Prefixed
Nouns with D Prefixed
The Signification of Nouns with d Prefixed
Noims Formed by Prefixing n
Nouns Formed by Means of Affixes
Nouns from Bi-Llteral Roots
Nouns Having Four or Five Radicals
Compound Nouns
Nouns Formed from Other Nouns
The Formation of Noim-Stems
The Formation of Cases

XIII.

89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
lis.
116.
117.

146
146
148
149
150

'

Gender and Number

The Absolute and Construct States
The Pronominal Suffixes
Stem-Changes in the Inflection of Nouns
Affixes for

Classiflcation of

^.

Noun-Stems

Nouns of the Ftst Class

Noims of the Second Class
Nouns of the Third Class
Nouns of the Fourth and Fifth
Feminine Nouns
Irregular Nouns

Classes

Numerals

XIV.
118.
119.
120.
121.

NOUNS.

151
152
152
153
154
155
155
156
159
159
160
160
161
162
163
165
168
171
172
176
177
179
180
183
184

SEPARATE PARTICLES.

Adverbs

187

Prepositions

188

Conjunctions

189
189

Interjections

PARADIGMS.

Paradigm A. The Personal Pronoun and Pronominal Suffixes

Paradigm B. The Strong Verb
Paradigm C. Strong Verb with Suffixes
Peiradigm D. Verb Pe ('a) Laryngeal
Paradigm E. ^Verb "Ayin ('>') Laryngeal
Paradigm F. Verb Lamed ('S) Laryngeal
Paradigm G. Verb Pe NOn (['3)
Paradigm H.Verb Pe "AlSf (n'b). Verb Pe YSd C'b)
Paradigm I.Verb Pe Wiw (i'b)
Paradigm K.Verb LSmBd He (n'S)
Paradigm L.Verb Ayin Doubled C" y)
Paradigm M. Middle-Vowel Verbs (I'jr and '"P)

Paradigm

N.Verb LfanBd 'llSf

(N'V)

192-193
194-195
196-197
198
,

199
200
201

202
202-203

204-205
206-207
208-209

210

INDEX.
Of Subjects

211-218

PAET FIRST-ORTHOGRAPHY

I.

The
1.

Letters

Alphtibet

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

18

Remarks on

2.

n^ =

1.

2.

^y =

3.

"in^ =

-al

(1

(1

J<np = P-r^'

5.

31^ =

tSv

h5-Sex

7.

yj?

8.

ni<1

(1

"e (1

'i-rev (1:5);

yip"1

= ^6-%

(1:2);

HDniD =

4);

13

5);

kl (1

4);

ra-kt(a)-

np3 = b6-ker

nnHD = mit-ta-ta6l

(1

6).

m**"

(1

(1

jCDpil

7);

5).

tak-

16).

= hie'-m

n^E^i<")3

(1:5); TjK'n

(1

(1

(1

''^^-^^

2).

4.

l:Mon

D^i^^l =

M-'lUres (1:1);

^'t6m(l:2).

n-|^

2);

'e-h.d

tifee

8.

Dlnri

(1:1);

the Pronunciation of Letters

ynj^n =

'ee (1:1)';

= way-y5-'ai

(1:1); E^y^l

T]E^n

(1:7);

2).

11);

= Wee

J^alH

(1:1);

t6-e'(l

12);

^JlDI

!|n3V= wa-v5-M (1:2);

yis-gor (2

T})"))

21).

wTft(a)l3i

(V:2).
1.

5^ (

'

is

a laryngeal stop, made by bringing the edges of the

larynx together, thus shutting

is

a "rough breathing,"
2.

) is

'

the larynx;

reproduce
3.

(t)

a sound peculiar to the Semitic and made far down in

it is

so difficult of utterance that

no attempt

is

made

to

it here.

(W was a deep laryngeal;

German 5mcA.

the emission of the breath;

off

like h in how.

it is

now

generally pronounced like

ch in the

p
than 3

(k) is

4.

5.

(k).

(t) is

up than
6.

nary

now

if (?) is

pronounced

like the

the tip of the tongue higher

(t)^.

English sh;

indistinguishable from

{) is

an ordinary

(s).

a sharp hissing -sound; more emphatic than the ordi-

(s).

(w)

8. 1

made with

a dental sound

in the pronunciation of J^
() is

s-sound,
7.

a i-sound, but pronounced farther back on the palate

is

pronounced

like

in water,

and not

like

our

v.

The spirant 3 ix) is pronounced like weak German ch in Kirche.

10. The spirant ^ (g) is pronounced like g in German Tage.

9.

The chapter and

verse in Genesis, in which a given word is found, are thus indi1, verse 1; 2 3
^meaning chapter 2, verse 3, etc.
In ordinary practice, a and n are scarcely, if at all, to be dlstinguiahed.

cated;
'

^meaning chapter

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

4]

Remarks on

3.

^3(1

^n^^

(1:4),

Words

when

it is

(1:28),

(1:2), Tjl^rn (1:2);

D^p

^^V^n (1:12);
1.

of Letters

(1:2)

IJ^aln

D^Dn(l:2) |p3(l:4)jp]"li;(l:20)j

'0^2313(1:16); n^-|3

2120

Forms

D^ib^?(l:l) ^JED(l:2)p:S

(1
3.

the

16

(1:2);

1,T1 (1:3);

^^D^

"rja^n (1:4),

(2:21),

2|^^

are written from right to

necessary to

fill

^^S

left,

(1:2);

p2

(1:12)

Y;;(1:11)
(3:24);

T]-)^!

(1:4),

(1:11);

Q^^ (1:5^ l^lp^^

(1:6),

(1:11).

and may not be divided;

certain letters (Js^, j"!, '~5,

Q,

S, y) have two forms; the second

("j,

out a

line,

f~^) are extended.

2.

D>

\>

3.

Five

Hj V)

is

Certain

tinguished:

O,

letters

Q,

J,

used at the end of words.

letters,

3, 3;

3,

very similar in form, are to be carefully disJ;

-1, Tj;

n, H, H; \

\:

D; y, a; t, ^'
4.

The

Classification of Letters

), ];

D. D; D.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

20

Hebrew words

and vowels as

consist of consonants

The use

guages.

of the breath

is

in all other lan-

fundamental in the production of

Vowels are produced by the relatively

these sounds.

free,

unob-

structed emission of the breath, the modifications of vowel-sound

being caused by varying positions of the vocal organs.

on the other hand, involve

The Hebrew

the breath.

two bases:

(1)

either a total or

Consonants,

a partial obstruction of

consonants, therefore, are classified on

the use of the breath in their production, (2) the vocal

organs employed.

The

1.

first classification

includes five groups of sounds:

a.

The

Stops which involve a complete stoppage of the breath.

b.

The

Fricatives

produced by the

friction of the

breath escaping

through some narrow passage.

Remark.

^The Fricatives 2i

^>

1. Di Dt

H *y for convenience

be designated spirants.
e.

The Nasal sounds

d.

The

which the breath

in

is

emitted through the

nose.

Lateral sound

in

(}^ I)

which the breath escapes along

openings on one or both sides of the tongue.

e.

The

Rolled soimd

(^

r) in

which the tongue rapidly taps the

teeth or the lidge of the teeth, tiius succesaivdy obstructing

ing the passage of

The second

2.

and free-

air.

classification,

based on the organs of speech em-

ployed, falls into six sub-di visions:

o.

Hie

The Labids proper

involve

Ac

dosing or partial closing of

lips.
b.

The Ldno-Det^als, a

special variety of labials, are

allowing the breath to escape with the front teeth placed

lower

made by
upon the

lip.
c.

T^e

Denials are

made with

the tip of the tongue toudiing,

or in dose proximity to, the front teeth.

Of these some bring the

tip

of the tongue close to the front teeth, or in contact with them, while

with

otiiers

tongue.

B,

'n

whHe

and

the contact or approach

The
"n,

difference

and

is

between

is

little

farther back

3 and 2, H and H,

that in the stops the breath

3 and
is

on the

X B and

fully checked,

in tihe apiraats the breadi is allowed a partial outlet.

BY AN mDUCnVX MXTHOD

i 4]

d.

The

Palatal consonant

v) involves the

21

approach toward

the highest part of the palate of that part of the tongue which

is

opposite the top of the palate.

e.

The

Velars involve contact between the tongue and the soft

palate (velum).
/.

The

Of these

is

made

the farthest back.

Laryngeals involve action of the larynx which

is

not as

yet clearly understood.

Note

1.

^A

third classification

dents of phonetics:

viz., voiced

is

generally recognized

and wvBoiced consonants.

fiu'ther detafls of phonetics the

field.

^^^

of unvoiced, Q, p\.

student

may

refer to

stu-

The former

involve vibration of the vocal cords, the latter do not.

of voiced consonants are 2> ^j

by

Examples

But

for

G. Noel-Arm-

General Phonetics for Missionaries and Sttuients of Langvage$

(Cambridge: Heffer

&

Sons, 1915).

Vowels

II.

The Vozoel'Signs^

5.

i<^ ^. n. , nn,

3.

2.

n^s?,

3.

%'^i ^' p^'P'V: Yl

4.

n n

i;

QV

b^^. %"i./?. ^H'^^:

V~'%

6.2.

S.' b'

P=

is

pronounced as

^'

^'
;

-^

in machine; -^

"^R'

^.;

^'

p'^

:i^

^i?.

-'

^'

a in

like

""^

^?' ^^'

la.

pronounced as & in &U

1. -5^ is

2.

t^

11.

'^'''

^P' pP' ?'

p''

W'

dp

an. nn.

^3' p^'
n. n;
Din. D1% "11^.,"-^. ^n. b^; i,p^'

5.

I-'

cZa*.

{i. e.,

without a following

as i in pin.^

1),

or

3. 1
4.

I)

in dU, the
6.

word

is

pronounced as ey in they; __ as

pronounced as oo

is

5. ^ or

^r\, p.

1.

is

in

moon ; -^

as

pronounced as o in note; t- practically the same as d

same

sign being used for both sounds.

e in

a very quickly uttered sound, as

a.

-r

is

pronounced rapidly, so as to

is

e in met.

in put.^

slur over the e

almost (but not quite) together; thus

below,

when

and run the

the

and

not below, nor blow;

b'low,

pHice, not police, nor plice.

b.

^=r (a

combination of

than -r, and with a

c.

-r,

d.

is

little fuller in

sound

a quality.

combination of -^ and -r)

-vT (a

and

slight

and -r)

-=-

is

little fuller in

sound than

with a slight e quality.

-TT (a

combination of -^

(6)

and -r)

is

little fuller

in sound

than -r, and with a slight d or o quality.

6.

The Vowel-Letters

Before the introduction' of vowel-signs (

sonants,

5^,

n,

1,

'I,

5.),

certain

weak con-

were sometimes used to indicate the vowel-

sounds, and hence were called vowel-letters:

1 All letters in Hebrew are consonants;
the alphabet contains no vowels. To supply the lack of vowels the above system of vowel-signs was introduced.
I Sometimes __ is written where i__ was intended, and _l where i was intended;

in such cases
'

__ is

pronounced as

'>__

(i

in machine),

and

as

{oo in moon).

These signs were introduced between the sixth and eighth centuries A. D.

22

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

6]
1-

2.

23

D^p' = tarn; nn\"I = M-ye& (1:2); n^H = l?ay-y& (1 :20).

= M-yft (1 15);
inn = eo-M (1:2); HH = r1i(a)l> (1:2);
m^^ = 'or (1 3); ^"1^: = t6v (1:4); "|1 = y6m (1 5).
Q^nbi^ = '16-h}m (1:1); ^^'^^^^ = re'-i0 (1:1); ^^1^^ =
'li-l (1
13); 1JS = piig (1:2); tJtJ^ = gn# (1 16); jl^ =

3.

Un
4.

'

(1

n\T' =

4).

yJh-y^
(12

'6h->-16

final,

Note

by the
1.

Note

indicated,

laryngeal

rbil^ =

10);

Medial a

when

medial,

by the laryngeal ^i

(")

(k or a)

2.

^The

letter }^,

was indicated

when

belong here; since, in this case,

2.

rarely;

final

h was

though not uniformly, indicated.*

generally,

lost its

(1

8).

The a-sound was

1.

when

HIDD = miVwl

(1 :29);

it is

the final letter of a root, does not

not a vowel-letter, but has merely

consonantal character.

The soimds
Note.

and 6 were indicated by

tL

Medial

).

and 6 were generally indicated;

11

final

& and 6

were always indicated.

3.

The sounds

and I were indicated by

Note. ^Medial

l.

and 6 were generally indicated;

final

and 6

were always indicated.

4.

The sounds
Note

and

few exceptions, besides

Note

2.

^Vowels

when not thus

Note

3.

6,

when

final,

were frequently indicated by Hindicated, and, with but

Only long vowels were thus

1.

a,

only the naturally long ( 30.) vowels.

indicated thus are said to be written fully;

indicated, they are said to be written defectively.

^Briefly stated,

the use of the vowel-letters

may

thus

be put:

The vowels

and

e,

The vowels H and

6,

Final vowels, except

Note
is

4.

^In

medial and
medial and
t

and

<i,

final,

are represented
are represented

final,

are represented

by

14.

^.
1.

H-

in the earlier books, the tone-long vowels (31.)

being often thus represented.

Hob. 10

by

the later books of the Old Testament the ftdl writing

more common than

'

by

'

Cf. i^P^ (3

10)

n'73K (3

11).

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

24

The primary vowel-sounds

vowels a (-^),

and

(-^),

Classification of the Votvel-Sounds

7%e

7.

ii

Hebrew
Of

{-^).

opening of the vocal organs;

with the breath striking the

in

are represented

these a

by

made with

is

the three

the widest

made with a narrower opening and

front of the hard palate; u is also made
i is

with a narrow opening, but farther back in the mouth, and with

rounding of the

lips.

Closely related to the foregoing are five other sounds, viz., e

e (-^), &

and

i,

( T ),

and may

and 5 (~^.

(-T-),

arise

from either by

midway between a and u, and

by the same

by a lowering

these, e is

lips,

of the

Likewise & and 5 are

deflection.

The remaining two

ii

without tonal influence

back of the tongue, which produces a greater

vowels,

this

may also be designated as deflection.

and

5, arise

from

on the palate than

its

and

under the influence of the tone; each of them

is

and

u, respectively,

made

corresponding short vowel.

speak of e and 5 as lowered respectively from

farther back

Hence we

those

The

made by

reducing

lengthening the primary vowel-soimds

them

shall

ii.

In addition to these vowel-sounds, there are two other

made by

are so closely alike as to be represented

while o comes from

opening as for the a sounds

viz.,

(-=-),

midway between

& comes from a under the influence of the tone by

sign;

a rounding of the

Of

classes,

and those

to their lowest terms.

naturally long vowels are of three classes, viz., (1) those arising

from contractwn, e.g.,i

+ w = 6;

those arising in compensation

(2)

for the quiescence or loss of a consonant,

quiesced causing & to become

(3) those

fi,

e. g.,

in "HD^^^ the

has

which was then rounded to

which acquired their length in the

d;

earliest stages of the

language and are found as characteristic of certain formations,

e. g.,

the 6 of the ^[al active participle which has been rounded from

The reduced vowels are of two classes,

is

viz., (1)

the simple S'wfi which

a neutral sound to which any one of the short vowels

duced, and (2) the

of the three short

The

may

be

re-

compound S'wft which has a distinct form for each

vowels, viz., -^ from a, -^r from i, and -tt from ii.

vowel-sounds, therefore,

may

be

classified

according to (1)


BT AK INDUCnVK USTHOD

8]

25

their organic formation, (2) their quantity, (3) their nature, (4) their

value:
1.

Classified according to their organic formation, they are:

a. A-class,

including the o-vowels and those derived from them.

b. I-class,

including the i-vowels and those derived from them.

c.

U-class, including the M-vowels

2. Classified

according to their

qitaniity,

-=--=-

b.

Long,

ir

c.

Reduced,

-j- -=r

Note. ^The

vowels

they are:

t-dass.

a-class.
o. Short,

and those derived from them.

^-r-, ">-=-

-^ T^(6)
or -^, 1-?-

1, ^

-r

~r ^r

and

-:^

it-claas.

-^

-r-

^^- are

or

-^

sometimes called doubtful;

because, not infrequently, they are the defective writing of a long

vowel.
3. Classified

according to their origin or nature, they are:

a.

Pure

b.

Defieeted

e from a;

e.

Attenuated

d.

Tone-Lcmg

h from a;

e.

NalwaUy Long.

f.

Reduced

a;

i;

from a;

6 from k;

'and

and

and

4. Classified according to their vdiie in inflection, they are:

a.

Changeable

sonant in the
6.

in

viz., (1) all

same

Unchangeable

the same

Note.
of quantity,

by a con-

viz., (1)

short vowels followed

by a consonant

syllable; (2) naturally long.

Changeable and unchangeable here apply only to changes

not of quality.

8.

The

short vowels not followed

syllable; (2) tone-long; (3) reduced.

The Names of the Vowels

following table presents the arrangement of the vowel-sounds

according to their quantity ( 7.

technical

name

of each soimd.

2),

and at the same time gives the

BLEMENTB OF HEBREW

Claw.

[10

BY AN INDUCnVE METHOD

11]

bles,

and

consequently called medial by

is

27

many grammarians,

are to

be treated as follows:
a.

Forms with w&w-conversive

( 70.). where the dS,ge-f6rtS has

disappeared, were originally pronounced like way-yhl; but with the

second y6d the vocal wa also disappeared; hence such

loss of the

forms are better pronounced as way-ht,

ay being treated as a

etc.,

diphthong.
b.

Similarly S'wa

such forms with prefixed preposi-

is silent in

and lim-'6-r6& and

tions as bir-ki(S,)"

Note.

in forms like mil-'fi.

by such forms

^This pronunciation is attested

and

That there was more

"'BtSTl-^

however,

is

clear

from the variation

73^7^

in the use of dlgeS-lene in spirants

from the fact that the Hebrew uses the same sign

after such a S'wS,,

S'wa and a

for a vocal

as

or less variation in such cases,

and from the testimony

silent S'wS.,

of the

transliterations in the older strata of the Septuagint (11.).

similar variations in spoken English,

and

con-side-ra-ble
c.

con-sid-r^ble; ath-letic

and

Cf.

tol-rble,

ath-e-letic.

S^k

affect the general situation;

cf.

only a helping

is

the similar situa-

forms as 1^11 72^> where the coming in of paOah-

in such

J-

furtive does not increase the

d.

and

In such forms as 3iy^> ^tc, the

vowel and does not

tion

tol-e-ra-ble

e. g.,

number

of syllables.

In forms with spirants after a so-called medial S^k, the

absence of the dIgeS

is

a survival from an

vowel-sound was heard before the spirant;

earlier stage

again

cf.

when a

in which
nH^E^.
~ j~ T
:

the presence of the later paSah-furtive does not change the older hard

sound of the

t.

11.

^'yp^)

1.

b"''1DD
2. a.
&

way-yik-r&' (1:5);

mav-dil

(1

S^wd

^^p;;!

way-yav-del (1:7);

6).

Tj^'n (1:4); rj1n2 (1:6); rf^nH (2:14).

riJSt

nnj =

'att;

Remark-n^E^'j^nk

D^Z^^n
>

Silent

Jer. 51

49.

(2

fl^^p =

na-^att;

kS-talt.

(1:1); pn^l (l':4); 2)^0 (1:4); Q)^ (1:5);

10).

'

Isa.

47 2.
:


BLBMENTS OF HEBREW

2S

The simple

S'wft (-?-), aside

where

( 9.), appears frequently

1.

Under

from
it

its

11

use to indicate a vowelnsound

has no sound.

It occurs thus:

consonants standing in the middle of a word and

all

closing a syllable ( 2b.).

2.

Under a

final letter,

when

that letter

a.

IsKaf; or

b.

Is a consonant containing DigeS-forte or lene, or preceded

by another consonant with S*wa.

3.

Under an

Remark.

initial

consonant in ^nt^> DT^IS^-

^The weak

as vowel-letters ( 6.),

Note

1.

^"wS,

or of a syllable,

Note

2.

is

'w4

of a syllable,

is

letters

), ^.

when

do not, of course, receive

under an

always

initial

quiescent, or used

this silent S*w&.

consonant, whether of a word

vocal.

under a

always

^, H.

silent.

final

consonant, whether of a word or

Other Points

III.

DdieS-Lene

12.
1-

Tvzfin2

(1:1);

nn\-i
T
:

''JS-'?^; (1:2); 1-)S

2.

ni"i3 =

3.

Qb)i2
Ibbaa
! j
-

bld-gae

1.

The

letters

{b, g, d, k,

inbiT

12

(1 :'28);

(1=2);

-nina

n^p^

(1:29);

rnD^b =
i t

(t

(2:21);

(1=6);

^^20

(1:6).

i-'Sv-dilh (2: 15).'

nDp:i

(1:27); t^-n^

n:-|3n-)

sound

(1=2);

IT

(1:27);

DV3

""i)

(2:17);

(1:28); |S 12 i;S;an (3:3).

2.

J.

t) is

p,

^, D. D. H. have two sounds.

indicated

by a point called

Their hard

D&geS-lene, which

they regularly receive whenever they do not immediately follow a

vowel-aound.

Note 1.As fricatives they are pronounced: 3 = ; T = d

= <A in those; Q = fin fat (cf. ph in philosophy) J^ = U = <A in thin;
3 = X like Grerman ch in Kirche, but made farther forward;^ (=g
;

in

German
Note

class thus

Tage)
2.

is

not in ordinary practice distinguished from j) (= ff).

six fricativea from the rest of the

To distinguish these

named, we

shall call

commonly used

in a wider sense

we may

it

2.

confine

them
than

Spirants.
this,

The term

spirant

is

but for practical purposes

here to this definite usage.

These spirants without D&geS-lene usually follow a vowel-

sound, but sometimes the absence of the D&geS persists even after
the preceding vowel has disappeared.

Note.
is

^The soft sound of these

due to the

failtu'e

letters after

preceding vowels

to shut off completely the emission of the breath

involved in the pronunciation of the vowel which would result in a

'^P (\ n
lady as lady,
3.
is

etc., cf. 4.).

and

When by

Cf. the

common

Irish pronunciation of

better as beder.

a disjunctive accent ( 23.

cut off from whatever

may

precede

it,

2. o)

one of these

letters

as at the beginning of a

chapter, verse, or section of a verse, it does not immediately follow a

vowel and hence takes Di.geS-lene.

20

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

30

QIQCS^n

|-H^3!in
(1

=
1.

hay-yab-ba-g& (1:9);

taw-w, (3

hab-bhe-ma

The doubling

called

ham-ma-yim (1:7);

nh^^DH =

liam-m'6-r6S

16).

nin =

2.

Q^Sn =

ha-a-ma-yim (1:1);

14

DaieS-Fdrte

13.
1.

(1

nni^D = mit-ta-ha^ (1:7); nDHan

25); T)^in = had-da-'al? (2 17).

20);

of a letter

is

Consonants

D8,geS-f6rte.

may be

when they immediately follow a full

2. The point in Wi,w and in the
if preceded by a full vowel.
Note

1.

Di,ge-f6rte

in

doubling the hard, not the

Note

2.

syllable

Note

3.

vowel; this

A
is

in its bosom,

doubled, however, only

vowel.
spirants is always DigeS-forte,

a spirant serves also as

soft,

DS,ge-lene,

sound of the spirant.

whose

called sharpened ( 26. 2. N.

by a point

indicated

consonant has Dlges-forte

final

is

1).

doubled letter

is

regularly preceded

by a

short

generally a pure ( 29. 1-3) vowel, seldom a deflected

( 29. 4, 5) vowel.

Omission of D&SeS-F6rte

14.
1.

^y)

2.

\T1

3.

nln

(2:2) for

(1:3) for Vn^j;

'(1

(2 :'l4)

1.

))yy,

4) for

lif^l (2:16) /or

In^H

(1:24)

1^^;

Q\fl

for]r\m;

(2:24) /or

mj^b

Q^.

(2:23) for

ni^^H; r^^rin (1:4) for ^K^'Hri; rj^hn

/or "^^nri.

DigeS-forte

is

always omitted from a

final vowelless consonant,

there being nothing in this case to support the doubling.'

2. It is

often omitted from medial consonants which have only a

(B^t a spirant

S'wS. to support them.

3. It is

Note

1.

^When DIges-forte

compensation made for the

ing vowel, the D,ge
"

may not thus lose DUgeS-forte.)

H. H) i? ^^^ "1omitted from a laryngeal and no

always omitted from the laryngeals,

is

loss

is

J^,

by the strengthening

of the preced-

said to be implied or understood.

The only exceptions to this statement

are FIN tftou

(f.).

and nn: thou

(f.)

didsltitt.

BT AN INDUCOIVB METHOD

16]

in

Note 2.DageS may be thus implied

5^ and '^.
Note 3.The

in Jn^; I^DD

(1:29) /or

but not

which DSgeS-

Kinds of DdieS-Fdrte

m nnn-|p;

7)

)J,

really a closed syllable.

is

IS.

nnnp a

H. H. and

syllable preceding a consonant in

forte is thus implied

1.

in

31

(i:9)

^nj?^.

(3:22) /or

i^nj

!npji;

U-JD-JD;

hp:_ (2:21)

for npb'^^2.

^^y

er-ip^ (2:3);

(2:1);

Tj^nnp

(3:8);

nt^iDn (4:7);

nlJl3 (4:21).
(i:i2); i^-nfc^yi? (2: is);

n^^rnnp^

3.

ns-nt^';;

4.

jD^n

(17:17);

5.

iHn

(Judg. 5:7); il^ni"! (Job 29:21); iiny^ (Isa. 33:12).

6.

r6^

(2:4);

V J"

1.

When

IJ^San

HD^
TJT

(Ex. 2:3);

^^'pp

(Ex. 15

(2:23).

17).

(4^6)^ HJlH (6:2); [nisH]T J"

T
d"

the doubling represents the combination of two similar,

or the assimilation of two dissimilar consonants, the DSgeS-forte

is

called compensative.
2.

When

DIges-forte
3.

the doubling
is

When by

is

characteristic of a grammatical form, the

called characteristic.
its

use the

initial letter of

a word

vowel of a preceding word, the Dl,ge-f6rte

4.

by a

When

it is

is

inserted in a consonant with

short vowel, to

make

is

joined to the final

called conjunctive.

S^a, which

is

the S'wk audible, the DUges-forte

preceded
is

called

separative.
5.

When

syllable of
6.

the doubling strengthens or emphasizes the

a section or

When

the doubling gives greater firmness to the preceding

vowel, the D&ge-f6rte

is

16.
1.

nrp^
(3:6);

final tone-

verse, the DigeS-forte is called emphatic.

(1:24);

nSi?

called firmative.

M&ppi^ and R&f&

m;2)h

(2: 15);

m^^h

(3:6)1 n^-ll (3:15).

(2:15); n2^"'i<^

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

32
2.

QipJ?

n^^jS

(1:6);

nHj^b

(1 = 26);

(2:23);

jna^nDI

18

(4:4);

inn(T.l(4:8)1.

Mappit:

this letter is

Note.

(p^QD

(nS^T

written in

is

'^*0

MSS.

also in ^,*

and

1.

a horizontal stroke placed over a

is

call particular attention to the absence of

17.
1.

n when

final

used as a consonant, and not as a vowel-letter.

^Mappik

2. Ri,f^

a point placed in

extender) is

letter, to

Diges or Mappl^.

Mdttdef

Dnr^T)

-IJS-^;; (1:2); -115<-^T (1:3);

(1=^);

l^'IVIl

(1:11).
2.

n1n-nN

E^Drb

(1:4);

(1:21);

(3:16);

Tj^-^E'D"'.

(2:13).

nniin-DK^i
I"
T T ~

1.

Makkef (PlpJ^

binder)

is

a horizontal stroke placed between

two words, to indicate that they are

accented as

if

the former of two words. Joined

2. If

be pronounced together and

to

they formed but a single word.

by Makkef, should contain a

way

long vowel in a closed syllable ( 26. 2), such a vowel gives

a short vowel, or receives Me^eg (

18.
1.

18. 4).

MieSi

(1:3); )i^p^n (1:7);

"llN-^n^T
;iT IT

(1:16);
2.

nn\1
T

(1:2);

HDl^n
'

T":

mV^_
4.

D^DDten
T

(1:9);

nn'pin
:

(2:4);

Di<^3n3
y
.,t

(2:4);

(3:1).

(1:25);

HTO
V

IT

(1 = 26);

-;i-

HIK^P^
^:i-

(2:3);

nHD^
]th\

(2:23);

(3:7).

nn^n-D2;^]

nrt3-nn
A

(1:21);

:iT

I^Dt^n
3.

^T)^

H^^^H
V Tl"

(18:29).

n^V3"1^^n

IT

to

M&ppUj: in N

is

(2: 13);
(4

^^rr-^l

|an-q1n3

(3:2);

12).

found in printed texts in Gen. 43

26; Lev. 23

17,

(3:3);

BT AN INDXTCnVE METHOD

19]

33

n^n:! (1:29); ^0,1 (2:25); DC)1^7;^ (4:8); n^n)! (17:18);

5.

n:in.i(20:7).
6.

J^ail (4:16);

Onp

M^^^g

lb VmS^""! (24:9); Q-|t<

a perpendicular

bridle) ia

HJIB

(28:2).

on the

line placed

of a vowel-point, to indicate that the syllable to which

The

a secondary accent.*
1.

On

following are

second

is

closed ( 26. 2).

2.

With a long vowel followed by a

3.

With

With a long vowel

5.

With the

^iid

have Simple

(t. e.,

2.

J^VP

silent)

-n- in

19.
(8:17)

of all forms of

n^H

which

S*w^.

final syllable;

l^*r&

and to insure the

and K'dtv

= a1n; n^^^)

(8=17),

H^H

Ma^ef.

*nd

vowel which otherwise might be neglected.

distinct enunciation of a

J<ain

S'wfi.

in a closed syllable, before

first syllable

With an unaccented

1.

vocal S'wfi pretonic.

vowels before compound

all

4.

6.

belongs has

its chief uses:

the second syllable before the tone, but generally on the

third, if the

the

it

left side

read t^a^lH;

(24:33)

Qt^^); "l^^ (30:11)

DK''"'! (24:33)

QK^lll;

1J3

(30:11), read -i:ii<2.

T

^)n,

3.

to be read J^IH;

read

D\ib; nyi

The Hebrew

text

was

r\\n\ to be read IJi^^;

HlrT. to be

to be read n^Ti^J.

first

written with consonants only.

Not

untQ somewhere between 600 and 800 A. D. were the vowels written
with the consonants.

Sometimes the vowels

nunciation from that indicated

call for

a different pro-

by the consonants; but

usually the

vowels agree with the consonants as to pronunciation.

1.

K'Btv

Mftn&ti (')

(.'2T\'3' written) is the

is

sometiiBQa substituted for

term applied to the pronundaMS*^.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

34
tion of a

word that

is

called for

[ 19

by the consonants

of the text as dis-

tinguished from the vowels written with them.

2.

1^1^ (^"lp>

io be

of a

word called

for

name appUed

read)

is

the term applied to the pronimciation

by the vowels supplied by the Massoretes

to those students of the

Hebrew

the traditional pronunciation represented

text

who

by the present

(the

established
vocalization

of the text).
3. Some words are always read otherwise than as they are written.
These are said to have a " perpetual !^'r^."

The Accents

IV.
20.
1-

n^^iin

The Place of the Accent^

^^12

(1:1);

(l:l);

(1:1);

D^IDDS^

Y"lNn

(1:1);

D^D

(1:6);

":]E^I^ (1:2).
2.

n^^^l

nnn
3.

(1:1);

^Vnnp

(1:1);

Q'^J2ti^

S^*I3 (1:1);

^""laD

(1:6);

J^-lp"'

(2:23);

(3:8).

m^

(1:6);

n^pan
4.

(1:9);

(i:9).

n^^iT)

I^N-Pn

DlpO

(1:1);

(3

(1:5);

^Ipl

(1:5);

!?3iD(2:9);

is).

Y1^^

(1:10);

"HE^n

inn

(1:2);

21;?

(1:2); i<tt^"l (1:11);

(1:5);

Dfc^i;

Y*l' (1:20);

E^DJ

(1:11);

HV (2:8).

(1:20);

(2:12).

1.

The accent or tone may

word

is

called Milra"; or

called Mal'Sl;
2.

syllabification of a

word

is

is

concerned, a closed

with a long vowel, or an open syllable with a short vowel,

as a rule, accented ( 28.

3.

on the ultima, in which case the

but never on the antepenult,

So far as the

syllable

rest

on the penult, in which case the word

is,

1. 2).

Uninflected words, and words receiving in inflection

no

endings,

are accented on the ultima.

4.

Nouns of the

class called Segolates,

which are really monosyllabic

( 89.), usually accent the characteristic vowel

and not the helping

vowel.

Note

1.

^The place of the accent in

inflected

words, involving

appendages, must be studied in connection with the subject of verbal

and nominal

inflection.

1 Tbe place of the accent is indicated in this grammer by the the use of the accent-r*.
Words which are not thus indicated are to be accented on the ultima.

35

BBBRBW

ELraOlNTS OF

36

Note
syllable

2.

^The term

"accent"

which receives the

is

[22

used of the sign marking the

term " tone"

stress of voice; the

is

used of

the stress of voice.

Shifting of the

21.
1-

rh'h "ip

(1:5);

2.

r\m

but

(4

7).

nsD

nm

n^v

(S

11);

3.

-1Dt^'Ul:3); niD^V'(l:22);

4.

n^DNi
jT
IT

(3:18);

(Ex. 6
1.

is

^5Ji<

(7

4),

but >pj^^ (4

^^^"(2:7); Dp"!

(4

"inalm,
j*

(3:i9).

9).

:'8).

n^ym
~
j"

6).

The tone is

which

J-

on^ ^DS^n

(i.-n);

(Ex. 3:20);

'n"'3m

Tone

often shifted from the ultima to the penult of a

followed closely

by a monosyllable,

or

by a

word

dissyllable ac-

cented upton the penult.

2.

The tone

is

sometimes shifted in the case of words standing at

the end of a clause or section,

3.

W&w

i. e.,

in pause ( 38.).

Conversive with the Imperfect usually causes shifting of

the tone from the ultima to the penult

syllable ( 70.)
4.

W&w

and the former

is

when

the latter

is

an open

closed.

Conversive with the Perfect oftoi causes shifting of the

tone from the praiult to the idtima ( 70.)-

22.

The Table of Accents

1.

DisnwcrivEs
CUss

1-

I.

:pi^psfflfik

Emparors
3.

^n^iDs-goitft

4.

Vhtht}

ti^

2.

mnx'Atoi*

t<

SalSlleJ

Cbws n.Kings
5.

pbp

6.

^1naP]p^lZ&lf:efg&d61...J<

8.

i^DKfB pasta

9-

yn^ Y'v
KHDO V^

P]pTZakeflf&lion..^5

CUac

10.

7.

J/in-l

RM(&)'

m.Dokas

11.

-iian

TMr

(<

12.

Kp-^t Zarti

it,

BY AN INDUCnVB IfKTHCO

23]

37

Clan IV.Counts

G&eS

14.

D^&*13 GT&Siyim

15.

Inpni^L-larmehi....!^

13. 2^-^|

16.

-1)2 P&zer

17.

niD

18.

n^ln:i ^^^bp\

''J"1D

?ani6 F&r&

TIT-:

{<

T'ltsa
,

6'ddl&....j<

CONJUNCTIVES

2.

v.Servants

Class

19.

^^DlDMerxa

20.

i^^IDD

HD1D

5<

miDMfhiilji

22.

^^n^Darg&
ST

23.

25.

n^Dp

(t

NE^'i^'n T'lisa

?taniia,

^
^

26.

}^

27.

1p1''"D riT Ylrabben

y6m6

J<
V

itblp adma

Remarks on

23.
1.

TjSna M&hpax

Merx&

x-fftia

21.

24.

i^^'i^D M''ay-ylll

J<

the Table of Accents

The "Accents" were designed to have a threefold

a. To serve as musical notes in the cantillation of

use:

the

Law and

the Prophets in the synagogue;

6.

To

indicate the tone-syllable

(i. e.,

the syllable which

is

to

be accented) of every word;

c.

To show

the relation sustained by each word to the other

words in a clause or sentence.

2.

Every accent

is

used as a sign of interpunction ( 23.

1. c),

to

separate or join the several words of a sentence:

a.

Disjunctives (those numbered 1-18 in the Table)

mark a sepa-

ration.
6.

Conjunctives (those numbered 19-27 in the Table) mark a

connection.
3.

The

Disjunctives vary in strength or power, and are accordingly

divided into four ranks: Emperors, Kings, Dukes, Counts.

4.
>

>

Those accents numbered 9 and 18 are

p-e-positive,

Made op

of Mflni^ and Pcslt:.

Used for Mi*6i with words wbleh have

snitu^ or 'AteUj.

i. .,

written

ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW

38

only on the

word may
5.

first letter of

['-24

a word, wherever the tone-syllable of that

be.

Those accents numbered

3,

8,

25 are poat-jiositWe,

12,

i. e.,

written only on the last letter of a word, wherever the tone-syllable

may

of that, word,
6.

be.

whenever

post-positive accents are repeated

The

accented on the Penult, or has PaSah-furtive ( 42.

then-

word

is

under the

2. d)

last letter.
7.

may be

Silluk

distmguished from Me'fleg (

?:adma, and Y'Siv from

The Consecution of the More

24.
1

Yl^^n

VnXn

2.

IT

1.

;,

-rin!?

T^--

ng'n?!

D^"^^^?

(P&sflk) is separated

Note.

its tone-syllable

M6fleg (

is like

Gen.

^
=

1.
:

Gen.l:7.
cten. i

28.
:

from the verse following by

called S6f P&siik (end of the verse)

every verse has on

in form,

Accents

D^-i^N
v:
A-

Every verse

from

^^''- ^

yns^n'^y

the sign

Common

::

3-:p
:

MahpaX by

18.), Patll

their position.

the accent

while the last word of

-r-,

called Sillflk, which,

18.).

Since SHlflk always stands on the last tone-syllable of a

Mefleg never stands on a tone-syllable, they are easily

verse, while

distinguished.
2. If

the verse contain two primary sections, SQltl^ marks the end

of the first, while the

Note

1.

^In

begin with SilKik,

Note

2.

marked are
3.

end of the second

i.

e.,

Note.

by

-7-,

'

Aflnah.

at the end of the verse.

These accents have only relative power.

The

pauses

logical pauses.

If the verse contain three

indicated

indicated

the study of the accentuation of a verse one must

of the first; 'Affn&h, the

is

is

by

primary sections, SilHit marks the end

end of the second; while the end of the third

-^, called S'golt&.

^For an explanation of the repetition of -^, see

23. 6.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

5 24]

4-

D^sn-

y-iNin

ri^nn

b^ib

^nan^

When

a^b^n

-Gen. i

-{mTV ..U^rhii IDm-

Dipe^n

Dni<
T

Gen.

a primary section

9.

Gen.

i.

aico-^s "il5<'n-ni< ... Gen.

4.

1 : 28.

is

u.

D^"^b^

-ilxn

Gen.

V:

V:

4.

!inDV.-Gen.i:2
T

n^^'^n
AT T - -

6-

6.

nb'^hn

5. a.

Dinn
A

n^rib^
v:

,T

39

large

n^ia^'^ni

nt^-l

E^mn-

...

Gen. 3: 14.

T T

enough to be divided, or to con-

tain a secondary section, the end of this secondary section, whether

it

stand in the primary section ruled by

frequently
5.

a.

marked by

Silliljk:

or 'kBnli!^,

is

most

called ZHkef k&ton-

In secondary sections containing but a single word, where

Z&kef k&ton would have been expected, Zlkef

g,d61,

is

generally

found instead.
h.

indicated
6.

secondary section of

by

ZS,kef

The pause

k&ton

required

marked by a disjunctive

is

less

importance than that which

marked by

is

called R'vi(a)".

by the rhythm before

SilKlk

and 'Afe&t

t", called Tif^S.; that before S'g6lt&,

is

by ^,

called Z&rka.

Note.

^For the consecution of the

Table of Consecution of Accents (

7.

:yni<in

8.

&th\< ^2

n^<ti

n^^^"1p
T
:aT

9.

(1:1);

:D^sn ^iB'Si?

Qinn ^:s-Vy-

...(i:2);

.(i :2);

(1:5)-

y) JT

nt^T n^t^;? ^3
7.

(1=1);

remaining disjunctives see the

25.)

(3

14) ;

jan-Tjina

iKffe

The Conjunctive accent which always accompanies

(3:3).

Sillflk is

called MerxS..

The Conjunctive accent which always accompanies 'Atoa^ is -r,

MM.h.
9. The Conjunctive accent which always accompanies S'g5lt& is
likewise Munah.
8.

called

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

40

25.

[S25

Table Shotting the Consecution of the Accents

or

or

or

<

or

or

or

REMARKS ON THE TABLE

1.

first

2.

The Consecution
conjunctive,

The

is

of SilKJi^

and 'Ato&h, with the exception

the same.

3.

and

third disjunctive preceding Sai1%

preceding S'golt& and Zi^ef k&ton, and the

6er^,

after

which the consecution

This GereS

of the

may

is

the

first

same

'Aftiife,

preceding
for

the second

RM(&)'

is

all.

be entirely omitted, in which case the servant

oi the preceding disjunctive will

be present and

will

assume the func-

tions of GereS.
4.

After !^admS. the consecution

|^<{ann& (and

its

Mt^ih's)

or, if

may

there

is

proceed either with T'lli&

a slight emphasis, with the

disjunctive T'ltSi 6'ddl& (and its MllnUh's).

5.

Words standing between the T'USi

and the beginning of the

related,

but PIzer

if

^i'tannil or the T'liS& 6'd61l

section, will receive

there

is

tween P&zer and the beginning of the verse

Note.

Instead

(It-)) is substituted

of Mfin&h,
if

there

MUn&h if they are closely

a great emphasis.

is

L'garmeh

Words standing

will receive
(i. e.,

be-

Mfln^.

MflnSJti with P'sflf

a slight emphasis on the word.

BT AN DiSUCnVS UETHOD

25]

6.

Instead of P&zSr, preceded by Mfhi&lj, there

which

!|^anig Fir&,

words

will

Note

is

may be

substitutod

always preceded by Yerab bgn ydmd.

Other

have M6n&hi.
1.

^This table exhibits in general the features of the prose

There

system.
is

41

are,

however,

many

exceptions.

The

poetic system

entirely different.

Note

2.

A few accents, occmring but seldom, are omitted from

3.

the table.

Note

^This

very brief treatment of the accent aims only to

introduce the student to a subject, which demands

study and investigation for

Wickes,

Treatise

on

its

mastery.

Prose Books of the Old Testament (1886)

so-called Poetical

(1881).

Reference

the Accentuation of the

Books of

the

Idem,

much

may

careful

be made to

Twenty-One

so-called

on

the Three

Treatise

Old Testament, Psalms, Proterbs and Job

SyUables

V.

Kinds of Syllables

26.

t<V3(i:i); !in-n(i:2); in-b"! a

1.

a =2);

tjs

=2);

i,t

(1:3).

H-?P

2.

^E;D^
1.

^^-p

(1=4);

(1:11);

which end in a vowel-sound are called open.

which end in a consonant are called

2. Syllables
1.

3^

(1:4);

(1:18).

Syllables

Note

(1:6);

closed syllable

whose

closed.

consonant

final

is

doubled

is

called sharpened.

Note

2.

^What seems to be an unaccented open

short vowel,

is

of frequent occurrence;

half-open syllable; but

it is

^^01

(1=20); -)t:;^ (1:7).

tn-3-bn-D-1

2.

lavE^'^

(1:20); H^E^'-fc^'ia (1:1):

nE^m

1.

21);

(4:4);

ai"!

2. Syllables

22) for 2*11;

and

^wfi

!|;

always having under

Remark.
S'wfi.

do not form

^^'^^'

(1=1);

r?"''

y-)^^ (1

5) for

2^:

but Padal}-

syllables.

must begin with a consonant, the only exception being

the prefixed conjunction

they
it

may begin with two

consonants, the

a vocal S'wS,.'

Syllables often occur

which apparently begin with a

These are cases in which S'wa creeps in after a laryngeal as

a transitional or

and

D^T>'^

A word contains as many syllables as it has vowels;

furtive ( 42. 2. d),

first

(1

with a

called a

Syllabification

1.

syllable,

commonly

better treated as closed ( 10.).

27.

3.

this is

liaison

element linking the two syllables together

facilitating pronunciation of the laryngeal.

The *w&

is

better

treated as belonging with the preceding laryngeal.

>

Tbere ts a lingle zeBpMan to tbis remark,

IE silent,

42

viz.,

inv (Gen. 4

19) in wliieh the i*w&

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

28]

may end

3. Syllables

The

strong.

in two consonants, but only

these are

is

generally

36.).

Quantity of the Vowel in Syllables

28.

^li^-n

when

harshness resulting from this combination

avoided by the insertion of a helping vowel (

1.

43

br^

(1:4);

n^2;'-n2 (m); ir)2

(1:7);

(i:i);

n:^^^-ri (i:2)/
2.

3.

i^Vp^l

(1:5);

b)3r^

(1:7).

D^dWh

(1:1);

4. (a).

^^"20

nTp^

(1:10);

n^^b

(2:22); ^D^^ (2:24);

HN

(1:6);

Dpi

(4

(1:1);

15).

J^E^'n-n (1:4);

(6).

n|7^J

(c).

j^1j5h3 (l:14);1i<bp (1:22);

(1:26);

(18:12).

('Q. ijHt^'l
I-

ni2

5.

D^D
-J-

(6:14);

J-

(1:6);

i^l

1.

The vowel

of

2.

The vowel

of a closed syllable

tone;

when

it

it is

an unaccented open

has the tone,

The vowel

3.

tone;

pure,

(1:22); ^IJ^
(19:4).
'^j-

vj-

must be

a,

i,

u,

long.

short, unless it has the

he long.

it Ttiay

of the sharpened syllable

i. e.,

must be

syllable

and not

is

short, unless it has the

deflected,

i. e.,

e or 6.

Short vowels are often found in what appear to be unaccented

4.

open syllables, and are often called half-open

syllables;

For example

better treated as closed syllables.

but they are

in (a) d&geS-forte is

implied or understood, thus making the syllable closed; in

ryngeal once had no vowel

and the
not
{cf.

'w;S, is

aflFect

(<)

5.

>

The vowel
Kgs. 20 14.
:

[2:9];

(c/.

of

,(c)

the S'wS,

is

the la-

IDJ^V' iTI^n')
and does

to be treated as silent

the laryngeal was once vocal and closed the syl-

and the short vowel

come quiescent

I'On^

therefore only a secondary helpingrclement

the syllabification; in

10.); in

lable,

(c/.

(6)

persists

even though the laryngeal has be-

10.).

an open accented
*

syllable

Isa.

61

may

10.

be short

Euphony

VI.

Short Vowels

29.
1.

a.

^3''-

of Vowels*

D"'D^~ (1:10):

nir'3''- (1:9);

(1:4);

JT

J"

H")! (1:20);
J''

J-

;;nii3 (1:11)6.

-n^n

'

n2K/

Dye

2. o.

HE^^J

n^n

py^

(2:22);

npi

(2:23);

nD''D2/ (15:6);
e.

(1:7); P|{

'

Hp?

(3:23);

''^^n

(3:13);

(2:24);

(2:9).

noa"'
rf.

HD^

(2:3);

b^"!?

'

(3:1).
e.

(2:12); j^ (2:8);

"Dnt

(1:25);

(2:9);

nn^3

1^^)

(1:26);

iBN

(1:29);

]^i<

(2:5);

(24:32).

(2:5);

(2:24);

^3ND

n^y^M2:6);

Ini^fjj^

(2:24);

yV_

(2:9).

(1:22);

p'l(2:22).
6.

inpDJ

Tbe pure

(2:5);

6c3p];

(3:5).

3. a. !|Vd''1 (2:1);

1.

TCDH

^fe^D^ (1:18);

J<-Ip>|-(1:5);

D"'STy

short a

is

(3:7);

Hp^

(3:23);

Dp"" (4:24);

found:

a.

In unaccented closed, or sharpened

b.

In the closed

syllables;

syllable with secondary accent of

nouns in the

construct state, and a few monosyllabic nouns and particles;

e.

In the accented closed syllable of

d. (1)

As the accented

characteristic

many

verbal forms.

vowel of laryngeal and

SeoIates ( 89.); (2) before the sufSx

^J,
the locative ending

and

't'JJ

(3) sometimes before

Tut

treatment

Is

not intended to be ezhaustlTe;

emplete, howerer, so far

it will

u general principles are concerned.

44

be found pnetteallr

BT AN INSnCnTX IfBTHOD

29]

45

In a closed syllable with M0e ( 18. 3) before a compound

e.

g-wfi.
2.

The pure

some accented open

in
b.

4)

That

from an

though
3.

found:

i is

In unaccented closed, and especially sharpened,

o.

and

short

original

it is

syllables,

but

which comes by attenuation or thinning (

a must be distinguished from an original i,

(-r-)

syllables ( 28. 5);

36.
al-

subject to the same rules as the latter.

The pure

short

found almost exclusively in unaccented

is

ii

sharpened syllables.
4.

TIN

(1:4);

ibn)

'n-l2''l (1

DE^'KaiS);

22);

K^"n3"U3 24)
:

(4:1).

TjE^'n (1:2); 2|^;5?.(1:11); ^VJj^-.lS); ^^^1 (1:22);

nam
5.

-^3

(1:21);

'(2
mn;;
t:^

4.

yij;

(2:9);

The

H^^^^

15);

13^;:

HUHS

(1:29);

n'lOE^
t;

short e-sound -=-

(2

(e),

D3T

[^E)^,"^];

15);

(9:2).

(3:21);

-bDt<
T-:

(3

(2:22).

'^'2^)

n3n"l

(6:15);

-sty
T^n-

ID;

as a deflection from a or

a.

In unaccented closed syllables in general.

&.

As an imaccented vowel

c.

As a helping-vowel

d.

As the

e.

In unaccented closed syllables before laryngeals.

in certain forms with

i,

(2

w&w

24).

found:

conver-

sive.

Note

1.

characteristic accented vowel in Segolate forms.

^There

is

also to

which appears in certain

nominal forms (DHi^;
is

in Segolate nouns.

be noticed the characta of die

particles,

DH;

e. g.,

DD:

\T\>

VQ,

^^^t,

?D);

^^

etc.,

-r-

and pro-

origin of

which

obscure.
5.

The

short o-sound -r- (o), deflected from

-TT (a)

and sustaining

tfiined

by

syUsUee.

-?-() to

to -^r

-:-

and -^

(0 and -^

and more common than

(5) the same relation diat

(e), is

sus-

found in unaccented closed

ELEMSNTS 07 HEBREW

48

1. a. j;j

C.

(4

14)

D^"ib^?: (l

T)^

nfi";

l)

for ya'mer;

(4

25)

6p = W\-

^Hd;

'16him /or 'iaiiim; -IDi^"* (1

Vl3

(1

16)

30

Long Vowels

Naturally

30.

= gM6\ for gMH;

3)

^'^^

yo'mer

(2

16)

'kXol for '&X^l.

2. a.

^n^l

^lSV

6.

rpi^

yamtn^;

d.

n^E^3; (3

(1:6); la^-l

(2:7); |E^1^

bSsid";

ni^fa =

TipH =

13) for n'^t}}

ir^ipp: ^n^i.v

jW^"; (2:21).

mlli(a)l;i;

(3

17) for in"i!|it

"

'

om)i)c.

= -la^l'

T^Dn (2:5);

DtS^2^1 (3:21);

T^H (3:11);

J^^E'n (3:13);

^nDn(l:18).
/

3. .

D^pr? (9:9); D1Ef?\ (6:16);

D1C'n(3:19); DIpV"; Dip-"
;

6.

irin

= inn

(1

2)

'

iriB

!|ri2

noin

2) ;

"iDin *;

Dpin-^'

in

on;;

D; n^jian

(4

Naturally long vowels have arisen either

(1)

c.

(3

14);

(3

23);

nns

(3

24);

C^D"|(12:5).

a vowel and semivowel

certain nominal
1.

(i. e.,

y or w), or

and verbal forms, or

(2) as

(3) in

from contraction

the characteristic of

compensation.

Naturally long t (-^, seldom J^_), coidQpara,tively rare;

is

found:

In certain forms of middle-vowel verbs ( 86.) of which

a.

of

it is

characteristic.

In certain nominal forms, of which

h.

91, 93.).
>Bz. 22:1,

6, 7.

it is

characteristic (

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

30]

c.

Naturally long

rounded to 6 ( 30.
2.

Naturally long

47

the great majority of instances, was

&, in

6).
{

sometimes __),

found;

is

a.

As the contraction

b.

In certain nominal forms of which

it is

characteristic ( 91.).

c.

In certain nominal forms in which

it is

compensative

d.

In certain

e.

In

Hif'il forms, in

In

certa^in

n"7

of

( 81. 82.).

ij/

( 92.).

forms, before consonant-additions ( 82.).

which e would naturally have been ex-

pected.
/.

3.

forms of middle-vowel verbs.

Naturally long
a.

As

6.

As the

would be

ii (!|,

sometimes -^)

is

found:

5al forms

characteristic of certain middle-vowel

contraction, of uw,

VQ

in certain

final;

tain middle-vowel

( 86.).

whenever the combination

and

Hof'al forms ( 80.);

and ^"^ Hof'al forms, which seem

uw

in cer-

to follow the

analogy of Y'S forms.

c.

As

characteristic of certain nominal forms, including the !^al

passive participle.
4. o.
b.

p3

(1:4); pl"'?*;

3^pin
J

J.

(4:7)

D^rj?

t^tiv

(3:6).

from

np;'^''r\ (21:7) from

T^"!.!:!;

e.

riK'^ (6 14)

d.

Tf^n*;

e.

1JS (1:2) =

''it

from

"ifc^j;;

HIpP

(1

^mit

Ti^iy'; nt<"in^ w-

p-nS from 1J); "ij^^ (1

(3

16);

10)

miO^wg from

11)].

IJ'ij;;

(3:7);

tp^

"(4:10).
,

5. a.

^-

c.

nybvTf; nT'2'2W: n^'i'ow';

"^^.^in

Gen. 12

Sam. 15
Ruth 1:9.

?J''|5<

15.
:

nraiDn-"

(3:19); ?j"*2S (4:6); [.TDID]-

(3:14);

nil^n

nj^ 'an";

9.

(2

n^)J

5);

(1

Ex. 3 10.
Gen. 49 24.
" Gen. 37 7.
'

11); n|;J;. (18

25).

Deut. 3 21.
Isa. 26 7.
"1 Sam. 3 11.

'

Deut. 4 35.
Deut. 1 44.
" Zech. 13 7.
*

BUBUENTS OF HEBBIW

48

Naturally long e (written

4.

ai,

and

found:

is

a.

In the mflection of

b.

In the Hifil forms of verbs originally

c.

In the Imperative

"l"^ Segolates ( 109.).

m.

(2

sg.) of

the construct state of nouns ending in

"'"S-

verbs

n__

H"?

( 82.)

and

in

( HI-)-

(f)

d.

In

e.

In the plural construct ending of masc. nouns,

/.

In the penult of a few nominal formations.

Note.

30

yet sometimes __ and H-aJ

''__,

eomes from the contraction of ay at

[S

perfects before consonant additions ( 82.).

n"?

^The iotd very frequently yields to

t,

H"?

( 109.).

especially in active

perfects.

Besides

5.

there

i,

wise arises out of ay.

is

another naturally long e-sound, which

It

is

written

of distinction, be transliterated as
a.

njT

tion

In

n"/

1
6.

and

r\-:r-

It

found:

is

and

<uid, after

( ^)i

the analogy of these forms, also as a

^"^

forms.

In the forms of plural nouns before the pronominal

sufiSxes Tl

ri ( 109.).
c.

T^al

like-

^^ sake

Imperfects and Imv's before the fem. plur. termina-

separating vowel in similar middle-vowel and

b.

**^ ^^Yf ^'

In the absolute forms of noims from

Impf. uid the Participles of

6. a.

^Di<T

(2

E'ph

16)

(1

26)

H"/

'kXblfor '&X&1;

roots

H'/

and

in the

verbs.

t^Jf'l
"

(2:10)

= rfimeS for rames; ^^^D

= y69e', /or y&ge';

(2

13)

=s6vev for

s&vev.

IDti'' (1:3)

c.

D\i^J< (l:l)="16hlm;
(26

[^^nt

-|1"^ (6:9);

y'6fef ; lE^tS^aH'' (2

"nDjtJD (6:18); ?|''n3''K^n (28: is);

b.

(1

Pjpn

Sub. S2

DlW

(3:22);

31).

nDlW")

Dl""

= yi^61 for yiyf&l].

D^l^

d.

7. a.

>

= y6'mer for y4'mer;

b'

(1

20)

5); "Tjln (1

(4:2)

23.

6)

= e6x

[cf.

^tHi

t6sef;

>

Nahum

14.

25)

= yiflbdSJ^fi.

"inlsp*;

nrp/

r^^-

(5:4);

fc^-I^J.*

laa.

IS :

3.

^]

BT AN INDUCTIVE MBTHOD

c-

nn^ln

d.

irp!? (1:11); 13 (1:11);

(2:4); -|i;lQ (1:14).

m2

8.

T T

6.

(9:13, 14, 16);

6, for

n^HN

(1:11);
ly-^]
;"

(19:25.
U^'^^n
T

I.

Naturally long

many

49

(12:8).

t: IT

29);

IT

nKin

(1:9);

Tt"

the most part written defectively,

cases only the rounding of a naturally long & ( 30. 1).

is

in

This

the case:

is

o.

In the fonns of the Infinitive Absolute

the 5al Active Participle ( 68.

In the ]^al Imperfect of verbs {^'S

Nif'al of middle-vowel verbs ( 86.).
b.

and in

and

in the

( 79.),

d.

In a large number of nominal formations ( 91. 92.).

In so-called Polel (or P6'el), and Hi9p61el (or Hi9p6'el) forms.

e.

In the separating vowel used before consonant terminations

c.

in the Perfects of
7.

( 67. 1. 6),

1. a).

There

is,

y"y and

of the contraction of
a.

middle-vowel verbs ( 85.

however, a second naturally long

au or aw.

This

is

6,

86.).

which

is

the result

found:

In a large number of monosyllabic nouns from middle-vowel

stems.

8.

b.

In the NTf'al and

c.

In

d.

In the contraction of

ffif'fl

many I'B nominal

of verbs originally

fB

( 80. 3. b).

formations ( 98.).

&hA=6

(seldom written H).

Vowels strengthened in compensation for the

a consonant

loss of

are unchangeable, like naturally long vowels.

Note
N.

2),

many

1.

^Naturally long vowels are usually written

fully ( 6. 4.

and are thus distinguished from tone-long vowels.

There are

however, in which the distinction can be determined

cases,

only from a knowledge of the grammatical form in which the vowel

stands.

Note

2.

^Naturally long vowels are unchangeable.

tions to this rule are so few as scarcely to deserve notice.

Num. 22

6.

The

excep-

ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW

60

a.

W^^

nn5?
TV

(1:26);

JT T

^^

Tone-Long Vowels

31.
1.

[$

n^Di?
T
T

(1:5);

(3:11);

nD^

(2:5);

t?n3
jT T

(1:1);

AT

IT

?|in (15:10).
i.

n^y^JT

(1:9);

^npl
c-

N*1-2
JT
T

(1

inniT

n^DN
;

(1:9) /or

(1:2);

TP'^
*
/j
T

(1

(1:28);

6) for

HinpSH

DlpD;

DiEfn
T

^^p^.
|.
&

(3:11); .TJa*;
T JV T

J-

(l:5);n;DV

A short vowel

{-^, -r-, -v),

HJnpSn
T

when

1.

These vowels are

o.

Tone-long
a.

it

would stand in

instead of an original

a, is

(2) in

pause (

close proximity

S,,

if

becoming

e,

their origin, toTie-Iong.

found:

38.);

few Segolates from middle-vowel roots;

In an open
in

(3:7);

tone-syllable,

the absolute state of nouns;

(1)

tone-syllable,

the

more recent feminine ending

(106.2.

c.

from

called,

(1) in

(3) in a
b.

I,

In a closed

^J" T

(13:14)-

to the tone, frequently becomes long, a becoming

becoming

(2:23);

(3: 19).

?I^ma

(3:11);

ni^^Jj

ii

^^p;

(3:7);

IT

.TH
T -

(1:26);

^^2:
jT -

1) for

(1:5); njp^E^n (2:6); y^i^ri (1:1); niD-*

Dlp-D

d-

HDHa
T

p]

(from

afl)

c);

(2) in

n*^ and ^"^

(3) in

some Segolate nouns;

verbal forms ( 82. 83. 1);

In an open yeioTie-syllable; always, except as indicated

in

32. 2.
d.

In an open poattone-syllable,
(1) in

the case of the pronominal ending

the suffixes

and

>

Deut. 19:

e.

and frequently

71;

(2) in the feminine plural termination

ending, j^

J^,

{directive) ( 105.).
>

Ruth

8.

and the
HJ.
T

locative

BY AN IKDUCTIVK UBTHOD

31]

2.o.[j|t)t;

\t^]lb-

(2:11); jni (1:17);

n]2f (20

15);

ITi; (2

btD
inn

J^a"! (4:16);

D^K^

|5I;^_ (3

p(19:4);

24);

3J5^(3:15);

(15:16); y;; (2:16);

Dt^

nN(l:l); p(l:7); |2(4:25); 32^^(1:11);

:

"^Sp

18);

(4: 17) /or

^^ (6:5); p^

(5:1);

nDl^n

8);

inb

(1:2);

(2

(2:21);

16); 2K(,'1 (4

8).

23^

16) for

(Dt.

^p\

J;T.

n2^^

(1:18);

in^b^^ (30
6.

(3 :8);

28); ^^^f (1:8); ^y^i (4

J;T
3. a.

TjVnnp

230

(2:14);

^^21_ (1:4);

nan3(l:24); n3pj(l:27);
28

ribh

(4:12); jf) (4:42);

(15:1); b*))} (17:14);

(2:11);

b.

flH

\t^Jp^ (2:3);

3nn"'.(3:8);

pP

(1=26);

^T"}' ^P"!

51

^JDI

(2:2);

DIH (25
(l :2);

30);

injbp

(2:21);

pr2^ i; ^3

(1

(32:11);

30).

rjK^n (1:2); *|j?3 (1:5);

Qtlp

(2:12).
c.

2.

lE^'n: g5-r1i^;

Tone-long
a.

instead of short

In a closed

(1) in

or __,

of notice

is its

the ^^al Perfect of

Nif al,

stative verbs ( 61. 2),

1.

and

in

a);

jHJ

( 78.),

and

Y'Q ( 80.);
and Hi^pa'el forms in which the

Pi'el, Hif'll

whence e comes, was

(4) in

a few monosyllabic

the ^^al Imperfect and Imperative of

of verbs originally
(3) in

found:

occurrence,

many

the !^al Active Participle ( 68.

(2) in

is

feme-syllable; always, except in

Worthy

particles.

Tj^bp'; "T]-)3y

i,

originally a ( 59. 1);

many monosyllabic and dissyllabic nominal

formations;

(5) in i-class Segolates ( 89.).

b.

of

i,

In an open pretone (or ante-pretone)

always instead

as,
(1) in

syllable,

Lev. 13

3.

nominal formations;
'

Br. 12 39.
:

Num. 22

6.

*2 Sun. 7 TO.
:

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

S2

[S

the preformative of the ^fal Impf.

(2) in

of

32

verbs

*)*)

( 80. 2. a).
3.

Tone-long -^
a.

In a closed
the

(1) in

instead of -^,

(o),

found:

is

Worthy

tone-syllable.

of notice is its occurrence,

Infinitive Construct, Imperative,

lK.a.1

and Imper-

fect ( 66. R. 2);

Perfect of a few stative verbs ( 64. 3);

(2) in

the

(3) in

a few nominal forms ( 90.

l^a.1

1. c);

b.

In an open (on-syUable, in u-class Segolates.

c.

In an open

Note

2>refo7te-syllable.

^Tone-long vowels axe correctly written defectively;

1.

the later language the incorrect full writing

^The

Note

is

unchangeable.

Reduced Vowels

32.
a.

frequent.

tone-long vowel, arising from the rejection of

2.

D&geS-forte from a following laryngeal,

1.

is

in

D-l^'T-l (1:16) /rem

^T^; rhi^D

(1:16) from "llJ^-D;

IJ^Jf from ^)r^^.

b.

on^ty-i;' for un^^-::;

nnnryvor Dnary.

c.

i;ivn

ri^rh^y

2. a.

(4

25) for ):i,yr\:

(1:2)
nn\"l
t;it
(3

16) for

for

nn\-I;
jt-t
T

b.

3?1p'^ (1:20) from

:!"
j: ^bn

IJinE^"" (1 :20) for

^)i'^^\

::

n^n; Hjnj
J

for "i^-inb^-a.

(3

njnjJT - T

12) for

IT

^^^y.

>;iB

^^^

(1:2);

(1:16); ""DT

(4:10).
e.

d.

trpV)i

rf^^^

(*
(2

T|j;-|] (3

10)

17);
:

Remark.2
3. a.

nnnX

>Rilil:8.

A'' p^if

DpbD^f

(3

'':y1^ (3

5);

5)

^^p

from

(3

^f.

10);

Tjiha

(3

14);

15).

originally

(3il7);

2; ^

D\'iVn

>Itth2:ie.

orig.

(1:1);

7;

3 orig.

Se^^<

3;

(1:7)";

>Ratli3:13.

^ orig.

").

nDn(2:6);

<Batkl:2.

BT AN INDUCTITX MSTHOD

32]

h.

nnpb

c.

2ni1

(2:23) for nvsph; 'h'l^';

^nSH^I

(2:12);

53

inabn'; ni;;D3-'

(1:18); HptSfl (27:26);

way

short vowel, or a tone-long vowel, gives

simple or compound,

when

would stand

it

to S*w&, either

an open syllable at a

in

The change may be called reduction

distance from the tone.

"D-IDV

( 36. 3).

Reduced vowels are found:

1.

2.

In what would be the owiepretone-syUable,

a.

In the inflection of nouns ( 36.

h.

Before the grave termination in the inflection of verbs ( 71.).

c.

In many verbal forms to which a pronominal

2. h).

suffix is attached.

In what woidd be the preione-syllable,

smd

o.

In the inflection of verbs, before

h.

In the formation of the construct state of nouns

c.

In the nominal inflection of participial forms.

i.

Before the suffixes

?],

>

">

( 36. 2).
(sg.

and

pi.).

Q2) ^^^ \D> when attached to nouns

:,nd to certain verbal forms.

Remark.
,'ound

In many

particles

which

originally

had

__, there

hut before the tone the original a often becomes

is

(47.

5; 49. 4).

The simple S'w&

3.

( 9. 1)

But the compoimd

class.

one for each

a.

class,

and

is

may represent

the vowel-sound of any

S'wS. ( 9. 2) has three distinct forms,

found:

But sometimes

Chiefly under laryngeals ( 42. 3).

h.

Under a

letter

which

c.

Under a

letter

preceded by the prefix

Note

1.

S'wS.; since

Note

is,

or should be, doubled,

^The S'wS under a laryngeal,

if

!|.

vocal, mvst

a simple S'wa standing under a laryngeal

2.

^The

3.

Simple Sw&

also,

is

be compound
always

silent.

pStef S'g61 never appears anywhere but under

laryngeak.

Note
word,

(2)

is

always vocal

(1) at

under a consonant with d&geS-forte,

the beginning of a

(3) after another S*wt,

except in the case of a final consonant.

>

SSeeh.

4:

12.

<Judg. 16:16.

>2Kgs. 2:1.

iPs. S6:2t.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

54

34

The A-Class Vowels

33.

In accordance with the foregoing statements ( 29-32.)

it is

seen

that the A-class vowels include:

1.

The pure

2.

The attenuated -:-

short -=^

(a).

arising in

(i),

unaccented closed, and especially

sharpened, syllables.
3.

The

short -=- (e) which

deflected

is

from

a, either

with or with-

out the tone.

4.

The

naturally long -r-

which has come from contraction or

(3,),

from compensative lengthening, or from a lengthening characteristic

of nominal forms.
5.

The

naturally long

-^

which has come by rounding from a

(o),

naturally long k.
6.

The tone-long -7-

(&),

which has arisen from an original a through

the influence of the tone.

7.

The simple

-7- (*),

which

a reduction of -^, through the

is

influ-

ence of the tone.

8.

The compound

which occurs instead of -r according to

-=r (")

the usage mentioned in 32.

9.

The

3. a. d.

naturally long "l__

(I)

which

is

probably diphthongal in

character.

The

34.

I- Class

Vowels

In accordance with the foregoing statements ( 29-32.)

it is

seen

that the I-class vowels include:

1.

and

The pure

short -r-

now found

(i),

chiefly in

imaccented

closed,

especially sharpened, syllables.

2.

The

deflected -=- (e), found in unaccented closed syllables.

3.

The

naturally long

4.

The naturally long 1__

coming, as
5.

The

it

(i),

(I),

from
which

iy, see a, 33. 3.

is

diphthongal in

its

character,

always does, from the contraction of ai or ay.

tone-long

-n-

(e),

which has come from an original

-r-,

through the influence of the tone.

6.

The simple

7.

The compound -^

laryngeals.

-r-

(.'),

cf.

33. 7.

(),

occurring instead of

-r

chiefly under

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

36]

65

The U-Class Vowels

35.

In accordance with the foregoing statements ( 29-32.)>

it is

seen that the U-class vowels include:

now found

1.

The pure

2.

The

deflected -r- (6),

3.

The

naturally long

1 (d),

from uw; and see

4.

The

naturally long

) (6),

which

-^

short

(u),

sharpened

chiefly in

syllables.

found chiefly in unaccented closed

sylla-

bles.

coming, as

character,

its

[On the

k, see 33. 5.]

tone-long -^

The

diphthongal in

is

always does, from the contraction of au or aw.

it

6 roimded from
5.

k, 33. 4.

which has arisen from an

(o),

original -^,

through the influence of the tone.

6.

The simple

7.

The compound

(),

see 33. 7.

-tt

occurring instead of

{"),

under

-r- chiefly

laryngeals.

36.
1- a.

npna

(16: 2) /rom

from yiJSt;
6.

Dnni

Changes of Vowels

HpHa; "13T

^Dp

6m<

(1 :24)

from

:injn;

d^i) from d^d?^;

^dj:5

from "IDD-

131;

(15:1) /rom

b^pn,

^^Ij y^J^

from

npr}';

(4:25)

1:*in

D^p^

/rom 7lQpc.

)b^D

rf.

^^13

e.

D^D^T

a.

for

(1:1);
(1:6);

for

D^;S

D^DKT
AT T

ni^np

17);

nOa^
AT
:

b0^r\

lai^f.

(for :i"in:)'6<

i-Mi

^js\'l:2);
(1:16);

^^3(2:23).

'n13;

(17:19)

nnN

(2:5);

(3

(6:7).
:

11).

T AT

(2:16) 6<

ibp^in; lal?'^ (1:20); lbT\

Ql^ia

>Deut.22:4.

(l

but iianj^ (1:21);

n.T
b.

^10^

(1:'5);

(1 :21) for

IT

l^^p

)b^^: ))i^p

I^Di^n (3:1)

nSn

(3:16);
14).

in;"1<T (4:8); "'j;)")nM4

^yi

^13

nIXI?

&<

but

^^^

HIND

(1

(1:20);
=

16);

but

lfc^2 &


KuiMKrrs of hxbbbw

56

In the formation of stems and the

[} 3ft

inflection of words, the follow-

ing vowel-changes occur:

1.

Tone-long vowels are found,

a.

Usually

when

nouns an

in

vowel comes under

original short

the tone, either in open or closed syllables.

b.

When

This

the tone.
c.

a short vowel would stand in an open syllable before

When

comes pretonic,
d.
e.

is

characteristic of nominal formations.

an

in verbs
in

an open

originally ante-pretonic short vowel besyllable.

When a following weak consonant becomes quiescent.

When an originally short vowel comes to stand in pause.

Under such circumstances, a

to

e,

and u to 5
Note.

2.

Cf.

Reduction

pressed to

(see

33-35.)

German

is

alle,

the process

and ebkan;

lowered

but English

dll.

by which a vowel

even,

is

Cf. heaven,

pronounced

also the initial

When

an ultimate

of verbs loses the tone; as

ev'n,

minimized or com-

pronounced

hev'ti,

but Anglo-Saxon

a in America when pronoimced

-=- (a), -r- (i), or

when

-v

(fi)

in the inflection

personal terminations consisting of a

vowel, or pronominal suffixes connected

b.

i is

This process takes place,

quickly.
o.

usually rounded to &;

smallest proportions.

its

but Anglo-Saxon heofon;

efen

is

by a vowel,

are added.

When a penultimate vowel, in the inflection of rwuns, no longer

stands immediately before the tone, as in the formation of the con-

when

struct state,

terminations of gender and

number

are appended,

and when pronominal sufSxes are added.

Note

1.

^Herein

and nominal

the penultimate vowel

Note

2.

consists the great difference

inflection, that in verbal,

^In

some

is

changed.

verbal forms, the

changeable, the penultimate vowel

Note
is

3.

is

Note

4.

vowel of whose ultima

is

un-

reduced.

In some nominal forms, the vowel of whose penultima

imchangeable, the ultimate vowel

duced.

between verbal

the ultimate vowel, in nominal,

Only vowels

is

reduced.

standing in an open syllable

Naturally long vowels are never reduced.

may

be

re-

BT AN INDUCTnVK HBTHOD

i 36]

3. o.

r\2^\

(2

h.

6e3p.

6<

c.

Tj-imby;

4. o.

t^"1.p 6m<

bep^];

npp"l

laen*: n^3i<

(i =29) /or

[bD^Vor b^}}\ ^D^j

c.

Y"^^{(l:24); 3nj;(l:5);

-m

(*A).

(4

K^np^

1);

6K5pn

nbDi<;

/or

H?'

(2:3);

Dppi; na"!

(9:5) /or

b.

5.

^n^H but b^an

2) originally '5y>;

57

(1

18).

&< "Ha-*

(24: 30) /or

/or

btDpni-

bavi- bipjin/or

^'pj^ni-

fc^D^ (1:24); QrT^ (20:18).

r^m

(6

Qp^^ = Dp^ =

18);

Dp^^

(4:15).
6. a.

n^D^

t.

Mil

c.

(1

(1:24) /or
:

6) for >)n"'l=wiy-hiy;

(1:4) /or

(1

nrO^.

|''3

mn

(1=2) /or

= bay(i[)n; I^D^

(1

mh = OSh^w.
injipb; 13

11) /or

11) for 1,12. etc., etc.

d.

Dp

(/rom Dp);

^ppn

(/'om

(/rom Dpi);

Dipj

bppn)-

^CDlp/m|?pp; ^115 /rom

7.

8. a.

Jf1p-|3

(1

WniD"j3

14);

^iHi (/>m ^3);

Hh^D^

(1:26);

'nbK^

Ha;
(1

IpDl^^ /rom IpSK^.

D^O

15);

(1:22) /or

(1 :26).

^DK^; 13^,^

(2:5);

t: it

b.

(4:8) /or iimnn'';

^nyin'^
:-:!- inb^vi
- 1viv
T

9. a.

for

313; (1:5); ^"1) (1:11);

D^B

nb^^jn
T
;

J..

v:i?

(2:23); rTiS (19:4);

IHS

(1:2).
6.

nennp

c.

E^j;i1

(1=2) /or

neniD; nba^oD

(1:7) /or 2;;;il;

3T

(i:i6) /or

(1:22) for

n^E^po.

^T: ]T

(2:22)

/orJ3''.

>Ruth2:8.

iCx.2:l.
I

Bmk. 20

5.

Ps.2:7.

<Fs. 1:2.

ELEMENTS OF HEBKEW

58
Attenuaiion

3.

-=- (a) to -:- (J)-

a thinning of

is

[36
It

the same

is

change as that seen in sang, sing ; tango, attingo ; and in master which

becomes
s.

mister,

V. Mr.).
a.

when used

as a proclitic title

(c/.

Oxford Dictionary,

It takes place,

In closed syllables containing preformatives

as in the !^al

Imperfect, the Nif'al and Hif'il Perfects.

In sharpened syllables: as

6.

the Pi'el Perfect, and various

nominal formations.

In closed syllables which have

c.

lost the tone, especially in

the construct plural of nouns and before grave sufBxes.

4. Deflection

becomes
in the

b.
c.

5.

e,

and u becomes

6.

The same change

Greek and Latin forms, mihi and meus, hulhus and

nummus and
a.

involves a change of quality in vowels, whereby a

becomes

e, i

seen

fioX/So^,

It often takes place,

v6fw<s.

When
When
When

is

they would stand in an unaccented closed

syllable.

they would stand before a laryngeal with S'wL

a stands as the original vowel of a Segolate form.

Original short vowels usually stand unchanged in sharpened

syllables.
6.

Lengthening (or contraction) takes place,

o.

When two

by the dropping

similar vowels, generally

of a

consonant, come together.

y=i,

b.

When

c.

When

a-\-u or
d.

7.

As

a vowel and a semi-vowel come together; theni-|-y=i,

a or

is

followed

by

or y, or

by

ii

or w; then

o+i

or

w=6.

characteristic of certain verbal

Rounding

is

and nominal forms.

a process applied not only in producing k from

but also in changing the vowel

the Anglo-Saxon ham, hame, or

S,

to 6.

The same change

haam becoming

hom,e ;

stdn,

is

a,

seen in

becoming

atone.
8.

vocal S"wa must always be followed

than by another ^a.

a.

is

by a S'w&,

reduced to

full

vowel, rather

Hence:

At the beginning

ordinarily

by a

of a word,

S'wS., will

an

original short vowel, that

remain without reduction

if

yielding only to such attenuation or deflection as

followed

may

be

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

37]

necessary;

commonly attenuated

is

pound, the short vowel

is

to

assimilated to

but

i,

59

if

the S^wS

is

com-

it.

In the middle of a word, where a compoimd S"wS. stands as

6.

helping-vowel under a laryngeal,

vocal S'wS, immediately after the

when

inflectional

change brings a

compound wt, the

latter in every

case gives place to the corresponding short vowel (or a deflection of

it)

as helping-vowel.
9.

When two

vowelless consonants would

end of a word, a helping-vowel

syllable,

come together at the

usually inserted between

The helping-vowel

aid in pronunciation.

new

is

many

but the nature of the vowel treatment in

shows that the new syllable was not fully recognized

This helping-vowel
a,

with

it is

i,

is

generally

and with

e,

but with a laryngeal

it is

them

to

practically constitutes a

generally u.

(c/.

it is

cases

27.).

usually

The most common

instances of this are:

o.

The

h.

c.

Certain short verbal forms ( 78.

Note.

large class of

The

spoken English;

89.).

1).

use of a helping-vowel

37.

is

common

in carelessly

elm becomes ellum; pris'm= prisum ; film=

e. g.,

fillum; Henry =Henery;

The

nouns called Segolates (

class of feminine formations resembling Segolates.

athletic

= atheletic,

etc.

Tables of Vowel-Changes

following tables summarize the various possible vowel-changes:

TABLE
i+i

or

i+y

a+y
a+i

or a-\-y

a+y
a+a
a+a

a+w
a+u or a-\-w
u-\-u or u-jrw

=
= ay
= ^
= ^
= 6
= ^
= aw
= 6
= ^
1

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

60

[3

TABLE II
original
like

a attenuated to i which then is treated

an

original

original o retained as

rounded to

&

original o

original a deflected to
original

a reduced to

original

a reduced to

'

'

original t deflected to

original i retained as

original i lowered to

original i reduced to

original i reduced to

original

deflected to

original

retained as

original

u lowered

to

original

u reduced

to

original

u reduced

to

Pause

38.
1.

iltS^Efan"! (2:26);

!|nnDJ

(7:11);

?]ni2^a

(3:17);

TjnE^K

(3:17).
2.

D"'Dn(l:2);
IT "

H^l^

(1:5);

T ;at

n^DX(3:ll);
nDa""
t
t
at
;

(l:29)/or;;-5t i.^^f'^X): h'2T\

3-

nnX

(3: 11)

/or

T AT

4.

n=IDn
T

nHK;
JT

(2:17); hut

it

(2:5);

j;"!!

~AT

(4:2)/or^2n (=)2n)-

""DJi^ (3: 10) /or IDJJ^.

HD"!
T JT-

(11:28); and

IT

J*

nb'l
T-

(5 5, 8. 11. 14. 17,

=

etc).

The pause

at the end of a verse or clause, indicated

by the more

powerful accents ( 23. 3), causes certain changes:

1.

S*w& yields to

its original

customary tonal change and

vowel, and this,

is

accented.

if

short, undargoes the

BT AN INDUCTITB UBTHOD

38]

Note.

^The

S'wa standing before the

ori^nal-^, which becomes i ( 30.

2.

A short vowel becomes

becomes

suffix ?|, yields

to

its

5).

tone-long.

The --

in Segolates in pause

-r--

3.

The tone b

4.

The tone which,

ultima.

61

frequently shifted from the ultima to the penult.

in short forms, is

on the penult

is

given to the

Euphony

VII.

Assimilation

39.

nnnp

1.

Consonants

of

(l:7)/ornnn-|P;

-bp

(2:2)/or-^3-|p; D-|j5p

(2:8).

nS"". (2:7) /or

|ni (1:17) /or |nj1;

2.

n2"npvo03inp; nnc)n

3.

n|T

(2: 15) /or

npb^

(35:2);

V^jr

^E)^ (2:8) /or

nn^

(2=21) /or

nin^.

n^\{l8-A); pSJ^^/or pSfl^.

Remark.-^nJDK'"'; Y"1^n-|D
AssimiUdwn

nS^;

(2:6);

^nam(6:7);

"^Bi^-^

of the final consonant of a closed syllable to the initial

consonant of the following syllable takes place:

In the case of the weak

1.

the

first

the preposition

|p

( 48. 1),

and of

radical of verbs |"S ( 78.).

Note.

^This is a

for inresistihle,
2.

J, of

In the case of

Note.

very

'illegible

Cf.

common

thing in English,

e. g.

irreaistihle

for inlegible.
of

( 58. 7.

^i^

attract for adtract;

N.) and rarely of

attest for

"].

annotate for

adtest;

adnotate; appropriate for adpropriate.

3.

In the case of

'p

in

np7 <o <aA;e

R. 2) and

( 78.

in a few I'Q

verbs ( 81.).

Remark.The
an accented

letter

is

not assimilated

syllable, or (2) before

when

it

stands (1) in

a laryngeal (except n)> or

aftw

(3)

the preposition 7.

Note.

^Assimilation

is

consonant, which, however,

indicated
is

40.

1.

nnc)

nnp6)

(4:12);

by a D&ge-f6rte

in the following

rejected from final consonants ( 14.

1).

Rejection
(4:ii);

-E^'yj) (19:9);

nwttyo)

(4:7).
h.

>

riD^C)

Num.

89.

(11:31);

nyn(^)

laa.

44

(2=9); j;-)c) (20=7);

>

g.

62

}z.

26

S.

ni^c)
<

Num.

(4=2).

14

3.

BY AN INDUCTIVB METHOD

41]

c-

i:im

2.

^]^b

3.

inipO

(42: 11) /or

(1:5) /or

(42:20)

IJnj^^; b^i^^ probably for ^^i^'Q.

^I^H^; b^D!

jmiDp

62**

The consonants most

n, the dentals 7 and

63

(1:7) /or

bl^H^:

(3:3); H^^l (2: 10) /or 1^1^.

and

liable to rejection are the laryngeals {^

J,

and the vowel-letters

"|

and

These are

1.

often rejected:
1.

From

the beginning of a

word when there

is

no vowel beneath to

sustain them,
a.

In the case of J of verbs |"S ( 78.) and of

in

Hp?

in

the ^al Imv. and Infinitive Construct.

2.
3.

6.

In the case of

c.

In a few isolated

From
From

or

^ of

verbs V'Q in the same forms.

cases.

the middle of a

word when preceded only by a

S'wfi..

the end of a word, by ordinary attrition, as in the case of

of the plural ending n-,

Note

1.

Note

2.

and

of a final

On the rejection of
On the rejection of

41.

in verbs

and H,

J<
)

''

and

">,

H"/

( 82.).

see also 43.

see also 44.

Addition, Transposition, Commutation

nsnE^nvoOsa^nn; r\)m^y for rmpn:^-

2.

3. a.

1.

of a

piean'/o'-p'nann.- TDiin"'/o'-Tann-

word
J^,

2.

addition of a letter sometimes takes place at the beginning

The

to avoid harshness in pronunciation, as in the case of

called prosthetic,

The

when used

transposition of letters, of

ince of the lexicon, occurs in the

the Ha^a'el of
I

Ex. 3:2.
Gen. 14 13.
Gen. 44 : 16.
:

verbs when

it

grammar only

in the case of

would stand before a

Ex. 6:6.
Deut. 23 19.
" Josh. 9 12.
!

in the formation of nouns.

frequent occurrence in the prov-

32:21.
Mle. 6 16.
" Buth 4:7.
>Jer.
'

of

sibilant fricative.
'Lev. 2:2.
Gen. 22 : 6.
Ex. 3 18.

BUUfENTS OF HEBREW

64
3.

The eommutalum

of letters, of frequent occurrence in the prov-

grammar

ince of the ldcon, occurs in the

a.

6. T

<u^d

and 1

>

1.

y^pin

^c

The

(1:7);

in the case of

Hidpa'el stem.

in I'B, middle-vowel

42.

42

and J^'y forms

(see 44. 1.

ad).

Peculiarities of Laryngeals

niyn

(i:25);

fir2i^r\

n^ntw

(1:22);

(1:9).
i-

nDnia(i:2); ^^inn

(2:12);

n^nn

(i:2i); nB^'nn (i:4);

63?B].
2. a. J^^jll

H^^]!
""

(1:4);

(2:6);

nt^i

(2:6);

i21jj

(1:26);

-3]J;M2:24).'
b.

c.

d.

ng^

(2'r7);

VB^

(2:8);

r]m\{2:9); j;T

(4:25);

[HDp]-

nom (2:9); pm*' (4i:56); ^"nnnM "'jmD;;n.*

(1:29);
nn (1:2); yip"! (1:6); ^ntD (Ml);

^^pn

3;"lj

(1:15).
3. o.

n!?i^tS^*/'-o5&'aiS,;Q\'n^J<(l:l)/rom'a4h;"'^n */ boll.
t

b.

-; IT

I2j;

HlE'y. (2:4);

(2:5);

t:

"ID^

(1:22);

t:

n1^^

(2:18);

qf.

n^'11(12:2).

n|r5n(l:26); n^^M2:6);

r\U^^

(2:18); T]!?:^!)'; ^E)^!!].

Remark8.-ri32^^. (.2:2)but-'y\^{2:2i):

^mS.T
J" ;~!i"

/or

The

(4:8);

J"

They have the

o^ mD;?n^ttrf
;j-'v;i*
T

They

"^ shares

Pi-

refuse to be doubled

and

some

niDi?rn''
- ^i~
ir
:

Deut. 23

23.

sButh2:12.

of their characteristics.

"1,

(i. .,

to receive DigeS-forte).

But

made between,

which entirely reject the doubliag, and require a

strengthening of the preceding vowel ( 75.

>

!|m>T

following peculiarities:

here a distinction must be

a.

(2:9);

laryngeals, in the order of their strength beginning with the

weakest, are ^, y, H.

1.

-i^D^n*
v:tv

-|am

>

Isa. 43 24.
Niun. S 18, 30.
:

>

Ex. 3

1. a);

22.

'Ps. 31:9.

and

Deut. 28 61.
6; 8:
:

Num. 3

13.

BY AN INBUCnVB METHOD

42]

^-

n> *nd n> of which

J?

J?

65

sometimes,

and

nearly al-

ways, receive a so-called DigeS-forte implied, and allow a preceding

vowel to remain short.

They

2.

take, particularly before them, the o-vowels; hence,

The vowel -^

o.

pecially

when a was
The vowel

b.

pecially
c.

chosen instead of

(a) is

-r- (i)

or -=-

(e), es-

(5), es-

the original vowel,

chosen instead of -^

-=- (a) is

when a was a
The vowel -?-

(e)

or

collateral form.
(e),

arising

by

deflection

from

a, is

chosen for

the sake of dissimilarity.

The vowel

d.

final

steals in

between a heterogeneous long vowel and

laryngeal as an aid in pronunciation. This

furtive;

a mere transition-sound and does not make a

it is

It disappears

Note

1.

when

^The

the laryngeal ceases to be

letter "^ (1) does

often shows a preference for ^-, and

for convenience

Note

2.

^A final

is

a.

an

is

not receive DigeS-f6rt6, and

is

not a consonant, nor

preference for

A compound

is final J^,

unless

it

compound

S'wi.

Hence

S'wi, rather than a simple Sw4, in the place of

and

in this case the

to which the original vowel belonged,

and

(2)

consequently frequently classed

found under laryngeals,

original vowel;

6.

syllable.

final.

1).

They have a decided

there

i^ada^-

with the laryngeals.

contain Mappt]^ ( 16.

3.

-=- is called

is

compound S'w&

of the class

used.

An iruerted compound *w& for facilitating the pronunciation;

here,
(1)

an

initial

of

(2)

laryngeal takes

*nd

in

-=r,

except in the case of ^, and

t^ verbs

(T^n and n^i^> which

a medial laryngeal takes that *w& which corresponds to

the preceding vowel.

Remark

1.

^Thus where

S'wft, in laryngeal forms there

in strong forms there is

is

a helping-vowel, which does not

Remark 2.Under

usually found a

found a

silent

compound S*wa

as

affect the syllabification.

the strong laryngeals, especially H. the use

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

66
of the

compound 'w^

43

for the facilitation of pronunciation is not so

general.

Remark

3.

^When a compound 'wi would stand before a simway

ple S'wS,, the former always gives

Remark

4.

The combination -^

removed to a distance from the

1.

a.

\r\;^ (1:1); ^'^^^ (1:5);

6-

n^E^N"!

of

^^ylH

(15:10) /or n>it"1p^;

D^i^?

(3:5) /or

Remark8.-n'^l(l:4);

a.

often yields to

nlfc^J) (1:5) /or

-=r i=-,

and

when

(1:24).

n^E;i<n; D^a'Nn (2:io) for

(1:1) /or

TWr^pb

2.

-vr

tone.

The Weakness

43.

to a vowel ( 36.)-

"IDN^

(1:22) /or

D^i!?5<^; "IDt^^ (1:3) /or

tDn^ b?^^

n^t^y
-^Q^f);

-)!pjJt\

(3:12) /or

^3 S<"^; n^^l'

5)

n^^n^b; Dl^3

^1^!!^; Tjt^'nb

0-

for

(l:'l8).
6.

^n3Ui:7)/orHD<T; m'^T)

c.

irpi?

(1:11) for

mrp^;

(i:9)/o'-n"inn-

13 (1:11) /or in2;

in'i^ (2:3)

/or'inoi^.

The

letters

and n, being exceedingly weak, not only occasion

change, but likewise suffer change:

1.

^ loses its consonantal power and is

a.

Always, when

forms of a
6.

^'^

Often,
(1)

it

said to quiesce or to he

silent,

stands at the end of a word; here belong

character.

when

it

stands in the middle of a word; then,

a preceding vowelless consonant receives

(2) or, it loses its

The S'wi

compound

its

vowel;

S'wS, after a preceding vowel.

disappears as soon as J^ quiesces and the pre-

ceding short vowel

is

strengthened in compensation for

the loss of the ^.

Remark
s

Dettt.

IS 9.
:

1.

all

final J^,

preceded by a simple S'w^

>

Deut. 11

12.

is otiose.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

44]

Remark
of

2.

A quiescent ^

is

67

frequently elided from the middle

a word.
2.

The consonant

from the vowel-letter

on account
a.

of its

^ at the end of a word is always distinguished

H by the presence of a Mappit ( 16. 1). But

weakness

often entirely lost,

it is

In the case of the

article after

an inseparable preposition

( 47. 4).
b.

In

Hif'il,

Hof "al and Hi&pa'el verbal forms

after

a preforma-

tive of gender or person.

c.

From between two

Note.

^The

vowel-letter

of

a.

-1^1

The Weakness of

lh)

(4:23) far

fc.

b.

n^l

21) /or

(2:6)

^b)
T T

and

3Efl

11 30);
=

always a

[c/.

32^1

-7

(4:16)]

J"

i;"!iinn (45: d.

^^1^_ (2:7) for ^a^^

^)i (8:16) for yl; ^^^^

number

nb^

= Wk&;

{i: 16) for

(2:6)=ya"'4^.

n^n"^ (l:29) = yxhyg.

or vowel-consonants,

and

^,

occasion a very

of changes:

CommiUation of
a.

p)\

(2:10) = h,ya;

The semi-vowels,

1.

"/

(3:22) for ^'r\;

npE;n

large

Mb^ny

Q:ip';

r\^J

is

here considered.

^^).
- T

d. |E?>"] (2:
2. a.

(of.

VJT

VJV

for

verbs and nouns ( 82.)

("|"7

and has no connection with the

44.
1.

vowels, which then contract.

into ^ takes place,

Almost always at the beginning

a word, the exceptions

of

being very few.

6.

Frequently in the Pi'el of middle-vowel verbs, and generally

1*0 verbs after

in

Buth 4:7.

J^,";!

'

of the ffi^pa'cl.

Num.

18.

Bx. 3

16.

Deut. 8

13.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

68

Whenever

c.

both when

final

44

retained as the third radical in verbs tl"/,

it is

and when medial

When it would

d.

( 82. 3).

follow i in a closed syllable, as in the |fal

perfect of verbs y'Q which have a 1"^ treatment (

Im-

80.)-

2. Elision takes place,

Of an

a.

I'B

Inf's

Impf. the

Construct and Imv's (

"I,

following

Of a

b.

when supported only by

initial )

final

and

")

and

80.);

does not go over to

i,

in verbs called

lowing them having been previously

ceding, nearly always a,

"i,

H'

S'wa, as in certain

also

when

in the

according to

^^^ original vowel

/>

in this case the

lost;

fol-

vowel pre-

rounded to i in Perfects, and becomes

is

^al

d above.

1.

i in

Imperfects and Participles (see for details, 82.).

3. a.

VlU

J^alH

(41:21);

nrl'^riM rp^n

(1:11)

M ^^i

Tp-in

(3:14)/orhay-yay-U; T]^S5<

6.

HE'i? (6:14) ='s6/or

c.

IpiinVoODin;

1^^; 1^^

(1:2)

(4:7) for

(3:19).

=p"ng /or 1JS.

]^^) {2:21) for p'^J'_=p)\

'^^^'^^

(2:7)

for 'nai''4. a.

|15T (1:4); l^^^p^ (1:22);

h-

inn

c.

vn;?Di:^V/oon^n-;
:-;

(1:2) /or

inn;

(4:26);
1^^
"\,

inDT
6.

"ICi'^^;

c.

-ibr

HppJI

(1:10);

(1:27).

innt:'"' (i8:2)/orinnK^"' (ninn^'^)-'

5. a.

nipD^I

(4:1);
^'l^
~T

rB
T"1^")

-T

(2:7) /or

v^b
:--TT

(4:5).

i.tbj^;

(4:18); -lyi (2:8);

i(\p'>

ITT

It-

(1:9);

(1:2).

see also the cases

"ilil';

(4:18);

niH

under

4. c,

above.

(3:20); ^p\)b^.''

3. Contraction takes place,

Of vowelless

a.

(1) in

or

with a preceding

i,

as

the V'D Nif-al and Hif'll ( 80.), and the "I'B

( 81. 2);
iDout. 1:44.
In then cases a helping
Bi. 3
16.
:

'Ezra 3:
Is
*

Inserted (| so. m).

Deut. 4:7.

11.

Deut. 1

Job 3

17.

28.

ffif'il

BY AK INDUCTIVE MBTHOD

44]

(2) before

and
h.

Of

H^

in

Imperfects and Imv's, and before ?l

H*/

plural of nouns ( 30. 5); here ay gives "'__

ii*

final ^ or 1

with a preceding

a, in

[S).

forms that are closely

tied to the following word, as

(1) in the
(2) in
c.

Of

with a preceding m or

sonant follows, as in.the V'S Hoph'al ( 80.

of 1*3
4.

and I'B

( 82. 1./);

H"^

the Construct plural ending

or

Imperative of verbs

(=ffl^)( 108. 3. 6).

when a con-

respectively,
3. c),

and

in the

%a\ Impf.

verbs.

ofyto^
At the beginning

Vocalizaiion

takes place,

a.

of a

word

in the case of the conjunction

"]

( 49. 2).
h.

At the end

whenever

of a word,

would be preceded by a

consonant, as
(1) in

the case of

H*^

(2) in certain short

c.

The

(1) to verbal
(2) to

when

especially in

1,

attached

1 is lost

and the a roimded

viz.,

^ _

of

(being only orthographically

to

i (

108.) as

an

assimila-

"|.

The consonantal force of

c.

But
to

forms ending in a vowel, and

tion to the

When
When
When

it is

the plural ending used before suffixes,

retained),

b.

Segolates ( 89. 2. c);

forms of the imperfect.

which, however, the

a.

Xb)

reverse takes place, viz., change of

the case of the suffix in,

5.

(or

or

f is retained,

as radicals they stand at the beginning of syllables.

a heterogeneous vowel, except

they would

exceptional cases.

S, precedes.

receive D&geS-forte ( 86.),

and

in a

few

PART SECOND-ETYMOLOOY

Inseparable Particles

VIII.

The Article

45.
1-

D^OtS^n
J-T-

rh'hn

D^Sn
"IT"

(1:1);

-rj^'nri (i:4);

^-

YI^C (^=^)= J?^p*lD (^='^^= 1^^'^

jnn^ pmn'; Dnnn'; il!?n-*

(i:2i);

,Trin

Remark i.-ni^^.DH^
Remark 2.-Y'-|J^n

Remark 3.--ll5<^
in

(1:14);

(1:1) /or

r^r\r\

(2:14).

^^^^^"

ni^isH;

/or

(1:5)

(2:12);

s^inn

n"i''n' /or Hi^'in.

Y^i^H; "IHiT/or IHri; D^H'

/or

nlJ^H

+ b;

/or

(1:5)

"Tja^nb

+ b-

The usual form of the Article is

1.

DVn

(1:14).

2.

4.

(i:9);

^E^2^^
TT"-

(1:2);

^ ^t^^ * DigeS-f8rt5 in the

following letter

^^

Before the strong larytigeals

2.

doubled by implication ( 42.

J^

may

be

and before

before y, which cannot be doubled ( 42.

"1,

and generally

1. a), -=- is

to
4.

which

1. 6), it is

Before the weak laryngeal

3.

and

rounded
r?

Before n>
T

before an unaccented

^''^d

rt,
T

U, the ^:-

is

de-

fleeted to -7- (S) for the sake of dissimilarity

Remark

1.

^The DigeS-forte of

omitted from vowelless consonants ( 14.

Remark

2.

^The

words for

change their vowel after the

Remark
2, 2,
>

of course be

2).

Article.

and the vowel

^Num.

may

mountcdn, people irregularly

earth,

^The H of the Article

( 43. 2. a)

1 Kgs. 8:65.
Ez. 1 19.
:

3.

j^

the Article

13:18.

is

is

given to the preposition.

'

Ex. 1 22.

'

73

elided after the prepositions

Gen. 7:19.
Ex. 3 12.
:

*
>

Sam. 25:24.
Gen. 14 16.

ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW

74

He

46.

47

Interrogative

(3:ii);

^d: ^n^^ iDK^n

1-

nbDi<---- vi?n-|on

2.

^E^^i<-n ';]nnp. ^:iDn (30:i5);

(4:9).

^nxnpi

-tj^

Tjip^itn

3.

iDi^n^
^n^^^^
hje?
ni<a
n^r
"TV
T
T T
T
V
T
:IT

In

direct,

called

He

and

p^n
|

likewise indirect, interrogation, a particle

used

is

Interrogative:

usually written with Hitef

Pa^ah

1.

It

2.

Before vowelless consonants, and laryngeals,

3.

Before laryngeals with

is

(i7:i7).

-?-, it is

J^
it is

written ( 29. 4.

written

pl

e)

while rarely, especially with letters which have simple S'wsl,

it is

written with DageS-forte separative ( 15. 4)

Note.

^Frequently no sign

("I

of interrogation appears; then the

context must be depended upon to reveal the interrogative character

of the statement.

47.
(1:1);

The Inseparable Prepositions

;]1n2

irp^

(1:11);

bn?n^

1-

n^E^'i^nS

2.

;;^p-i3 (1:14); n'll^^pb (i:i5); bi;Db (i:i8);

(1:6);

(1:14).

ijniDi?

(1:26).
3.

n)t^b

12^^

(2:3);

4.

-Il^

(1:5);

ni^a
5.

Q^'bb
IT T

(2:5);

:'~

!'"

-^^i^b
*

TjE^H.^ (1=5);

M ')b^b

^Tp^b

(1:22);

v;iv

(1=7);

nn2.^

t: it

nEl'3:i^ (1:10);

(1:18).

(1:6);

D3^
V T

Remark l.-^JIt^^

(1:29);

n^^ (3:22).

(18:30,32);

^- J-T

D^^'?^

(3:5);

Q^nbvh

(17:7,

8).

Remark 2.nlH"'?

(4:3) for ^j'"]^^; proper writing r\)r\'b-

Three prepositions, 3, 3, 7, are always prefixed to the words

'Ex. 2:7.

>Job34:31.

>

Joel 1:2.

<

Ex. 11:8.

 48]

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

which they govern.

Their vowel was, originally,

75

but now they

-=-;

are found written:

1.

Ordinarily, with simple S'wfi reduced

2.

Before consonants havLag simple S'w&, with

from a

-=i

attenuated

from a
3.

-r-

Before laryngeals having compound S'wS,, with the corre-r,

-^

(6)

4.

Before the Article, with the vowel of the Article. ...-=- or

(i)

5.

Before a tone-syllable, sometimes with tone-long

"?-(&)

sponding short vowel

-=-,

Remark 1.The

{< of

l]nj< Loed and D\'i^5<

consonantal force after the prepositions ( 43.

Remark

2.

^The word mn^j which

is

God

loses its

1. 6).

written nlH^j
T

* e.,

with

the vowels of ''jnt?, rather than

appears with the preposition as

Note
to

-;-,

^The original

1.

but assimilated to

Note

2.

^=-

^For prepositions

yiNn-|P

(to

should be written,

be pronounced "Jl^^^)T
is

usually reduced

retained before laryngeals with

-r- (6)

with pronominal

before

-=r,

-tt-

suflSxes, see

51.3,

4.

The Preposition VQ

nnHP for nnn-|P

(2:6);

it

the prepositions

it is

before -^, and to

48.
1-

H^n^/
T

-=- of

or rounded to -r- (i) ;

niH^

(1:7);

tn^^

(2:8)

for D"|JP-|P2.

yinp
The

(6:14);

preposition

noim and
it is

^i^D

is

prefixed

(1:7) /or

^Q ffom,

is

hT]'^?' ^^^"0 (2:23) /or

really the construct state of

an ancient

written separately, chiefly before the Article; elsewhere

and appears:

1.

Usually with

2.

Before

its

J assimilated ( 39.

.Q

1)

f\, rarely with DigeS-forte implied ( 42.

but before other laryngeals, with

Note.

^^^-)p.

-r-

lowered ( 36.

On the form of |p before pronominal

1)

1. 6)

Q
J^

suflSxes, see 51. 5.

ELEMENTS OF HBBHBW

76

49.

m)

1-

(1:1);

n^Dt^l
J- T

2.

yn^n]

(1:2);

ConfuncHve

TjK^n^l

(1:5);

Q^:^^) (1:14);

(2:4).

(1:4);

nnpJI

)i^^D) (1:22);

inni

P|1;;2!l

(1:26);

HIpD^I (MO);

(1:27).

3. nfc^i?i (24:12);

n^^^

(12:2) /or

^^)

(1:2); fc^D"!"! (1:24);

The conjunction

and, originally

^^^1; Dn^sy;?V;

), is

Ordmarily with simple S'w^ ( 32.

Before 2,

3.

Before laryngeals having

I3>

2.

''J>?i(6:i7).

(4:12).

now found

1.

( 44. 4),

1^1

(2:9);

2.

written:

R.)

and vowelless consonants

compound S"wd, with the

sponding short vowel

4.

corre-

---, -=-, -j- (6)

Before a tone-syllable, sometimes with tone-long

^j^ ( 31.

l.c)

(&)

Note 1.) with

Note

2.

On

Conversive and
<

49

p51

4.

W&w

Deut.

4t :

is

."),

l^yi gives ^'^11 (1:6).

the strengthened form of

),

which

used with the Imperfect, see 70.

6, 16, 23, 26.

is

called

W&w

Pronouns

IX.

The Personal Pronoun

so.
1.

The

following are the forms of the Personal Pronoun:

He

i^in

They (m.)

She

^^n

They

TAoMCmOnn^

Fe(m.)

Thou

Fe

ni<

(f.)

I
2.

The

The

nDH

jH,

H^H

Um
^m, r\:m

(f.)

We

""Dm^jN

ijmi<,ijm

following are pausal forms

"AT
3.

(f.)

QH,

"AT

AT

AT -:

following remarks on the forms of the Pronouns are to be

noted:
a.

^1 ("] she is written {^^ f^

6.

nni^
T

c.

thou (m.)

''1^ I

e.

(f.)

originally "'^^^^ or

seven times

pj^^?;

atti.

more common than the longer form ^3 jj(

"IT
(f.) is more common than )T\, the latter occurring

(c-) is

-!

njin

was

which would be pronounced

If'^iv has ^^^^>

d-

written five times defectively p^^

T

thou

f^X

is

in the Pentateuch, except eleven times.

they

only with prefixes.

/.

|ni^ y^

g.

IjnJN w*

and a form

Note

(f-)

!)JJi^

1.

occurs but once/

is

njnt^> but

the usual form, )^f]^ occurring but six times,'

but once.*

The which appears

p]

in several of the forms

perhaps originally demonstrative, but has lost

Note
nouns

2.

was

its force.

in the

^The following comparative table of the personal Pro-

more important Semitic languages

'Ezek. 34:31.
Gen. 42:11; Es. 16:7, 8;
'Jer. 42: 6 ).
>

four times.*

will

be

of interest:

'Gen. 31:6; Ezek. 13:11,20; 34: IT.

2 Sam. 17:12; Lam. 3:42.

Num. 32:32;
77

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

78

Hebrew.

Aramaic.

Asayrlan.

Arabic,

[51

huwa
hiya

anta

atta

anti

atti

ana

anaku

hum

tlnu

hunna

ina

antum

attuna

antunna

attiua

nahnu

anlni

Note

m
isn,

or

r\2^

]m' psn

on,
)

3.

T J"

T J"

):r\i^,
2 J

nsn

urn

We may note here also the expression ^^D?^

equivalent to a

certain one,

and used as an

J-

J7S>

indefinite pronoun.'

Pronominal Suffixes

31.

Tabular View

With PN.

Separate Forms.

4.

3.

2.

WlUt,

5.

With

3 and h

ip.

Singular

inlD3

3 m. ^n
3f.

1-ipp

i^

2 m.
?J

T|DP
r|

2f.
1 c.

'J1D3

^iSO

DHorD Drin,DnN Dn3,D3 Dns. Dnl03

Dnp

^nk

1_^ or 14

'3

Plural

3 m.

f.

|n

|nn^<

or

.\m

'

n^ni)

]np

DD3 D33, DDlD3

DSD

jni

'

2f-

ic.

^3

uni^

2 m.

O/.

DD

D3n

Buth 4:1:2 Kgs. 6

S.

P?
U3

'___
UlD3

pp
12SP

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

51]

79

When a pronoun is to be governed by a verb, a noun or a preposition,

a shortened form must be used:

The

1.

" separate forms," given above, are the fragments of the pro-

They

nouns which are thus used.

and verbal forms ending

is

employed

The

a.

jvith

but

sufBxes

is

c.

Qn

chiefly

but a so-called connecting-vowel

in a vowel,

forms ending in a consonant.

Q3>

and are termed heavy;

b.

are attached directly to nominal

?3)

all

DH

^^^

others are

always receive the accent

\r\

light.

used with nouns; ^J with verbs.

and |n are used with nouns

with the plural;

and

in

both singular and

are used with verbs

plural,

and singular

nouns.

Note.

On

the union of verbs with suffixes, see

union of nouns with

2.

When

for

suffixes, see

any reason

71.;

on the

108, 109.

impossible, or undesirable, to attach

it is

the suffix directly to a governing verb,

it

may be

written in connec-

tion with nj^> the sign of the definite accusative, which, however,

except before
3.

The

Q3j assumes

prepositions

and 7

before the suffixes (except

Contracts with

a.

contracting with
tion

is

&,

Tl)

and

this

vowel

) (6),

the

(.'06).

and round

restore

and

or Hli^

JTlJ^

IH and forms

with

tL;

rounded to

the form

their original

falling

^^

out and a

n the final k is dropped, the a of the preposiH is preserved as a consonant with mappi^,

the resulting form being p]-r-, but elsewhere,

b.

It appears as

Note.

^While

either before or

either

Q3

or

Qn3
V

under the tone.

may

be used, only

"
QH?
V
T

found.
4.

Between the preposition

foimd an inserted syllable ^Q.

after
5.

and 7 (but not when

The

and the

suffixes,

This syllable

is

there

is

generally

found in poetry also

suffixes are added).

preposition If^ before most of the suffixes takes a special

form; in some cases,

a.

The

final

is

assimilated:

^t2J2

/<""

"H^DD; ^HQD

/<"

EI.EMENT6 OF

80
b.

The consonant

resented in y.

Note

2.

Many

of the suffix is assimilated

ijiSD (frcm

Note 1.The

HEBREW

backwards and rep-

!|nJSD; HIlSD

kirn) for

in IJiSp, etc.,

M nJDO-

from -^

deflected

is

53

( 29. 4).

variant forms, besides those given, are found,

especially in poetry.

The Demonstrative Pronoun

52.

nt <Aw

1.

(m.)

nt<T <Aw

nt

,1T

a)

<am

6n)

n^JSS

Dn

(f.)

nsn

or

<Ae6 (m. or

f.)

^e (m.)

I
i^!|n <Aat (m.)

2.

1.

a.
6.

l\

cf.

HT

It

<if-

ni^T

rounded from

jn

The

Hin

<*

(f-)

]],

i. e.,

in the

J^]

with feminine ending

Ht-

y^ occurs

n^jij has DS,ge-f6rte firmative;

and then always

or

Ji^).

=zt'B, for zk'd ( 30. 6),

the shorter forms

c.

2.

^^1,1 <Ao< (f.)

Pentateuch and with the

only eight times,

article.

personal pronouns of the third person are used as remote

demonstratives.

The forms riT/D

3.

fern.),

{masc),

^l^H

(/-).

and l^H ("Mwc. and

represent a stronger demonstrative, appearing only in

this,

the singular.

They

are not

commonly

used,

the

first

occurring

twice,' the second, once.^.the third seven times.'

The Relative

53.
1.

"^2^5^ who, which, that.

2.

,2f,

3.

^i
1.

sometimes

2'.

The more frequent

struct state

relative

It is indeclinable.

b.

It is really a

some kind

was

originally

a noun in the con-

meaning place:

a.

dicated

Particle

mere sign

of relation, indicating the presence of

of a subordinate clause, the precise nature of

by other words,

or

by the

which

is in-

general context.

Gten. 24 65: 87 19.

> Bzek. 36
35.
>Jlidg.6:aO; 18am.U:l; 17:26; 2Eg8.4:25; 23:17; Dan. 8 16; Zech.2:8.

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

54]

2.

.^', or .{J^ is in

pronoun.

It

is

no way connected with

81

"^tJ^^^,

but

a distinct

is

found:

a.

Exclusively in tlie Song of Songs, and frequently in Ecclesiastes.

6.

Occasionally in other books, as Judges, 2 Kings,

Chronicles,

Job, and the later Psalms.

a demonstrative

3. IT is in reality

relative
is

{cf. )])

(cf.

but

the similar usage of the English

that,

its chief

Greek

use

as a

is

It

6s, etc.).

indeclinable.

The Interrogative Pronoun

54.
1.

nD

wkof

"1J0

whatf

2.

a.

^^^>-r\r2

h.

^n^^Esn
T -

0.

(2

na

19);

(31 =36);

IDIS^-HD

13);

(Ex. 3

13).

j^in-nD';
^^\i-nD-*
_
_

J-

az^on^n
rh^'ni:^':
uvc^^^
hd*;
T
V
T
T J"
V j"

d.

n^mi? (3

TS'b)} nD(4:10);

1.

"JQ refers to persons;

2-

riD
T

hd

TlNDn-nD
HD*
T

(21:29).

(20:9);

Hn-HD-'

to things.

variously pointed, according to the character of the con-

is

sonant which follows:

a.

Before consonants which can be doubled,

h.

Before strong laryngeals (H and n)j

c.

Before weak laryngeals {^, U, and

d.

Before laryngeals with

Note

1.

Note

2.

"^) it is

^The Dages-forte following HD

^The forms HD

it is

-f-, it is

from the assimilation of

arising

HD
HD
HD
HD

it is

is

compensative (

15. 1),

which was a consonant.

^^^

HD

*re sometimes found before

other letters than laryngeals.

Note

3.

In the majority of cases nj3

lowing word by Makkef, and with

Note
tive

>

nf

4.

By means of ^^

Nmn.

16
:

S.

11.

Num.

Cf. lex.

13

connected with the

fol-

{where?) prefixed to the demonstra-

or ni^l> another interrogative

Fa. 39

is

often forms a single word, H'lD-

18.

is

formed.*

Zech. 1:9.

5:7; Ecdes. 11:6;

1 Kgs. 13

12.

Judg. 9

48.

The Verb

X.

Roots

55.
1-

Nn2

bn2D

(1:1);

]bn; ^nip^pn
(2:5)

2.

i<^3
T T
Ae

/rom

created;

(3:8) he walked;

opened.

niD
All

Dp;

^2^

(3:7)

/rom

(2:3) he
HDIS^
- T

(3:8) from

TDOH

(2:3);

npD-

np^
-T

rested;

(2:22)

tooX;.

Tj^n

3.

0:17) from

^DD: HJIIpSn
he

(1:1)

^3; "q^nnp

from

(1:6)

(3:4) to die,

npS

(3:17) he heard;

}}^p

...

HD ^ died;

D^K^

(2:8) to jm*,

QE'
y

(3:7) Ae

Ae put.

words are derived from so-called roots; concerning these

it

may

be noted:

While there are a very few roots of four

1.

roots consist of three or

The

2.

root

is

two

most Hebrew

letters,

letters, called radicals.

generally pronounced with the vowels of the third

person singular masculine of the Perfect tense ( 57,

being the simplest of

all

Bihteral roots of the middle-vowel classes are

3.

nounced with the vowel of the

Note
mind

The root

2.

Note

3.

J^ID

their triliteral

a.

n3E?

itself

is

a word;

it exists

(2:3);

p^T

pro-

a root, but the word

solely in the
is

J^'^^.
T
T

triliteral,

were

forms are a later development.

For many words there has as yet been found no

56.

1.

1), this

commoaly

^Many of the roots now appearing to be

biliterals;

N.

infinitive construct.

not in

is

of the philologist.

Note
once

1.

3.

verbal forms.

root.

Classes of Verbs
(2:24);

^^J2

(2:3).

82

(1:18);

^3

(1:4);

E^ID

BY AK INDUCTIVE METHOD

57]

J^n

:j]J; (2:24);

b.

83

Tp-^^ (1:2); ^1.1 (1=11):

(4:8);

H^I^

(3:22).

|nj
|~T

c.

(1:17);

230

2. a.

(2:11);

niD

b.

na^
-T

(3:4);

(2:7); i<-|2 (1:1);

TT

b'^H

p';

(Lam. 3:5).

(33:5); ij^^^^ (29:3).

jjn

(4:26);

nJ3
TT

fflp (13:17);

(30:42).

Qlfc;!

Verbal roots vary in inflection according to the number and nature

They

which they are composed.

of the consonants of

are therefore

classified as:
Triliteral,

1.

when composed

of three consonants.

These again

subdivide into three classes:

Strong verbs,

a.

in

any way
b.

i. e.,

affect the

those containing no consonant which wiU

vowels usually employed in a given

Laryngeal verbs,

i. e.,

those containing one or

more

inflection.

laryngeals,

which involve certain variations in vocalization from the so-called

strong verb.
c.

verbs,

may suffer

which
^

Weak

those containing one or more consonants

assimilation (2

or quiescence

),

i. e.,

({i^

),

contraction and elision

Such changes

).

in

the

C)

and

consonants, of

course, affect the vowels seriously.

2. Biliteral,

into

two
a.

when composed

The

two consonants.

These subdivide

so-called 'aym-doubled (y"y) verbs, in

sonantal element of the root

6.

of

classes:

The

is

emphasized in

which the con-

inflection.

middle-^owel verbs, in which the vowel-element

is

empha-

sized.

57.
a.

1.

^^^3
T T

(1:1)

2:3) from
h.

^Ip^X
(4:26)

Pror. 23

1.

from J^13;

Inflection

3^^
T

(18:33) from

2^; 30

(Deut.

30-

(2:3)

from ^"{p;

from "l^v

33lD

Hp.^
(2:13)

(3:23) from

from 30-

Hp^; lb]

ELEMENTS OF HEBHBW

84

(4:26) /rom

^^H;

vM

nSa^"' (2:2) he

2.

TpDH (2:5) /rom-iDD;

inpSJI (3:5)/rom HpD;

c.

(1 21)

("IDS^'IJ (Jer. 6:8)

3.

(4:8) he will
injJ^n"'
- 1j"

kill

The
1.

/ heard; y^TVi}

J-

X^^^
:

IT

Aa*^

(3:11)

IT

eatmf

iftow

<% were opened;

(3:7)

/rom 3^>.

'^^V'O'd (3:10)

rest;

ninpSm

bniH

T AT

swarmed;

i^e?^

58

^^J^l (17:12); J^^^ (4:3).

him; HJlbDi^ri
Tjr -:

(3: 17) thoushalt eatU.

a verb includes three things:

inflection of

The formation

of verb-stems, of

which there

are,

verb-stem, generally identical with the root.

a.

The simple

b.

Verb-stems formed by strengthening the simple root in vari-

ous ways, especially by doubling or repetition of one or more radicals.

c.

2.

Verb-stems formed by the use of

The

dication of tense or
3.

The

prefixes.

addition to the verb-stem of affixes and prefixes for the in-

mood, person, number, gender.

various changes of the verbal forms, which take place

pronominal

Note

attached as objects.

suffixes are

1.

when

^The Hebrew verb has for each stem

which indicates finished or completed action,

indicates unfinished action,

(2)

(1)

a Perfect tense,

an Imperfect, which

an Imperative (except

(3)

in Passive

stems), (4) two Infinitives, and (5) a Participle.

Note

2.

^The Perfect and Imperfect, which may be called

are inflected to distinguish number, person,

Note

3.

^The

Imperative

is

and

tenses,

gender.

used only in the second person,

masculine and feminine, singular and plural.

The Verb-Stems

58.
1.

nn-E'"
-T

2.

6tpj:53i;

(2:3);

^5V2
TT

napr;

Jer.

so

18.

np'b
/~T

jto^ (41=32);

(me's self; CD SIS' J

>

(1:1);

ff"

^o

^^2
T-T

:it2l^;

nor; n^ny;

(11:9).

"idi^j nfc*

law one with another.

'2 Sam. 6 20.

:

(3:22);

'

Num. 34

-.4.

<

Kgs. 6

7.

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

58]

3.

62Dp];

na^

"ID^

learn;

(12:4);

^'^^

"1)3^ teach;

6^p]; nj5S^ t<np';

4.

nb

^^r?':

85

7^2

(18:33);

(24:1);

t2^*}|2f uproot.

root;

Hp^^eWc; np^Ae^a*

T]-lblp';

taken.

Tpsn

5.

6^pj:)n];

6.

6Dpn]; npBH^

7.

6iDpnn];

(39:5);

nan'"; Tji'K^n-"

"q^Jpn";

^^nnn

D^pn^ npn-"

p-^mn':

naj;ni

(6:9);

(6:6);

^mp^-''

nnDpn-

/or

There are in common use seven verb-stems, each representing a

development of the primary meaning of the verb.

different aspect or
1.

The simple verb-stem

presents the verb in

its

is

called

Kal (7p),

i.

light,

e.,

since it

simplest form, not encumbered with the addi-

tions characteristic of the other stems.

2. a.

The Passive

Note.

In

of the

Kal stem

is

s^ems other than the

all

called Nif'al,
TfSl,

the stem

name

is

formed

from the paradigm-verb used by the Arabic and the Jewish grammarians,

with

viz.,

thus the

7^3;

6.

The formal

c.

The meaning
The

of this

characteristic of this
of the

stem

its original reflexive force,

3. a.

name

is

stem

stem

the prefixed J.

usually passive, but

and sometimes

intensive active stem

is

= 7^DJ.

is

it

occurs also

as reciprocal.

called Pi'el (triliteral) or

PdUl

(biliteral).
6.

The formal

characteristic of this

stem

is

the doubling or repe-

tition of the second radical of the root.

c.

The stem

is

used as an intensive of the

]^al,

and expresses

various shades of meaning such as (1) intensity, (2) repetition, (3)

'

Ex. 35

35.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

86

and

causation,

(4)

58

a privative idea, in the case of Pi'els from nominal

forms.

The

4. o.

intensive passive stem

Pual

called

is

(triliteral)

or

Pdlal (biliteral).

The formal

b.

tition of the

The

c.

regular usage of this stem

but sometimes
5.

it

as

is

repe-

first radical.

a passive of the

Pi'el;

serves as passive of the ^Sl.

a.

The

b.

The formal

active causative stem

called Hif'U.

is

stem

characteristic of this

which undergoes modification in

6.

doubUng or

characteristic of this root is the

second radical, with u or 6 under the

is

the prefix

pj,

inflection.

c.

This stem serves as a causative of the

a.

The

b.

The formal

passive causative stem

characteristic

^fal.

called Hofal.

is

^f which under-

the prefix

is

goes change in inflection.

7.

c.

The usage

a.

The

b.

The formal

of this

stem

is

as a passive of the Hif'il.

intensive reflexive stem

is

called HWpd'el.

characteristic of this

stem

is

the prefix

J^j^,

joined to the Pi'el stem.

This stem

c.

but

it

is

used primarily as a reflexive of the Pi'el stem;

occurs also with (1) a reciprocal, (2) a passive force, and (3)

the force of the indirect Greek middle.

Note.

The

stand before Q,

coming
-1,

J3,

c: or

n-

f^ of the prefix is

JJ^

when

or ^';

before

it is

Jf;

always transposed when

it

would

transposed and partly assimilated, be-

and

it is

completely assimilated before

XI.
A.
59.

The

Triliteral

Verb

THE STRONG VERB

General View of the

Triliteral

Verb-Stems

TABLE

1-

Original

Form appearing

Form.

in the Perfect.

b^p

TJamn
JMame.

Force.

Characteristics

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

88

60

NOTES'
Only 6 verbs out of about 1400 have

1.

r\b^. r\bn.

seven stems,

all

viz.

J?p2,

vt, ib\ ips-

379 verbs are found in ^al only; 40 in Nif'al only; 68 in

2.

6 in Hof'al only;

11 in Pii'al only; 58 in Hif'il only;

only;

Pi'el

19 in

HiOpa'el only.
3.

In

all,

1090 verbs have a Kal stem; 433, a Nifal stem; 405, a

Prelstem; 188, a Pu'al stem; 503, a

Hif'il

stem; 104, a Hof'al stem;

177, a BK^pa'el stem.

60.

The K&l Perfect

{Active)

TABULAR VIEW
1.

He

2.

She

7Dp

killed

t^^ simple verb-stem.

H^Dp =

killed

).T

with
bCDp
- )t

,"1 (originally fl-J.

t

the usual feminine sign.

H/DP

Thou (m.) Mlledst

3.

Thou

4.

7C0P

^^^^

/.

the

thou
r\V\^
T

(m.).

P\>

H^DP = ^DP with p[;

(f.) killedst

thou

5.

"Tl^Dp = bCDp

killed

the pronoun p\^

(^.

(f.).

with in,

the

person in

They

6.

l7pp = ^CDp

killed

with

pronoun

!),

all

affix

of

1st

Perfects.

the usual plural sign

with verbs.

Te

7.

(m.) killed

DH/CDp = /COp

with

QH;

DV\^
Ye

8.

(f.)

\ph^p = ^Dp

killed

with

We

U^^p = ^DP with

killed

Young's Introduction

to

Hebrew, pp. 16, 17.

the pronoim

ye (m.).

jH;

]m ye
9.

"/.

!|J;

"/

tte pronoun

(f.).

cf.

the

pronoun

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

61]

89

REMARKS
1.

The pronominal elements used

in the inflection of the Perfect

are always a/-fixed to the stem.

2.

The

inflection of the verb exhibits distinctions for

son and gender.

3d person
3.

sing.,

Special forms for the feminine occur in the

and in the 2d person

2d and

plur.

The

a.

number, per-

original vowels of the ^^al Perfect are a

(^CDp).

In the form 723p> the a under the tone remains unchanged, while
the a in the open syllable before the tone

vowel change takes place

In forms 2 and

b.

forms

in

6,

3, 4,

is

rounded to

5 and

The same

S..

9.

the vowel-terminations

{she) and

(=they) draw the preceding consonant away from the ultimate

!)

vowel

(a) of

the stem; the change of this vowel to wS. follows ( 36. 2)

and the a

of the preceding syl. being

tone-syl.

rounded to

is

The heavy

c.

terminations QJ^^ i=ye (m.)) and

carry the tone; the a in the final

syl. of

the stem

reduced to wa ( 36. 2. N.

is

The

61.
[For

before the

K(il

is

1^ i=ye

(f.))

retained unchanged

while the a of the open ante-

in the closed unaccented syllable;

penult

now immediately

k.

2).

Perfect (Stative)

tlie full inflection,

see

Paradigm

B.]

TABULAR VIEW
3 m.

sg.

f.

sg.

2 m.

c. pi.

1 c. pi.

pi.

Middle

^Dp

n^Dp^

)b^p^

^^i^p,

^^)^p

Middle

^c?p

n^Dp

i^ipp

Dn^ipp

iJ^pp

Middle

^Dp

nbipp

i^Dp

Dn^Dp

^ibbp

(2:24); )\i'^^ (1:21);

Qr\:}D^
-:-;

pyi
-

1.

2.

IpT

(18:12);

n"ID3';
Tl" T

IT

(42:22); ^r\:3D\i^ (3:10).

j

"injp] (18:13); "I^^ (12:10);

)^T';
T
I"

^im
~

(37:3),

but

(44:20).
>

Jndg. 20

34.

>

Joel 1

12.

3nt<
I" T

HIDS
(27:9);

(18:20);

l^HJ^
" I

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

90

^jl

3.

(32:26); ^^'y';

^phj^

l^bp

(30:8);

62

(32:11);

^F\bb^

(43:14).

Certain verbs expressive of physical or mental states of being are

They show some

called staiive verbs.

characteristic forms in inflec-

tion.

Stative verbs with -=- imder the second radical of the T^al stem

1.

are inflected in the

Verbs with

2.

not

differ

manner described
(lowered from

-r-

from those with -^

in the preceding section (60.)-

under the second

-r-)

do

radical,

in the inflection of the Perfect, except

that the -^ appears

a. in
b.

3.

the Perfect 3 masc. sing., and

when

restored in pause ( 38.

Verbs with

tain the 5

or before the tone.

1),

(lowered from -^) imder the second radical re-

^-

whenever the tone would

rest

upon

it,

and

in pause.

The Retnainine Perfects

62.
[For the

ftill

inflection, see

Paradigm

B.]

TABULAR VIEW OF IMPORTANT FORMS

3 m.

sg.

f.

sg.

3 m.

c. pi.

pi.

1 c. pi.

Hof&i

^Dpn

n^Dpn

i^Dpn

on^Dpn

ubppn

piei

biDp'

rh^yi

ibcjp

DPi^^p

iJ^^p

m^a-ei bcspnn n^Ejpnn i^cppnn

Hifii

1.

>

Dn^E)pnn li^tDpnn

^ippn nb^ppn h^^^n onbippn

a.

iptsry;

b.

n^l

nnnpy; inpDj

(4:26); H"!-?^ (24:15);

Ex. 8:14.
Deut. 2:4.

'OrS^i^.

Mai. 3

13.

Dnnpt^';^ ^yyf\y

(3:5);

H^^

^:h^[^n

(6:1);

2 Sam. 20

'

Jer 22

2fi.

Dm-5^'; ^m^""-*

10.

Num.

Jer.

5
20

IS.
14.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

63]

-ipDHM rrisn';

c.

-l^T

2. a.

VQh^n';

Dbi2^'n';

nn^l

(44:2);

n?1

(39:19);

91

^n-^22^n.'

(45:15);

Qni?"!-'

6-

-E^'^pnn^ ic'lpnn'; Dnts^^pnrr; ^nb^annv"

c.

n^ppn
T

J-

2.

Perfects, it will

Three follow entirely the

o.

The

Nff-al ('plDpi

h.

The

Pii'ai

e.

The

Hof'al

The

"'nps'in";

Pi'el

be noticed that

^al

inflection of the

Perfect, viz.,

from ^tpW)-

(bC)D).

Three present
a.

ijT'nvn'';

Of the remaining
1.

nnnDH";

(2:5);

(7C3pn>

^'s"

sometimes ^jppn)-

slight variations

ond

(bCSp

from the

^^H,

inflection of the ^fal, viz.,

from ^Cpp), in which

appears ia the ultima before terminations beginning with a consonant.

The Hi^a'el (^ISprin and ^ISppH).

h.

appears, but sometimes

The

c.

Hifil

in which, also, a

retained.

is

(^ppn,

anomalous for ^CppH, from

^PpH).

in which,
(1) before
i is

the vowel-terminations n~=~ *nd

\ the anomalous

retained and accented; while

(2) biefore

terminations beginning with a consonant,

^=-

every-

where appears.

The ^61 Imperfect

TABULAR VIEW

63.

1.

He

vM km

^bp^

for

2.

SkewiUm

bb^P\,

for

(Active)

(with

^iDpl

hppPi, H

;>).

the usual sign of the

feminine, here prefixed.

>

Lev. 5

Jer.

>

liBT. 11

Jer.

23.

21.
:

44.

13:11.

Joel 1:0.
Ex. 12 32.
" Kiek. 38 23.
lKgs. 3:7.
<

22 28.
30 29.
" Lev. 26 22.
Jer.

'

Isa.

<

Isa.

14

Num.

19.

11

" Daut. 25

18.

1.

ELEMENTS

S2

Thou (m.)

3.

ivilt

kiU

OJ'

HEBREW

^ppH.

btQDPi, for

being a pronom.

P\

root

TAoM

4.

'h^pPi,

(f.) tvilt kill

for

^pDH
'

shall

km

6.

They (m.) wUl

kill

^^P^'

^^

lbipp%

for

2d

of

pers.,

nn^5
T ~

<AoM (m.).

(with

cf.

above),

as

and
("/ i^^l ^)
used as a sign of fern.

'

cf.

5.

63

^^\^'

^I?!^' <A0M

^'*^ ^'

"''

(f.).

"'P^??

7 Dp'' (with Vee above), and

1,

the usual plur. end-

ing of verbs.

2"%

7.

mbbOPi,

vdll kill

(f.)

for

b^OPi

(with fl as above),

and nJ;

c/.

7^^r\

they (f.)/

Fe (m.)

8.

^ppfl.

will kill

7ppri

for

(with p)

and

1,

as above),

the usual plur.

ending of verbs.

Ye

9.

(f.)

will kin

T\f)^T>V\, for

b^pT\

(with

'and

J^

as

above),

qf-

n^PlK

nJ:

2/e(f.)/

We shall

10.

kill

7\2p^>

for

7ppJ>

with

J,

a pronominal

root;

cf.

IJriJ

'"fi-

REMARKS
1.

The pronominal elements employed

in the

inflection of the

Imperfect are not so clearly recognized as in the Perfect; they are

a.

all

Pre-fixes:

which

of

-=- is

p,

p\,

P\,

attenuated to

-r-,

ISt.

P,

Pi,

but under

J^

is

P>

2>

"

deflected to

-^(e).
6.

> ins}

fa

Af-Sxes:

1_,

fousd in K'fllv seven times for ^n Sum

tf.).

!|,

H^.

1.

H^f

BY AN INDCCTTVE METHOD

64]

2. a.

The stem

of the Imperfect

through the influence of the tone.

The

is

^bp

723p> whence comes

Cf. Arabic yaktvl.

form of the Impf stem was

original

93

kOful,

and the same stem

forms the basis of the Imperative and Infinitive Construct forms.

When

the preformative of the Impf. was added,

easily lost

business,

(cf.

pronounced Hz-ness).

tain forms of the Infinitive Construct

b.

as

it

naturally drew to

a secondary tone, and so the u of the following syllable was

itself

an

The 6

is

often written fully

error, since it is
c.

It reappears in cer-

and Imperative.
but this must be regarded

(^);

a tone-long vowel.

When ^Dp^ ^^d

similar forms are connected

by M&k^ef

with a following word, thus losing the tone, the original u

lowered to
3.

6,

but deflected to 6

The vowel-terminations

is

not

(').

(seldom p__) and

"i

(seldom

j1)

draw the preceding consonant away from the ultimate vowel, which
then necessarily passes into S'^4 ( 36.
4.

2. a).

The termination HJ (seldom p does not

The "^al Imperfect

64.

[For full inflection, see

receive the tone.

{Stative)

Paradigm

B.]

TABULAR VIEW OF IMPORTANT FORMS

3

m.

sg.

f.

3 m.

sg.

pi.

f.

pi.

Impf. with 6

^b|T

^^^pn

^^^\

^t?^^^

Impf. with a

bippi

""^JPfpn

=ibpj:p^

^t^^y!'^

Impf. withe

bcppi

^^jppn

ii>E3j:5''.

1.

(2:2);

ni3'>

n2;i:
2.

25E^1

(3:22);

|n^

(2:21);

^)i'y2J\

(1=20);

nSH^

(3:7);

(7:18).

(30:15) from

(7:18);

3.

^30^

nj^^pn

^3^^
l^^H

(1:17);

^^p;

(27:45);

^3;

r\2^'^_

^E)^ (2:8);

H^E/^.

H.J"! (21:8) frxm

nDlJl

(2:5);

(3:3).

|nn

(3:6); rj^T) (3:14);

{M4:16).

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

94

Stative verbs with middle A, with

1.

Imperfect the form

^bp^

some exceptions, have

(orig. ya^-tul),

the inflection

65

in the

of which

is

given in 63.

Verbs middle

2.

and verbs middle O, with some verbs middle

A, have in the Imperfect a stem with a instead of 6; this a

is

treated

like the 5.

Remark.

The

stem

Imperfect

instead

7^p,

used also in verbs, whether active or stative,

^bp.

of

is

which have a laryngeal

for the second or third radical.

Some verbs whose

3.

first

radical

is ),

and the verb )r\l

have for the Imperfect stem the form ^CDp)

a.

No

y^*^>

e instead of 6 or

strong verb has this stem.

Note

1.

There

were three Perfect stems,

/2?p' ^^^

7Dp>

so there are three Imperfect stems, !?bp'^. /ipp"'' ^^^

^bp;

S'lid

/bp^>

the a in each case being original, while the e and o have come

from

and Q

Note

2.

respectively.

It will be seen later that the stem-vowel of the

Im-

perative varies with that of the Imperfect.

65.

7%e Remaining Imperfects

Paradigm

[For full inflection, see

B.]

TABULAR VIEW OF IMPORTANT FORMS

3 m. sg.

f.

1 c. sg.

sg.

f.

pi.

Nifai

bb|T

^^bpn

^c?j?

n:^bj?n6b)

Pi-el

^tDj:?^

^^tppr)

b^pMi

n:^^pn6D)

Hi^paei bcspni

^^^pnn

h^pm

njbepnnc^b)

^^cppn

^pN

'i^'p^R^

""^^ppn

'p^bpNi

'"^^^Pp^

pii"ai

\)^p^

Hif-u

1.

b^bpicbop!)

-nSI
"t

(2:10);

B^^p^

(2:3);

2.

-^nD
"TV

^ST

(4:14);

(8:15);

HHtS^n
" T

nSlH

(6:11);

(31:24).

nDD""
:

IT

(8:2).

BT AN iMDUcrrvx method

65]

3.

nyyn^

(6:6) iE:j5i)ni';

4.

-iB^V;
"

m-j^nv
\

>.

ar'a): (3:21);

5.

(3:24);

1.

a.

The stem

Nif'al Perfect in
(1) the
(2)

niDsnc^n.'

"IBD"";
^D^E^n-'
-lEJpn';
- \
it
t
\
:

|!in"'n2^n';

r^bpri

96

bi^:

in^SE'n*;

two

pE':

(21:15).

from that ol the

of the Nif'Sl Imperfect differs

first

(i:4);

particulars:

radical has a vowel,

the original form of the Imperfect was yanak&pU. Emphasis

upon the preformative caused the

second

elision of the

a,

with the consequent assimilation of the n to the following

k and

its

representation

the preformative a to

by d^.

forte

the interchange of these vowels in the

b.

In the

-:r-,

is

sometimes

before

-;:-

be noted,

HJi
T

sometimes instead

the occurrence of

-=-;

and Hi^a'el.

Pi'51,

inflection of the Nif'&l Imperfect, there is to

(1) the use of either -^ or

(2)

of

i.

Note. ^The vowel of the ultima, generally

cf.

and attenuation

of -^r

under the

pref. J<."
2. a.

The stem

of the Pi'el Imperfect

is

identical with that of the

corresponding Perfect, except that the original penultimate -^

is

now

retained.
b.

In the
(1)

inflection of the

R'el Imperfect, there

is

to be noted,

the use of S*wa under the preformatives, just as also in

the Pii'Sl (compound S'w4 under the laryngeal

Ji^);

this

reduction of the preformative vowel in Pi'el and Pu'al

due to strong
(2)

stress

on the following

the use of either -^ or

is

syllable.

(prevailingly the former) before

3. o.

The afem

of the IfiOpa'el Imperfect

corresponding Perfect, except that

is

the same as that of the

does not appear in the pre-

formative syllable.
Jndg. 11:3.
Pi. 88 12.
Bz. 12:15.

* Almys

Lam. 4:1.

'Isa. 27:9.

Lev. 6

'

15.

Ezek. 16

5.

so In the punetoation system of the BabyiooiBn Jews.

'In. 27:
Deut. 4

12.
:

16.

ELEMENTS OP HEBREW

96
b.

In the

66

inflection of the Hi^pa'el Imperfect, there is likewise to

be noted the use of either

4.

The stem and

-it-

or

-^

(prevailingly the former) before

inflection of the Pu'al

and Hof "al

H J-

present no new

pecuharities.
5.

o.

The

stem of the Hif '11 Imperfect

corresponding Perfect, except that

original -=- is retained,

is

identical with that of the

under the preformatives the

(1)

and (2) the causative

is

eUded, as abo in

the Hof'al Imperfect.

6.

In the
(1)

be noted,

inflection of the Hif'il Imperfect, there is to

the form

Wiw

and with

7CDp'', used as a Jussive ( 69.),

Conversive (

70.),

the

which

-=- of

is

regularly

lowered from -^;

(2)

the retention and accentuation of the stem-vowel ^-^

before the vowel-additions ^-^,1;

(3)

Note

the occurrence of
1.

1.

Name

2.

Preformative with vowel,

rather than

3. First radical

2.

with vowel,

^The

will

:pi, Nif.,

of stem,

Note

^The following table

"i

">

before

HJ-

be found serviceable:
Pit.,
"i

Pu., Hif., Hof., Hi0pa.

^

''_

J^"*,

various elements used as preformatives and af-

formatives appear from the following table, the asterisks representing radicals:

3 m.

BY AN INDUCTIVE MUTHOS

66]

97

prsi

^isp^

^ipp

^^pp_

!)^2Dp

r\;b^p_

Hiffl

^^;pj:5>)

^[ppn

^^'ppn

^b^p^n

r\:b^j:)n

mepm

b^pn^,

b^pnn

^bippnn ibspnn nj^cspnn

1.

a.

6-

2.

"^sr

(8:1),

nbr; nnpi ^ Ins'; :i2p]

"Tj^E^'r,

'?]^i?12'"r,

c.

"laa^'n (24:6), npia'n^'';

li^^P

6-

"^^i^'fT,

1.

The

(1:22);

a.

with

(n)p23

"rjib^":'.

(1:28);

it will

The

?!al

The

Hif'il

be noted

is

U3p1

'^bpn'-,

(20:8).

]nnnn".

1S|^n."

D^^E'D (37:22),1pl^^Ifn";

stem of the Imperative

the Imperfect;

D^^^Pf,

ribpri';

(30:i5),n5i2;.^

DtS^'pH", Hi^C^jpn."

the same in every case as that of

that, like the Imperfect,

has two forms, one (active) with

6,

and one

(stative)

a.
6.

corresponds in form to the Jussive Imperfect in

e ( 69.), rather than to the usual Imperfect, which has

i.

Both forms

are naturally more quickly spoken than the Indicative.

c.

The

initial

which

is

always absent from a preformative in

the Impf ., appears in the Imperative of the Nif 'al, Hif "11, and EB^a'el.

Note.
2.

The pure passives

In the
a.

and Hof "al have no Imperative.

Pii'al

inflection of the Imperatives, it will

be seen that

Before vowel-additions, the vowel of the stem disappears

and the short

(except in the Hif'il);

Kal fem.

sg.,

eration being

Note.

and masc.
]k:it-lf,

pi.,

under the

first

radical of the

stands in a closed syllable, the translit-

kitld.

Occasional

forms

like

and
''D/D^j
IDC'D"
T
"IT

certain

forms with pronominal

1

Deut. 9

7.

suffixes ( 71. 3. 6)

show that the original Imv.

ELEUBNTS OF HEBREW

98

Hence the

stem was probably vocalized 7J3p.

masc.

The Hif "tl Imv. has

b.

fem.

but

pi.,

Note
and

perhaps thinned from

pi. is

its

1.

if

and

of fern. sg.

ii.

e as its stem-vowel in the masc.

in the fem. sg.

67

and masc.

and

sg.,

pi.

^The stem of the Imperative receives no preformatives,

afformatives are those of the Imperfect.

Note

2.

On the Imperative with H

T%c

67.

(cohortative) see 69.

Infinitives

TABULAR VIEW

bbp2

biw
bbp
1.

b^pn

b^p,

b^pnn

|h|n^ Pjbpj

(31:30);

(17:22);

\S;py;

b^^opn

-|2^'; DJIJ (40:15);

but

'ibK'* (3:24);

"^nDH

2Dp

(1:18);

(34:7);

DS^'H^

mSn';

naSHH-'

i"Q"ip;
nan"!^";
t;|t
t:t nn^^'D."
t:t

Each stem has two

but no example

The

upon

is

Infinitives,

found of a

called Absolute

and Construct;

Pii'al or Hof'al Infinitive Construct.

Infinitive Absolute has the

form of a noun, and

is

not based

either the Perfect or Imperfect stem.

a.

In

the penvlt,

form of the
Pi'el,

Dent. 6

56
Ex. 36
Isa.

Nif'al,

an

original

a becomes k in the ^al and in one

in the other Nif 'al,

and remains unchanged

in the

Hi^pa'el and Hif "11; while original u appears in the Pii'al and

deflected to

>

Hsr&i.

b^p.

bfi;D (1:18);

h.

'

Hirn.

bm bw bwnn bwn bwn

^31.

1.

meps-a.

PQ-ai.

bbpn

"llDE^';

2. a.

Pia.

Nirai.

B:ai.

12.

is

in the Hofal.

3.

2.

ID

32 4.
15 31.
Bz. 30 IS.
Jer.

Num.

> Er. 4
14.
'1 Sam. 10
" Ex. 29 29.

2.

1 Sam. 17 16.
Nah. 3 15.
:

BT AN

68]

6.

In

the

(1)

6 (=a) in the

W^p.^)

METHOD

99

uUima:

and sometimes

^^al, Nif'al, Pu'al,

the Hifil, Hofal, Hi0pa"el and usually in

(2) e in

Remark.

INDtJCrriVB

1.

The

Nif'al Infinitive Absolute has

in Pi'el.

Pi'el.

two forms, one

following the analogy of the Perfect; the other ihhprl),

following the analogy of the stem appearing in the Inf. Construct

and Imperative.

Remark

2.

seldom written

^The

6 in the

fully.

Old noun forms in Arabic

Inf. Abs., arising

always from
likewise

k, is

show long

vowels written defectively.

The

2. a.

Infinitive Constnict has, in

each case, the form of the

stem found in the Imperfect and Imperative.

Remark.

Stative

verbs,

which have a in the Imperfect and

Imperative, have, nevertheless, 6 in the Infinitive Construct.

an

cases of
6.

Infinitive Construct

with a are very few.

The ]^al Inf. Construct not infrequently takes a form with H

This form

is

Note

1.

struct

The

is

found especially with the preposition 7.

^The

ultimate vowel of the various Infinitives Con-

changeable, while that of the Infinitives Absolute

is

un-

changeable.

Note

2.

Only

to the Infinitives Construct

may

prepositiong

be prefixed, or suffixes added.

The

68.

Participles

TABULAR VIEW
%&\ Active.

l^a\ Stative.

!^al Passive.

Nif'&l.

b^p

b^p

h^^p

h^pi

Pi*5l.

Pii"al.

Hif'il.

Hofal.

Hiffpa"Sl.

impf.

^23p^

^E))T

^^p)T

b\Dp\

^cppn^

Part.

bcSpP

bE)j?D

^'ppP

!?Dp9

b^pTp

1.

a.

E^ph

(1:26);

(9:12).

Q^n

(41:1);

Tj^il (2:14);

12^

(4:2);

|nj


ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

100

b.

c.

^113

(18:11);

2.

nriDJ^
t:

3.

")21P

-IDS

t:-

E^'j^DD (37:16);

(27:6);

The !l^ stem has two

1.

(26:13).

"IDE^-'

"Tji'iinp (3:8);

t:^*"1pp';

TDDD

n^niS^'P (6:13);

(1:6);

69

n"iS2;
cdse^j-'
t;*
t:*

nai;:'^'';

^1"13P

Q^^ (33:18); ^3

(13:2);

3^3^ npr)J;

(9:26);

(7:4); 'Tj^E'D-'

the remaining stems, one

participles;

each:

The

a.

!?IaI

The

b.

!]^al stative

sg.,

7 top (=fe^tel);

1^1

active.

In the

c.

is

tl

2.

(sometimes

the 6 being obscured from an original

l^&til;

the

/CDp

active is

participle has the

k,

i.

form of the Perfect 3 masc.

5fal passive participle, viz.,

Nif'al Participle

/or

the e lowered from

4,

not so uniformly used, however, as

it is

unchangeable, but the

The

^!p1p)=t^tel

the

(=k,t<il /or l:at<il);

7lt3p

rounded from

is

a, is

changeable.

the same as the Nif "b1 Perfect, with the

is

vowel of the ultima rounded, since the Participle

is

a nominal form

( 36.).
3.

The remaining

form of
a.

stems which

This J2 has -r under

other stems
b.

Participles are

their respective

it

it

made by
is

in the Pi "el

takes the place of the initial

The ultimate

vowel,

and

Pii'al,

to that

while in the

of the stem.

not long in the stem,

if

prefixing

used in the Imperfect:

is

changed under

the tone, the participle being a nominal form.

Note

1.

Note

2.

is

^For

Special

69.

npnNi

1-

^The Q probably related to the pronouns ''Q and HD feminine forms of the participle, see 115.
(27:41) I

n"l3n5<"'

>

Deut. 23 61.
61:1.
2 Sam. 20 : 21.

i>Isa.
>

Forms

?(=

of the Imperfect

Ml; il'p'l^^

viill

must) speak;

laa.

62

12.

< Jndg. 4
11.
u 2 Sam. 14 IS.
:

and Imperative
wiU make

great;

(11:3) Let us

make

(12:2) /

HJ^^J

Lev. 22 22.
'Jer. 2:35.

Ps. 19 7.
aBzek. 48:11.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

69]

brick;

cut (a covenant);

b^^0;

6^p\

cf.

3.

niDV

Think;

nDlpJ

(31:44)

Ld

va

n*1^3U'*
T
;

2.

bum;

(11:3) Let us

nSlfc^J

101

n"13r; nnDH'; "ipD!

Oh

r\)ik>r\^
T

save;

Attend.
ni"'52'Dn
T
J-

Remark.-^^J-l"lSn
T
V T

(41:34).

WnD^Dt?

N^n^DE^';
^
T

(13:9);

IT

(19:20).

Some

special forms of the Imperfect

and Imperative deserve no-

tice:
1.

The

Gohortative Imperfect:

This

a.

is

by the ending

characterized

>

before which a

preceding vowel, unless unchangeable, becomes S'wa.

with few exceptions, only in the

Its special signification

6.

first

It is found,

person singular and plural.

that of desire, determination, and,

is

in the plural, exhortation.

2.

The

Jussive Imperfect:

This

a.

Imperfect.

is,

wherever possible, a shorter form than the regular

It is

found chiefly in the 2d and 3d persons; and in

strong verbs only in the Hif "il

but in

all

stems of verbs

stem

n"^

( 82.)

conversive form of the Imperfect

is

with

(viz.,

-=^

and V'^

The wSw-

( 86.).

also that of the Jussive

Its special signification is that of vyish,

b.

instead of "i_J

{cf.

70.).

command; with a

negative, dissuasion, prohibition.

3.

The

Cohortative Imperative;

fect, is characterized

than the ordinary form. The

Remarks.

Note

1.

and

by the

is

often

more emphatic

Imv. changes -^ to 1__ before

^The modal idea in each

tensified or enlivened

in connection

Hiff

the Cohortative Imper-

this, like

by the ending

particle 5<J,
T

of these three

which

is

forms

is in-

frequently found

with them.

^The

regular

may

Imperfect and Imperative forms

without change convey the ideas characteristic of the forms here

discussed.

Ct. 1
Ps. 6

4.

6.

'

Mai. 2 12.
Ps. 5:3.
:

>
'

Ps. 27 9.
Judg. 13 14.
:

Neh. 5

19.

ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW

102

Note

3.

the Jussive

a.

shorter form of the Imperative corresponding to

e. g.,

(3).

i<np "^p^b]

^'i?!

^^1 (^)

t^-in-

w^^n rpl?

W&w

Nn!l

bi:2^_-

"19^^!

^"?1

(4)

\-i^i

^"!^1

^n^l-

%ti

D'sn nipp^i

rihi^p

(i:i)

nj^n

^npii

(10)

[D^i'^^ nDJ^^U

y^o Q3 np^i it

^n\ bD^i D""inn

Conversive

n^c:^5<"i3
-t^na
":
TT

^Tl

i<"ij?

(2).

(5)

na>':i o)

..^T^

-JT

1p'l

^1?-^1

vn^^m

.^n^-I
T :iT

H 73-

for

^3

The Perfect and Imperfect with

.^r2^^)
V
J-

verbs,

H"?

confined to

is

70.
1.

The

70

(1:14)

n^K^i |s

(3=22)

\uhsvb
2. a.

(2:2);

HBE'll

ql,:?'!!

^^n^,! (1:4);

JT

(3:22);

(3:22);
^DJ<1
~t:

nnONI
t:it:

(24:14);

(14:15);

Tny^-^

(17:3);

Tbm

IT :

imniTI

3. a.

(2:3);

(1 = 22).

pyr\ (2:24); Hp'?!

/""
|-t:
(3:18).
n^DNI
-

h.

E^lp^l

"I'llD^l (2:21);

(15:10);

(1=7);

DD^TI

(15:6).

HnEfn!!!

(1:22);

^inill

^13^1

(4:8);

(18:16);

1DpK^''!l

-13T1

(2:2).

Remark.Ef2^1, 6< DE'"?^"!

6.>

iniONI
J"

IT

(3:21);

^n^KJI
< ~
:

The use
Conversive*

hSDXI
-

(3:13);

IT

IT

(3:16);

'nn^K^l
- it
<
;

(3:20);

inHJI
^ IT

(6:6).

of the Perfect
is

(3:21).

and Imperfect with the

so-called

Wlw

one of the most marked peculiarities of the language.

These cases are cited from Exodus.

Tbe form is usually called W&w Consecutive; but this name daims too much
the form; the older term Conversive, wliile not ideal, is less objectioiiaUe.
1

'

for

BY AN INDUCTIVB METHOD

70]

Only what

relates to the

forms of the conjunction, and to the verbal

forms to which the conjunction

The

1.

a.

103

joined, will here be noticed.

is

facts in the case, briefly stated, are as follows:

In continued narrations of the past, the

first

verb

in the

is

Perfect, while those that follow, unless they are separated from the con-

junction by intervening words, are in the Imperfect and connected with

the preceding Perfect by means of

b.

Wiw

Conversive.

In the narration of actions which are to occur in the future,

or which can only be conditionally realized, or which are indefinite

so far as their character or occurrence

is

concerned, the

first

verb

is

in the Imperfect (or Participle, or Imperative), while those that follow, unless they are separated from the conjunction by intervening words,

are in the Perfect

of

W^w

and connected with the preceding verb by means

Conversive.

Note.

^This

more common usage

is

very often modified in vari-

ous ways; but a consideration of these questions belongs to Syntax,

and cannot be taken up

The form

2.

here.

of the conjunction, however, is not the

same

in

both

cases:
a.

With the

Imperfect, the conjunction

the D&geS-forte

may

be omitted from a consonant which

it

( 14. 2),

With the

o.

-?-.

Perfect, the conjunction is the

Conjunctive, with

With

and

the first person, the D&geS-forte being omitted,

the preceding -^ becomes

3.

but

(1)

(3) before J<, in

b.

"|,

(2)

has only ^"wi under

Wlw

is

the following consonant regularly has DS,geS-f6rte;

its

same as the ordinary

various pointings ( 49.).

reference to the verbal form employed,

In the case of the Imperfect, there

(1) in

the

first

is

used,

person, a lengthened form exactly similar to

a usage which

that of the Cohortative ( 69.)'

and
>

Cf. nnSw!*! (32

Ez. 7

27-9

6,

is

rare

late;

6) ;

npSmi (41:11); nnnon

(*3

in which there are seventeen casea.

21)

njnKj (Num. 8

10) ; alio

ELEMENTS OP HEBREW

104

the second and third persons, a short form Uke that of

(2) in

many weak and

the Jussive ( 69.) and found in

verbs and

literal

(3)

71

bi-

in the Hif'il of strong verbs.

a form with accent on the penult, and the consequent

vowel changes; but the penult cannot carry the accent

unless

an open

it is

changeable vowel.

and the

syllable,

has a

final syllable

This form cannot occur in the strong

verb.
(4) the ordinary verbal form unchanged.

With Wlw Conversive the

Remark.
stead of

but

i;

this

usually restored, though written defectively,

is

has e in-

Hif'il, therefore,

before sufSxes.

In the case of the

b.

form

Perfect, the usual verbal

but, whenever possible, this

form

is

marked by a change

employed;

is

of accent, the

tone passing from the penult to the ultima.

Note.

As a matter of

fact,

the cases in which there

numerous as those

of tone are as

in

These cases are grouped by Driver' as follows:

Perfect (3

sg.,

ready MUra';

fern, sg.,

(2)

when

syllable, or dissyllable

in pause;

is

pi.

3 com. pL, 2 masc.

the Perfect

in 1

and

rn^Dp

for

r^n^Dp

-r

]:

Judg. 11

,"1"^;

and 3

(6) frequently

35.

'

Ezek. 16

19.

(37:20);

^jnDDD
:

Use of the Tenses in Hebrew,' % 110.

Ps. 69
63 5.
3.

the Perfect

The Verb with Suffixes

ijnsDc:^'; i:n>?aD^

Isa.

when

in 3 fem. sg.

and Nif 'als which end

iJKIals

^inn^D^^
at t -;

al-

Paradigm C at end of book.]

(31=28);
ijn"'b;;n;
"'jn^i^DJ
j\
^: IV
J

(3)

and

?al of verbs ^'\> and

r\h\Dp\;
T
/it

which are

immediately followed by a mono-

y"^ and Middle-Vowel

[See

a.

pi.)

"^

71.

1.

no change

those forms of the

2 fem.

(4) in the 1 pi. of all conjugations,

forms of

(1) in

pi.,

accented on the penult;

of the Hif'il; (5) in the

in those

is

is

which there does occur change.

for

<

Num. 20

Zech, 7:5.

14.

vh^p]-, ^^rrh^

^:nnDi
j:

it

(40:i4).

Jer. 15

Num.

10.

20

5.

BT AN INBUCTTVE METHOD

71]

[ibipj? for

6-

(33:13) for

DIpDl.

Remark8.HDnt<
T]";35^^';
c.

T^^m, DIpD")

(50:17) for

?|lbDJ

^^EDp];

105

(44:20);

^^"'St?^'"' (50:6).

[^n^Dp]; Dni3D!''; IH-JJ^n^^ Tjlbaa

unj

Rn-bDp];
T T

|:

Tjn^:;';

wnbcDp,

(30:13);

^jntS^K

IJ^nStS^';

(31:7) /or

tidhj^^
in-jnj;
D-jnj=;
i" ~:
T T
t t

"?|n,>'E';

TJonT;

"nnbcDp];

Rnark.H:inn

(50:17).

(32:18).

^^}^

see above,

(4:25) for

Qmn^?^"; DnbD^"

i. a,-

m^^^

^r\T\r\;

(18 19)
=

/<"

^.TnvT;
j*:~: imb^'^/oMnmb'';
j-t:
:j~t: ni?T
tt: (24:i6)/orrm^;
tvtt:

When

the object of a verb

is

a pronoun,

union of f^J^ ^.nd the pronominal

pronominal

it is

often expressed

More

suffix.

This occa-

suffix is joined directly to the verbal form.

sions pertain changes of termination

and

by the

often, however, the

of stem.

When

suffix is

added to a verbal form, the form becomes subject, so far as the influence of the tone

is

concerned, to the laws controlling the vocaliza-

tion of nouns.
1.

In the case of the Perfect with

are in

many
(1)

the older H^-^ for the later

Jer.

(3 sg.

fem.)

(2)

the older ^J^, for the later J^ (2 sg. fem.);

(3)

the older 1J^, for the later QJ^ (2

Remark.
1

to be noted,

cases retained, as

after the analogy of

32.

Josh. 10 19.
Deut. 13
18.
" Jer. 49 : 24.

suffixes, it is

In reference to termination-chariges, that the older endings

a.

!|

p[ occurs for p{ (2

Num.

22 17.
Deut. 15 16.
" iPs. 48 7.

in the

m.

3d

sg.),

pi.

masc), perhaps

plural.

often before 1J.

Deut. 25 1.
Deut. 15 12.
" Hos. 2 14.
>

'

Chron. 13 3.
Sam. 20 : 22.
" Buth 4 15.

BLXUXNTS or HXBKBW

106

b.

In reference to ttem^hanges, that, in the

(1)

the

"^31,

being no longer pretonic

first syllable,

appended, reduces

is

71

when a

suffix

a in the open syllable

its original

to S*wt; while
(2)

the a of the second syllable, which has been reduced before personal terminations beginning with a vowel,

rounded to

Remark

1.

^The

Remark 2.The
before

e.

Q3,

?J,

ultimate

&.

-::-

Pi'Sl

Middle

of verbs

appears before

and Hi^a'el take

Y2, but elsewhere the vowel

of the Hlf'fl suffers

suffixes.

in the last syllable

rejected; while the

is

no change.

In reference to the union of termination and

(1) to

is

and, in the open syllable before the tone,

retained,

a verbal form ending in a vowel, the

suffix,

that

suffix is

attached

directly;
(2) to a verbal form ending, in ordinary usage, with a con-

attached by means of a so-called

sonant, the suffix

is

connecting-vowel

which

Q3, and
(3) to the

|3,

is S'wfi,

sg. fern,

is

generally

and before

termination

S.,

but before

?j,

Tl is e.

suffixes

forming a

syllable are attached without a connecting-vowel; other

have a connecting-vowel,

suffixes

viz.,

e before ^, but a

before Q; the accent, peculiarly, in every case stays on

the feminine ending f^

Note.

Certain

changes

!inv
IV; (3)
nO-^ to nn.^- ^^ tbe
to

(2)

are

m^

frequent:

quite

in_;

to

tMrd and

(4)

(1)

ri_

!|n

to

nl.;

^^ tbe

ent form

In the fourth case, the

merely a vowel-letter.

vowel was dropped, and the Mappik in

fifth,

shows

the

it

a.

'

[ibcDj:3n for

Job. 19

16.

nibbj^r)]; ^^^pnr\': '^n''?lrv'

'

Jor. 2

19.

is,

of the presfinal

to be a genuine

consonant, rather than a vowel-letter.

2.

);

(s)

these cases, the dig.

fifth of

perhaps, in compensation for the His

to

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

71]

b-

107

^JCSDC'^; ^?n31N'; ?)2faD^ (32:18); Tp^]^";

[^Jbipp"'];

[jbDlT]; ^J?^2^^^ innSI^^ (40:23); ^JHSE^n-*

["jbEip"!; '?|'?E)p^]; inn>'!'> (3:23);

['';i)^pj:3'!];

c.

^rn^5D1"';
under

!)np^E^j (37:20); dtpe^jji.'

rna^^DH";

[T)b(pp];

1J1K^"1"I (9:5);

Tj^D^

?|n"]D3

[n^Qp];
t:|t

6.

(3:2i);

(2:17);

l^nSTn-"

DD^SN

(2=15);
mnv
t:t

nnots^
t;t

!|,

^:VDE^

(23:11);

(2:15);

Dnoi<";
ijnav-"
t:t
d"
r
x

imav-"

^i)^D^

In the case of the Imperfect with

a.

in

btU

DpIP^it";

[^J^Dp]; 'J^DT"; "'inDE^''; D'lDtS^""; U*1TV-"

[''j'PCDp];

fern.)

(3:5);

(35:1).

[ni^Dp]; ^ani;?"; die^dh";

2.

examples

see

inp^b?^n";

6.

MbDpl];
3. a.

Diz'abi

Q-isbn^; Tprpv^-'

(23:8);

be noted,

suffixes, it ia to

In reference to termination-changes, that

always yields to \

">:i;"'DBfn";

HJT

Note the analogy to the

(2

and 3

as also appears in the 2d. pers. plnr. masc. (see above).

Sam. 24

16.

pi.

3d. pers. plur.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

108

b.

In reference to stem-changes, that before

the

(1)

ii

71

suffixes,

(lowered to o) of l^al forms ending in a consonant

usually becomes -r, but 6 before

T],

D3,

?5'

S*wS,

preceding the suffix being vocal;

the a of ^al forms ending in a consonant

(2)

rounded to

,;

the final vowel of Pi'el forms ending in a consonant

(3)

ordinarily reduced to -r, but

while the

Q3, J3;
c.

retained and

is

is

deflected to e before

Tl,

of Hif'Il forms remains.

In reference to the union of termination and

forms ending in a vowel the

(1) to verbal

is

that

suffix,

suffix is

attached

directly; while

forms ending in a consonant, the

(2) to verbal

suffix is at-

tached by means of a connecting-vowel, which

ally e,

but -r before

before

H;

Q^,

71,

^^^

\'2'>

^,

is

gener-

sometimes

k,

pausal and emphatic forms, suffixes are often attached

(3) in

to a verbal form ending in an, which under the tone be-

comes

Note
and

1.

en, of

^This

which the J

called Nttn Epenthetic or Demonstrative,

Aramaic.

suffixes in old

Note

2.

^In

It

3.

is

is

found also before

probably an old form of the verb.

(3

m.

sg.)

and Hj)

(3

in compensation for the

f.

sg.),

the

from

ijp

respectively.

In the caae of
o.

is

the endings ^^

D^ge-f6rte in ^ perhaps

and

generally assimilated.

is

ordinarily treated as a union^yllable

syllable,

The
(1)

Infs.

and Imvs. with

suffixes, it is

to be noted that,

i^al Infinitive (construct) takes

before

(2) before

TJ,

QD,

|5, generally, the form

other suffixes the form

p^p,

the

7C3p

6, in

(o);

both

but

cases,

standing in a closed syllable.

(3) as

connecting-vowels, those used in the inflection of nouns.

^The
Infinitive takes
before
The Infinitive may take either the

Remark

1.

Remark

2.

or the nominal suffix

Pi'el

-~-

Tl,

DD'

15"

verbal suffix,

"'J,

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

72]

b.

The

TfS\

Imperative,

109

taking the connecting-vowel of the

Impf.,
(1) in

the 2 masc.

sg.,

follows the analogy of the Infinitive;

(2) in the 2 masc. pi., suffers

(3) in

the 2 fern,

pi.,

no change;

has the form

vJDD

instead of

n3?DD

just as in the corresponding form of the Tnq)erf. with

suffixes.

Remark

1.

^The Imperative in a retains and rounds the

a,

as

does the Imperfect.

Remark 2.In
of

the

Hif'fl,

the form

TppH

is

used instead

^DpnNote.

The

Participles, before suffixes,

undergo the same vowel

changes as regular nouns of the same formation, and

may

the nominal or the verbal suffixes.

72.

Mood or
Tense.

General View of the Strong Verb

take either

no

ELEMENTS OF HEBRCW

73

however,

is

REMARKS
1.

The

5fal is the simple

2.

The

Nif'al has in every

verb-stem (

form the

58.).

letter J; this letter,

assimUated and represented by DSge-f6rte in the Imperfect, Imperative,

3.

The

and

Infinitives ( 58.).

Pi'Sl

has everywhere

(exc^t in the Perfect), and

aecmd
4.

(1)

(2)

the vowel -^ mider the

5.

6.

The Hl^a'Sl

the same as the Pi'el (except in the Perfect)

is

The
and

Pii'Sl

has everywhere

The Hlf 'tl has

The

fomuOUe

(1)

7).

the vowel ^r under the

4).

in all forms (except the Perfect) the vowel -=-

Hof'al has in

all

5).

forms the vowel 6 (or

ii)

imder the pre-

( 58. 6).

(2:24);

1.

31^

2.

wpr\

3.

)ir^^ (3:8);

(1:2);

B.

THE LARYNGEAL VERB

73.

Classes of Laryngeal Verbs

"^Bn

^^n

(3:24); ^5^^;

mv^';

cnE^'';

fh^

ni22^

(3:22);

Remark.-'n-l3lT
}

lAT

Laryngeal Verb

laryngeal radicals.

(1:28);

SI-

is

(18:11);

laj^

(20:18).

b\^^'; ^nij.'

my
A

first radi-

a D8,ge-f6rte characteristic in the second radical ( 58.

(2)

under the preformaHve ( 58.

7.

radical

radical ( 58.).

with the syllable ^r\ prefixed ( 58.

cal,

first

a D&ges-forte characteristic in the

^p^

(7:11);

nHB

(42:27);

nJDD")n';
Tia^lp-'
Tl"
T
.J J-| :

rf-

one the root of which contains one or more

They

fall

into three classes, viz.

1.

Pe eg) Laryngeal,

2.

'Ayin ('y) Laryngeal, of which the second radical

of

which the

first

radical

is

a laryngeal (
is

74.).

a laryngeal

( 75.).

11(6.94:7.
1 Sun. as 31.
Ila. 46
18.
:

>Jar.

Pi.

39:S.
28 7.
:

'Num. 11:3.
'

Isa.

65

9.

tjiidg. 5:25.

Is*.

28

3.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

74]

3.

L&med

which the third radical

('7) Laryngeal, of

( 76.).

Remark.

^Verbs with

"^

111

as

first

is

or second radical

a laryngeal

show some

of the characteristics of laryngeal verbs, especially in the refusal of

to take DigSS-forte.

Note.

^The terms Pe Laryngeal,

etc.,

the radicals in the old paradigm-verb,

designated

are based

7^B,

by Q, the second by ^, and the

74.

the

third

upon the order of

first

radical being

by 7.

Verbs 'Q Laryngeal

[For full inflection, see Paradigm

D|

TABULAR VIEW
IQl&I

in

Perf.

with 5

Impf

^lTrith&
in Impf.

Nir&i.

Hirn.

HBfai.

ELEMENTS OP HEBREW

112
3. a.

(2:4);

T\\m,

(2:5);

13^^

bb

n^W

(1:26);

binn';

(2:18);

"^jBriJ'; "liin^';

<l?^n!

imn.T

d.

PHD^Jl'. ^t n"|Pl?n)'; P]b^.

radical

The laryngeal refuses

is

preceding -^ becomes

are also

(2:9);

(i5:6).

(29:22) 6m<

^'2^ny

lDDi^\

hence the DlgeS-forte, rep-

to be doubled;

and

Infs., is rejected,

before it the a-class vowels;

In the ?al Impf. with

5,

and

hence

in the J^al Impf. of verbs that

( 82.), the original a of the preformative

H"/

and the

(even before H)-

-:r-

The laryngeal prefers

a.

"ISm

a laryngeal, exhibit the following pecu-

resenting J, in the Nif'al Impf., Imv.,

2.

(1:22);

1-3)

liarities ( 42.
1.

^Di^b

nD^?;! (37:28);

(4:8); ?)nDj;;. (27:29);

first

(3:17);

[^CD^;."!];

c.

Verbs, whose

m^^)^^

^'A^ce

"IDX

74

Tp^}

(47:24);

HTO

h-

(2:17);

?|^DJ<|

1:-in (4:25); r\^)J (6:14);

[|

is

retained;

while
6.

In the l^al Impf. with -^, in the Nif'al Perf. and Part., and in

the Hif'll Perf., the original preformative vowel

is

deflected to

e,

for

the sake of euphony.

A few cases occur of forms ^CSV^ or ^\Q^^.

In n^H
reguH""!! ^^ preformative vowel

Remark

1.

Remark

2.

like

^.nd

larly attenuated to

Remark 3.

In

the Hif. Pf. 3d sg. masc. and fern, and 3d

the e of the preformative

which a

in

deflection
3.

a.

>

due to the influence of the other

its

When

the

first

radical

21 : 16.
Bz. 7:17.

to

forms

simple S'wS; hence

is initial

and, according to the inflec-

would have a simple S"w&,

or, particularly in the case of

Knm.

six

account.

The laryngeal prefers compound

tion of the strong verb,

-=r,

is

pi.,

the stem-vowel and the preformative vowel undergoes

is

on

is

as in the strong verb.

>Buthl:18.
'Fs. 31:9.

it

takes instead

J^, -~r-

"Ex. 7:15.
'Num. 3:6.

Lev. 8:7.
Bs. 4:29.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

75]

b.

When

the

first

radical

medial,

is

it

may

the inflection of the strong verb, have under

order to facilitate the pronunciation,

113

it

may

it

either, according to

a silent S'w^

or, in

compound

receive a

S'wt as a helping-vowel, which always corresponds to the preceding

vowel; thus, ^r
c.

When,

-=-, i?r

t-, -rr -v- (6).

in inflection, a

before a simple S'wS,, as

when

compound S'wa

way

the

d.

gives

The combination

in inflection, the tone

Note. ^The

S'wSk

{-^r),

when

to

--r -ir

and

its

made

oi

to a word,

corresponding short vowel.

H^H

^^^

^r- -^,

when,

distance.

DTJ

have a

silent S'wS.

compound

vowelless; but a

and without a fuU vowel.

75.
[For

would come to stand

very frequently becomes

when medial and

initial

S'wS,

vowel-additions are

removed to a greater

is

according to b (above),

compound

Verbs '^ Laryngeal

full inflection, see

Faxadigm S)

TABULAR VIEW
?ai.

Nif&i.

prei(i).

Pii'ai(i).

h^p

pra

(2).

Pii'ai(2).

Hieprei.

^np ^np

h\^^T\n

hn^\

^^pni

perf.

^5^p b^j^:

^p

impf.

^^5pibi<j?i

hs^\ b)kp\

imv.

^5stp

b^iipn^Np

^np

inf.abs.

bli^py^pj b^p^

^np

Inf. const,

b^^p

Wpn bxp

bnp

^^pnn

Part. act.

S^p

^HpD

b^pHD

^^^^

Part. pass. ^!)i^P^i^pJ

hnp;^

'^^pon

^PlpD

^JjipD

T]"]yUl:22); j:^W(3:24); n2^'lM4:14); ';]12(28:6);

>

Deut. 1:5.

Lam. 2:7.

Mai. 1:7.
Niim. 16 30.
:

'

Ex. 16

28.

'2 Sam. 7

29.

Ps. 109

10.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

114

ns>nno

b.

'nDm

(1:2);

(6=7);

nnsn'; nnj^2V;
(45:13); inp^ (18:6).

mntS^";

c.

bxa'"; ^i<a"; ^Kf.";

i:yD";

ipyy";

nnE^n

onnnp

")j;y';

^^5"'; ^E^";

IDHJ";

i.

loms- yriT;

nn?'" (6:");

^Jip^;?*;

-Ipy;

-in2i'; ^J<^n';

2. a.

75

[f

im

^Dt^E^";

(6:ii);

(34:19);

""JnCS";

-):j;3^*;

inp^.

(18:6).
3-

^J1DV3'; lS"l33";

also t^^e

ef-

Verbs, whose second radical

is

words cited under

2. 6.

a laryngeal, exhibit the following

peculiarities ( 42. 1-3):

1.

The laryngeal refuses

preceding vowel

and

changed

(a to &,

to e,

and

u to

Note

1.

Lowering of

which retain the

in verbs

Note

2.

In

3.

5),

is

(prevailingly),

retained short, the

1. 6).

to 6 in the Pfi'al takes place frequently

ii

or a of the Pi'el.

a few verbs, especially those with ^, the vowel

changed in some parts of the

Note

of "^ (always), the

viz.,

(almost always), the preceding vowel

doubling being implied ( 42.

is

(generally),

In the case of the stronger laryngeals,

6.

is

doubled; but

to be

While in the case of

o.

The vowel

inflection,

which

is

but in other parts retained.

strengthened on account of the

rejection of D8.geS-f6rte is unchangeable.

2.

The laryngeal prefers

a.

In the occurrence of

and Imv., rather than

Pi'el Perf., rather

Isa.

the a,-class vowels;

40

1.

Deut. 32:21.
Ex. 3
3.
" Ex. 12 21.
" Nah. 3 14.
Ruth 4:4.

J^ial

Impf.

e.

Prov. 30 12.
1 Kgs. 14 10.
:

Buth 4:6.

" Gen. 45

the laryngeal, in the

even in Active verbs; and sometimes in the

5,

than

a, after

this is seen

Isa.

47

n Lev. 25

17.

2.

30.

Gen. 35
2.
'Gen. 13:11.
" Deut. 4 32.
Isa. 40 1.
" Jer. 48 19.
" Ex. 15 15.
:

<

Deut. 13

6.

Buth4:4.
>>

Mai. 3

19.

Jer. 22 20.
" Josh. 15 18.
:

BY AN IMDCCnVS lOlTHOD

76]

b.

fern. sg.
c.

In the occurrence of

and masc.
In the

plur.

a, before

But

it is

115

the laryngeal, in the HI^l Imv.

to be noted that

J^al Inf. const., the usual

5 remains; and likewise the

ultimate e in the Nif'al and Pi'el Imperfects.

Note.

As a matter

erf

fact, the laryngeal exerts less influence

on a following than on a preceding vowel.

3.

The laryngeal

-pre^eri

compound

the almost universal occurrMioe of

U) sinvple

=r

S*w&;

stead of -r.

76.

this is seen in

undCT the second radical

Verbs '7 Laryngeal

[For full inflection, see Paradigm F]

TABtTLAR VIEW

in-

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

116

TIP

0.

n^PV^

(1:11);

^^^^^'

n-i^';

d.

fifth

lines

6.]

T\^i^";

nnp^";

njnpsn(3:7);

2.

;?oiS''";

and

[See also the cases cited above, in fourth

under

nns';

^^^^''

^-'^V'

n'h^y; mzb'; nbtb'-.

ribe'*;

76

nn^Dn-"

nnDs:;""; v\^2t;r\";

^nn^

^n:;Dt:' (3:10);

(4=9);

nnpb(3:i9).

TjnbE;""; ^n)^''''; ^n)l2'3"; "?|n)?^"J (26:29).

Verbs whose third radical

a laryngeal exhibit, according to

is

42.

1-3, the following peculiarities:

1.

The laryngeal prefers the a-class vowels; this

a.

seen

is

In the occurrence of a before the laryngeal, in the l^al Impf.

and Imv. (where a was a collateral form), rather than

6,

even in Active

verbs.
6.

In the retention of the original stem-vowel a ( 59.) in

forms where in the strong verb

it

becomes

all

except Infs. abs., and

e,

Participles.
c.

In the insertion of a Pa^ah-furtive ( 42.

when

laryngeal

the latter

2. d)

under a

preceded by a heterogeneous vowel,

is

(1)

by a naturally long vowel,

(2)

by a vowel

final

viz.

or % or

!|,

essential to the form, as 5 in the J^al Inf.

construct; or

by the tone-long

(3)

e,

in the Infs. abs.

which

and

is

retained in pause and also

Parts.,

because they are really

nominal forms.
d.

In the insertion of a helping-vowel,

viz.,

PaSalj, under the

laryngeal, in the 2 fern. sg. of the various Perfects.

2.

ence

The laryngeal prefers compound

is

simple wa; but this prefer-

to

indicated only before pronominal suflSxes;

Ps. 97

'

Esth. 3

Sam.

11.

13.

13.

u Ezek. 22 12;
Ezefc. 27 33.
:

Deut. 15

18.

Num.

19

Isa.

cf.

15.

45 1.
> Job 28
10.
1 Kgs. 14 3.
Bzet. 16 4.

Deut. IS

'

Ps. 106

8.

5.

" Ex. 5:2.

Isa. 17 10;
Jer. 28 15.
:

the simple *w&

Num.

22 37.
Deut. 21 4.
Kgs. 2 15.

cf. Jer.

13

"1
:

25.

Sam. 21

3.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

77]

117

being retained under the third radical wherever in ordinary inflec-

would have

tion the strong verb

Note

1.

^The

2.

^The

nCDD^

is

following the analogy

than that of the Imperfect (

of the Perfect stem, rather

Note

it.

Nif'al Inf. abs.

and

Pi'el Inf. abs.

67.).

same

Inf. const, are the

{cf.

the '^ laryngeal verb), except that the former, being treated as a

noun, changes

Note

3.

its

a through

^Verbs

verbs with the vowel-letter

2.

1D^^
-T

:3^^

(1:3);

(24:5);

3t:r> (4:16), /or

3.

(2:8);

b^^
-T

HD^^
T T

-T

witli

Mappit) as

their third

be distinguished from

carefully to

( 82.).*

^DJ

(2:16);

Weak Verbs
2/:: (33:7);

(4:6);

IHX
-T

n3J

^n^?
"T

(27:9);

(2:8);

^"2^ (8:14); l^l

-T
"T

(32:12).

(25:26);

nD
TT

(40:1).

^m.

"lif''

--r

4.

20^12:13); YjT.(9:24);

5.

npt:'
|tT

(2:6);

(* >

Classes of

77.
(1:17);

and takes PaOah-furtive.

-r;-

THE WEAK VERB

C.

|nj

to

and are

radical are '7 laryngeal,

1.

with

nJ3
TT

p:"! (21:7);

HDJ
TT

(11:5);

^^^^,

(33:19);

(4:18).

jD"! (13:10).

(35:7);
,1^3
TT

Hfc'i?
t'^T

(1:11).

N13(l:l); J^np(l:5); ^5iD(2:20); J^^D

TT
"T
TT
tJt

6.

J^DD
" T

(1:28); ^^^^(4:7);

TT

(34:5).

Those verbs the roots

nants are called

Weak

of

which contain one or more weak conso-

Verbs.

The consonants

in question are

as either easily contract, or quiesce, or suifer elision.

1.

Weak Verbs are recognized:

Pe Nun (|"S), m which the first

2.

Pe

The

such

following

classes of

'Alef (J<"D), in

forms quiescent ( 79.).

3.

Pe W,w

(V'D), in

which the

is
|

( 78.).

first radical is

There are

which the

radical

six

first

^, and

is

in

some

such verbs.
radical

is )

and

is

sometimes

contracted and sometimes elided ( 80.).

'

The foUowing Is a list of

delay; nil shine;

Jer.

18

4.

nnn be

these verbs

astonished.

pia a

6e high ;

aD3 long for ; ann

(in HIpalpeI)

BLEMXHTB OF HBBRBW

lis

Pe Ydd O'D),

4.

in

which the

first

radical

">

is

and

is

78

contracted

( 81.).

L&med He (H"?

5.

Many

dropped.

the verb gets

L&med

6.

its

)>

which the

last radical

or

is

often

such forms close with the vowel-letter n whence

name

( 82.)-

'Alef (({"7), in

which the

last radical is

^, which

fre-

quently quiesces ( 83.).

Note

1.

^The Weak Verbs were in

probability once Bi-literal

all

Verbs, and should be treated in Chapter XII.

They

are kept here,

however, for the sake of simplicity of presentation to students just

entering

upon the study

Note

weak

2.

radical

^A

single

of the language.

verb sometimes contains more than one

and so combines
78.

characteristics of

Verbs Pe

[For full Inflection, see

NUn

more than one

class.

(j'S)

Paradigm G,

p. 201.]

TABULAR VIEW
K&l. Impf. w. 5.

Nif &1.

^il. Impf. w. &

HlfU.

HfifU.

Perf.

b^'^n
I

b^in

Part. pass.

1-

b)^lT

^IDJT

npy; nyr; nyp';

&<

^G3J
T

cf.

}}oy (vd^); yij

^BD\
T

(20:6).

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

78

^y;

b-

119

^^',

lE^a (45:4); -,-1^2/!) (27:26);

^^

Remark.-yn:s*; 'ii^b': blsp': iay; yhJ';

nS^

2. a.

"inpH;

ilV^H (3:3);

(2:7); VE)"! (2:8);

liJDJ.'

(6:7);

^3^:

(18:2).

Tan

&.

^^^r\

(3:11);

(3:13);

^Sll

(2:21);

(4:15);

Dj9\

na"! (22:20).

Remark

i.-dh:"'/'';

Remark 2.-npb

nnp.

nnr";

iD^f^"; p]^<r;

(2:22);

HjP^

(2:15);

Hp

|p|S

(1:17);

"jn

iK^iijn.'*

(6:21);

Hp^";

(4:11).

Remark 3.-inn;

(1=29);

(14:21);

pHJ

(41:43); ni!l (4:12).

Verbs whose

The

1.

S'wk

first

to sustain
a.

radical

J exhibit the following peculiarities:

is

when

J takes place ( 40. 1)

loss of

initial

and with only a

it:

Generally in the |^al Inf. Const, of verbs whose stem-vowel

in the Impf.

and Imv.

is

a; in this case the ending

is

taken on in

compensation and the form becomes a Segolate.

b.

In the l^al Imv. of verbs which have a in the Imperfect.

Remark.

^The

in the Imperfect
2.
it

The

and Imperative

it

of verbs with

when, having under

closes a preformative syllable,

a.

In the l^al Imperfect, and Nif'al Perfect and Part.

b.

Throughout the

Note
Hof'al,

1.

^The

Hif'il

original

and Hof'al.

preformative vowel

on account of the sharpened

Note

2.

Care

those verbs ")"S which assimilate

15.

ii

appears in the

syllable ( 35. 1).

must be taken not

Const, and Imv. ^al) ;

2 Sam. 1

lose the initial J.

assimilation of J takes place ( 39. 1)

a silent *w4,

(1)

l^a\ Infinitive

do not often

")

to confuse with verbs I'Qt

( 80.) or drop

(2) those so-called

^"^

it

(in Inf.

forms which have a

ELEMENTS OP HBBBBW

120

79

DigeS-forte ( 85.); and (3) the Middle Vowel Nif'al Impf. which
also has DUgeS-forte.

Remark
and

in

1.

^The J remains ww-assimilated in verbs '^ laryngeal,

a few isolated instances besides.

Remark

2.

The verb Hp^

Hofal, but in the Nif'al (Tipb^) the

Remark

3.

^The verb |nJ

rnn=nJn)j which
of the

and

same vowel

(3) in

has as

peculiar (1) in

e, in

in the

Jfstl

and

retained.

is

stem-vowel

its

changed to

is

7 hke J

treats

''*^*

i,

its Inf.

(2) in

Const.

HH (=

the appearance

the Imv. (|f^) and Imperf. (|ri^),

the assimilation of the third radical in inflection.

Verbs Pe

79.

'AlSf

(^"B)

CFor full inflection, see Paradigm H, p. 202.]

"^D^'l-

1.

b^m

(1:3);

b'4<

^p^n

2.

(2:16);

1"

^D^:^
I"

(3:2);

-ID^mV

(3:2);

(3:12).

bjm

(2:16), but

^D^^

(3:6);

(3:2),6m<

^3J<1

(3:6);

"iat^^Hl:3).

Remark.-Tjbp^f
lDi<^
T

"ib^^^ (l:22),/or-lb^^; ^D^^il

(2:17);

(6:21);

(10:9).

I*'

Of the verbs having

which show

The

1.

Ji^

for their first radical, there are six (see 77.)

certain peculiarities in the

first

!E[al

Imperfect:

radical J^ loses its consonantal character,

vowel of the preformative,

orig. a, is

6 (rounded from

4,

and the

which was

lengthened from a in compensation for the quiescence of ^).*

Note.
sing.,
2.

where

^This {^ is retained orthographically,

it is

dropped after the preformative

The Imperfect stem-vowel

generally a;

when

Remark.

is

e (from

the accent recedes,

Outside

i)

except in the
J^

(=

in pause;

first

/).

but elsewhere

it is e.

of the l^al Imperfect, these verbs are treated

as verbs 'B laryngeal ( 74.).

Note.

^A

few verbs are treated sometimes as i<"B, some-

times as 'B laryngeal.

'

Cf. 'rxKM. tor Sjn<i

(Num.

11

25).

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

80]

80.

Verbs Pe

W&w

121

(V'S)

[For full Inflection, see Paradigm

I, p.

203.]

TABULAR VIEW
?:ai.

perf.

impf. w.

e.

Kai. impf. w.

a.

NiTs,i.

Hirn.

b^^
- T

^co^
- T

^DlJ
-

b^Dln

impf.

^23^

bc:^^

h^v

^^Dl^

Imv.

^^

Harai.

bcDin
"

b^v

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

122

^l)y; lh)i

h.

T^lH

(21:3);

iT^lH

(11:27);

(5:4);

80

l^l^jl

(5:3).

j;ia^^

4.

nJ^Sim

-I1!|n(39:l);

c.

'?3T'.

J-

paM28:i8); nan'; n^a.T; in^an-'

Vii^^

Verbs whose

radical

first

was

exhibit

1.

a)

originally

the following

peculiarities:
1.

be

The

original

initial,

"|

In the

ments

and

and the strong form

|Cal Part.,

also after the prefix

2.

passes over into

as in the 5al, Pi'el

IJIal

nH

( 44.

Kal

of the

( 44.

Inf. Const. ;

(1)

it

would

Inf. Abs., the

and frequently

Imperfect, Imperative and Inf. Const., two treat)

(or 1) is rejected or retained:

In those verbs which reject the radical

a.

and

1. 6).

according as the radical

exist,

whenever

Pii'al Perfects

the Imperfect has for

its

"|,

stem-vowel e (from

or (before

i),

laryngeals) a, while the preformative takes imchangeable

k in compensation for the loss of

).

(2) the Imperative has the same vowel as the Imperfect;

(3)

the Infinitive construct, taking on the ending

pensation

an

verbs |"S,

(c/.

o-class Segolate

for its stem-vowel a, while the

(i)

noun n^Cp

of the preformative

Note.

changed to

),

and gives

n /D.

(for

In those verbs which retaiu the radical

6.

78. 1. a), assiunes the

"),

in

com-

form

of

89.).

the Imperfect has

unites with the vowel

^,

"^
i.

Only three verbs' retain

C)

iii

the Imperative, and these

are verbs which have no third radical.

Remark
ri/D (=

1.

^The

Inf.

r)?D). before

Const, has most frequently

suffixes

n^CD;

occur of the form H^Cp; the form 7CD''

n^CD^ seldom

Remark

Ex. 2

2.

cases,

however,

Seemingly for compensation, the Imperative often

14.

Isa. 14:11.

several

found a few times, while

occurs.

assumes the cohortative ending

is

the form

rrv, (C)^, n-v; cf.

Ps. 45

16.

9:17.
also the pausal form

Isa.

( 69.).

Isa.

IS

7.

'Jer. 11:16.
nirn' (Deut. 33:23).

Isa.

58

5.

"Josh. 8:8.

BT AN INDUCnVX METHOD

81]

Remark
and

Pe

Inf. Const,

W&w

and

verb

Tlbn woZi forms

its Hif. Perf.

4.

The

In ^al Imperf.

dropped.

and

treat )

The
a.

as

first

is

6), in

io,ke

of the

and

It appears as

(1),

follows the analogy of this

when

Const.

Inf.

assimilates

it

regularly treated in

radical

in the Nif'al Imperf.,

6.

Imperf., Imv.

and Imperf. on the analogy

Hp?

verb

of verbs in its Imperative

class

its Tpil

verb.

Remark

3.

^The

3.

123

as

is

Pe Nfln

verbs.

medial, remains; but

a consonant only when

Imv. and

where 7

T^a,\

some Pe Wi,w verbs

Inf. Const.

It unites with the preformative

it

would be doubled, as

(44. 5

vowel

a,

c).

and forms

(a+w=

the Nif'al Perfect and Participle, and throughout the Hif'tl

( 44. 3. a).
c.

It unites

with the preformative vowel ii, and forms

the Hofal ( 44.

Note.

^The form

4.

I'S

Hofal Imperf. by
;

was

"i

others, as a

(=1)

is

][al

Passive Imperf.

assimilated, just as

assimilated.

81.

by some

In a few verbs V'S, the

( 78.)

throughout

731"' (from y'^1 be able) is regarded

~

as a regular

3. e).

Verbs Pe Ydd 0"B)

[For full inflection, see Paradigm

TABULAR VIEW

I, p.

202.]

J of verbs

ELEMENTS OF HBBKEW

124

1.

3^11(12:13);

2.

31pin

Y,T^U9

nDp^^'; ^^P^n

(21:7);

(32:13); ^D'!p^^

p:^n'; n^p^i<;

82

24) /or ypll]; iQp^;] (34:18); IpJ^'Pl-'

njWH

(12:16);

(32:13);

(4:7);

n3^ip^^U32:10); DEJ%T

^^CDinb^ D^CD^D": npi^D.'

Verbs whose

first

radical

was

originally 1 exhibit the following pe-

culiarities:
1.

In the T^l Imperfect the radical

preformative

(i)

and

gives

unites with the vowel of the

No

( 30. 2. a).

forms of an Imperative

occur.
2.

In the Hif il the radical

tive (a)

and gives S

Note.

unites with the vowel of the preforma-

( 30. 4. 6).

No Nif'al or Hof'al forms occur.

82.

Verbs V'^ or 1"^, called n"b

[For fall inflection, see Paradigm E, p. 204

TABULAR VIEW
Nirai.

E&i.

Pfei.

Pffai.

mm.

mspa'ei.

perf.

nE)p HDpi

mp.

niDp

impf.

nEjp^i^p^

m^:',

n^p^ nDp*^ niDpni

imv.

nap niDpn n^p

nippn niDpnn

inf.ab8.

nbpj^^P^

HDpn

Inf. const.

niCDp

Part. act.

HCp

Part. pass.

i!|CDp

1.

a.

'"^^Pt

nlDpn

nliDp

nicsp

HEJpJ

Jt;

nlCDpnntepnn

HlDpIp
(2:6);

>Jer.l:12.

nE)pnn

nDpD nEJpHD

HEJpD

(2:10); nr^^T]
n\"l
TT

ilsa.66:ll.
BJer.4:22.
Bstb. 2:6.

r[\::^r\

1 Sam. 16

17.

n^3
t-

(18:33);

!Ez.2:7.
'Bz.2:7.

n^^H-'
nJDJ':
t;t
t:*
<l8a.23:16.

31Egs.6:7.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

82]

nb

b.

.TH": (1:29);

c.

n|'j;(i:ii); n:s;h(4:2); nb^r^'-,

nb:?,"^ (2:6);

Remark.-nE'"^^ Hiyn

(4:2);

n'Da'';

.TH

nsD'; ni<m"p

e.

nla^V

(2:3);

r\p^_ (6:14); HJ^'^j .THri";

rh:^^; riip';

nlN*l

Verbs whose third radical

case having passed over into

1.

nann

(30:3);

(24:21).

(i5:i);

hVs"; nSH";

are very few, the

Verbs whose

nsn-'

nl^HH

nli^n^";

(2:19);

is 1

ni2

(24:45);

HJ^.'

(i-

(18:18);

125

(6:19);

nN!"in."

in nearly every

third radical

pre-

is 1

sent the following peculiarities:

1.

When

the third radical

(1)

would be

except in the ^^al passive Participle.

by the

vowel-letter Hj

n"/.

The
It

a.

appears nowhere

Its place is generally

supphed

and hence these verbs are commonly termed

following treatments of final

is

final, it

wholly rejected, and

k,

occur:

rounded from a

( 36. 2), appears

as the vowel of the second radical in all Perfects.

b.

It unites

with the stem-vowel, and

e,

contracted from ay

( 36. 6), appears as the vowel of the second radical in all Imperfects.
c.

It

unites with the stem-vowel,

and

&,

contracted from ay

( 36. 6), appears as the vowel of the second radical in all Participles,

except the

^M passive.

Remark.

In the construct form

(a),

yielding the

appear as the stem-vowels of the

Hof.,

and sometimes in
e.

It is lacking,

Pi'el

and 6

Infs. absolute (the latter (e) in Hif.

and

(either

Nif.).

rounded from

a,

or contracted from

a and w) with the ending ^, appears as the ending of

Ex.

21:20.

Ps. 147:2.
Deut. 13 : 16.
" Josh. 9 20.
:

contracts

form i (H ).
and 6 (rounded from k) and e, the usual vowels,

with the pireceding vowel

d. It is lacking,

of the participle

= Job 9: 22.
1 Sam. 1:10.
" Hag. 1:2.
" Ps. 59 14.
:

> Ex. 2:11.

'1 Sam. 2:27.
"2 Sam. 13 2.
" Ezek. 6 11.
:

all Infs.

Const.

Mai. 2:17.
sPs. 40:2.

" Mie. 6
"

3.

Kgs. 18

1.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

126

arising

2.

from the contraction of ^__, appears in

(1:26) for

r^iy

^2-) (1:22);

3. a.
i-

and e (written

unites with the preceding vowel,

/. It

VIT;

1^3"1 (2:1);

ns (1:22); von;

82

all

))fi'>_

H-n-)'

Imvs. (2 masc.

(1:9);

VH

]vni^:; jrsD^';

sg.).

(1 14);
=

i^v^n*;

rriDnj'; n"'\ni; n>-5iT; nn^^iy (45:19); n^Nin-"'

Dn^^^l
T

J-

-: I-

(3:i4);

n\^v

(3:5);

^m^

T J" ^:iT

and in''p3"; 'n""!.V"

a<^

"IH^IV

c.^|''\'in (41:36); ^pj;)E^ni (19:33);

(^

n\3n";

(4:1);

j-

"viiv

j"

^'^)-

^1'^^^^"; n^E^j^n'';

nj^DB-'"
^n^^(l:2); nnK;V(27:17);
nn>?"l(38:14);
nnN"lM9:14);
T -: IT
T ":
IT
T (T ^T
T

4.

2.

with

nn-?3";
nnpa^'n
nn:Dn^^;
t:t;:tJit;*

(24:46).

Before vowel-addiiiona, the radical

^ is

preceding vowel;

its

it

usually lacking, together

and em-

appears, however, in pausal

phatic forms.
3.

Before amgonant-additiont, Ihe radical

ceding stem-vowel, always

unites with tiie pre-

forming the diph&ongol

a,

Off,

which

appears as
a.

6 (^__) in the Perfects of the passive stems (rarely it is ^

6.

(^__), thinned

from

i,

stems, though PJ'el and HJf'll stems very frequently have

c.

4.

S {1

The

),

Perfect 3 sg. fern, of

^This

H^^

is

Deut. 32 37.
:

all

stems lacks the third radical

to

which

's

(")

added.

probably the usual feminine ending, added

after the analogy of other verbs.

contracted from ay, in Imperfects and Imperatives.

and takes the old feminine ending H^-^

Note.

);

generally in the Perfects of active

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

82]

a.

5.

n^;

^3' for

^"in*
b.

for

(1)

ns^.r;

(2)

nE'^l

ia* for r\)^;

snn

for

3"in'

S^n'

for ns"i^n;

127

for

3*in

for

D^^ll:

r6^n.

2p^y

(9:21); -rj^^iT (27:38); ntS'^itl (24:46).

(3) |n;i1 (2:22);

^T

(1:22);

(33:19).

^p^^.l';

Ip;*!

(4)

IpnV"; jD^l"; i^nni

(5)

y^^X

"inni

(4:4);

|D^V;

(3:6);
(4:1);

n-ini

(4?:34).

^m

(4:5);

2^^^?^

(1:7);

E;j;n (22:12).
(6) b-iV\'';
T

5.

^^^)
TJ"-

(12:7); ^^^J^V'^
"
T

(2:2); '\^^) (2:16);

(7)

^5^1

(8)

p^>T

IT

jQ^I"; iy^|;V; ^^H^l (9:21).

(29:10); nS;; (9:27);

jD^l"

Forms lacking any representation

of the third radical are

found

as follows
a.

Without n__ in the

in Hif'il forms, a helping

b.

with

Without

Waw

-=?-

Pi'el, Hif'il

or

the verbal form

(2) it
(3) it
(4) it

is

70.).

may

and HiOpa'el Imperatives;

often inserted.

in the Imperfect

Conversive ( 69.

(1)

-^

when used

as a Jussive, or

In the absence of the

n~^

stand without change; or

may have the vowel of the preformative modified;

may receive the helping-vowel -rr; or
may receive the helping-vowel -?-, and also have

or

the

vowel of the preformative modified;

(5) in

laryngeal forms -=-

(6) in

the Nif'al there

(7) in

the Pi'el

and

is

is

employed as the helping-vowel;

no further change;

Jlidpa'el there

is

naturally the absence

of the characteristic DigeS-forte;

(8) in the Hif'il the helping vowel -=-

in

Ps. 119

18.

frequently employed,

which case the -^ of the preformative

e ( 36. 4.)
>

is

is

deflected to

128

ELEMENTS OP HEBREW

[83

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

83]

Remark 2.-!ia2
Remark

'

/or

Dn2m'; TiDa'; r\iwr\-'

^)ty; nD^' for T^m^: ^iii^T;

ii3;

3.-!lJ^p:J=;

Verbs whose third radical

1.

Final

as in the

!l^al

and

forms,

is

J^ exhibilxthe following peculiarities:

always quiesces ( 43.

ceding vowel except

129

a,

1); this

does not

afifect

any

pre-

which, in an open syllable, then becomes

Perf ., Imperf and Imv. ; throughout the Pu'al and

.

I,

Hof 'al

in the Nif'al Perfect.

Note.

^The 5al Imperf. and Imv. have a for their stem-vowel,

after the analogy of verbs '7 laryngeal ( 76.).

2.

3.
all

Medial

a consonant (larynge),

is treated as

a.

Before

b.

Before the S*wa which precedes the suffixes

all

Medial

vowel-additions.

quiesces

{i. e.,

?j,

Q3,

^2-

loses its consonantal character) before

consonant-additions, the preceding vowel becoming

a.

-T-,

rounded from

a, in

6.

-rr-,

lowered from

i,

the

^j^al

Perfect (active).

and

in the |^al Perfect (stative),

in the

remaining Perfects.

Note.

This use of e in the Perfects

parallels the usage in

H"?

verbs ( 82.).
c.

^r

(e),

after the analogy of the H''^ verb, in the Imperfecta

and Imperatives.

Remark

In addition to instances indicated under 3 (above),

1.

shows a tendency to become

5^

Remark

2.

^,

silent in

many

isolated cases.

losing its consonantal character,

frequently

is

dropped.

Remark

^There are

3.

the inflection of verbs

many

in

1 Sam. 25
Job 18 3.

Jer.

29

10.

8.

( 82.), there being

of verbs

^"7

with

an evident confusion,

one class with the other.

cases, of the

'

H"?

numerous examples

'
'

Josb. 2 : 16.
Ps. 32 : 1.

'

Judg. 4

'

Buth 2:9.

19.

>

Buth

>

Fs. 89

1
:

14.

11.

XII.

)3^^T

!l^n (8:8);
I

2.

J-

(8:1);

(21:12);

HIO^^ (38:11);

(3:15);

Dp"!

^y

-J"

P]!)^?^^

DE'"

The Semitic vocabulary in

tri-literal;

general

i. e.,

taught that

all

are, for the

still

so teach.

(3:22).

(3:19);

in particular are
part,

made upon

Hebrew grammars have

But

it

now appears

long

tri-literal

to be true that

not only in the Semitic languages as a whole, but also

and those organized

guage was toward
this influence

origin

indeed that

more
all

But the tendency

as bi-literak.

The

tri-literality.

and sought

in various

bi-literals

ways

Some

Weak

of the lan-

gradually yielded to

to achieve tri-literality, or

carry the marks of their bi-

plainly visible than do others.

of the

in

of words, those organized as tri-literah,

equivalent, for themselves.

literal

most

Hebrew words might be explained upon the

and many

Hebrew, there were two kinds

its

^H

^l^t^

(18:33);

and the Hebrew

words

the basis of three radical consonants.

originally,

(29:20);

^H"!
VjT-

(4:8).

predominantly

basis;

Verbs

Classes of Bi-literal Verbs

84.
1.

Bi-literal

is

probable

Verbs were originally of the

bi-literal

It

order; but for the sake of convenience they have been treated here as
tri-literals.

But

there are

two

classes of verbs

point of view are best treated frankly as

1.

The "Ayin-doubled

which

is

which from every

bi-literals.

(^"^) verb, the main

These

are:

characteristic

of

the doubling of the second radical.

Note^

An

accurate

name

for

this

class

awaits

discovery.

'Ayin must here be understood as designating the second radical,

rather than the middle radical, since these roots have only two consonants.
2.

The Middle-Vowel

and 'Ayin Y6d

Note.

verbs,

commonly

called "Ayin

Wiw

0"^)

(V'j;).

^The name "Middle-Vowel verb"

for convenience than for accuracy.

130

is

chosen here rather

85]

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

131

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

132

One group

of bi-literal verbs sought to

approximate

tri-literality

As a

strengthening the consonantal element of the root.

by

85

rule,

The

the second radical was therefore doubled whenever possible.

vowel used before this doubled consonant was the same as that found
as characteristic stem-vowel in the corresponding forms of the

o.

1.

tri-

strong verb.

literal

The second

throughout the
6.

radical

is

This

is

the second radical in the

the regular form in Aramaic for these verbs; this

form of the Imperf. therefore

Remark.

final,

and Hof'al stems.

Some verbs double the first instead of

!Kal Imperf.

when

regularly doubled, except

Nif'al, Hif'il

!l^al,

Such

is

forms

commonly

called the

Aramaic Imperf.
'Hif'il

and

and Hof'al become

fully

occur sporadically in the

Hof'al.

Certain forms of the

2.

the

The

!KIal

and vocalizing

radical twice

These

strong verb.

tri-literal
a.

all

!^al, Nif'al, Hif'il

by writing the second

tri-Uteral

as in

are:

movement

Perfect of verbs denoting action or

in

the forms of the 3d pers.

6.

The

and

Klal Participles

vowels of these forms

made any

Infin.

other

The

Absol.

method

naturally long

of strengthening

them

impossible.
c.

3. a.

few sporadic forms.

"JniW; ^nl2D=; nl3D'; ^D'bpy: n)r2^r\'; nl2Dn^;

b.

nj^3Dn

c.

Dnl3pV; nl3p1D; iDnicspj; DnlE)pn].

4. a.

b.

nr3Dn

(37:7);

nyhnr\)

(37:7);

iD'^r-,
lii^";
TdTT

1J3D'"";

^jn"
"T

Sam. 22

Josh. 5:9.

Job 16:

"IKgB. 18:37.

Ezek. 41

" Ps. 139

"

Isa.

54

24.

13.
1.

Ps. 49 6.
" Deut. 7:7.
" Isa. 12:6.
:

1pn3"; '^m''- ^ison^';

-J

nj^^an-'

(but 1i^).

>

7.

(41=54);

22.

'

Ex. 40

'

3.

Sam. 3

11.

" Prov. 8 27.

Ruth 3 15.
" Ezek. 1 9.
:

2 Sam. 6

Josh. 6:3.

Jer. 27

22.

8.

" Jer. 31 7.
Ezek. 22 26.
:

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

85]

d.

^nn

nr)nn
When

3.

bnD';

(6:1);

(41:54);

2DD';

ni"'}vn';

133

nlsc^n^

""aDn';

hmi^m hmy

terminations beginning with a consonant are attached to

forms containing a doubled second radical, a separating towel

serted to

make

possible to retain

it

a.

The forms

6.

The Imperfect

c.

The

doubling of the radical.

in the perfect take 6 as the separating vowel.

takes &

(1

before the termination HJ.

separating vowels regularly carry the tone except 'before

the heavy terminations

Note.

t^ie

in-

is

QH

and Y^

The origin of these separating vowels

the probability

is

not

is

that they arose after the analogy of the

but

clear,

T]/

verb

forms.
4.

The

following variations from the form of the stenir-wwel as

appears in corresponding forms of the

a.

The

tri-literal

u regularly appears

original

strong verb are found:

in the

and Imperative, whenever the tone leaves the

it

^^^'l

Imperf., Inf.,

root-syllable

by reason

of the addition of affixes or suffixes.

b.

The

original

ii is

deflected to 6 in the l^al Imperf.

when

the

tone recedes to the preformative upon the addition of W^w-conversive;

and frequently
c.

also in cases covered

d.

o.

In the Nifal Imperf. and Imv., where e appears in the strong

verb, the original a

ened to

by 4

is

retained unchanged.

In the Hif "il stem throughout, the attenuated

i is

not length-

as in the strong verb, but

(1) is

when

lowered to e

(2) is retained as

when

it

has the tone;

it loses

the tone

by reason

of the

addition of affixes or suffixes, and

(3) is deflected

to e

when

the tone recedes on account of

w&w-conversive.

A naturally long vowel

Note.

before a doubled consonant

contrary to Usage in Hebrew, being rarely,

Jer. 25:29.

Sam. 3

11.

'Jer.

25.

is

ever, found.

>Cant. 6:5.

21:4.

Judg. 13

if

'Job 16:

7.

BLEMBNTS OF HSBHBW

134

nby,

5. a.

hut

3p:^

(37:7);

^y^pV; DD^,

hut

'J3D^V; DDn; ^HH.'

6.

DDn^

c.

^nn

nbi'; D^i"; 'll2n Tl2ri";

(6:1);

Remark.-^p_t)!

^nin

d.

nr2pn

6m<

85

pl3n pl2n."

^np"; 'jn-'pn"; nbe^n"; ^nDi^nv"

(16:5);

UU^; ^rVf
nl2D1D."
-

(4:26); lE^ilVS;
T

Certain variations occur in the wwel of the preformative syllable

5.

from the vowel forms in the corresponding places in the strong

These

verb.

are:

In the regular

a.

Imperf., the Nif'al Perf.

!l^al

and Part., and

the

Imperf. and Imv., the original a of the preformative syllable

Hif'il

rounded to H when pretonic, but

is

is

reduced to S'w& when the tone

moves farther away.

b.

In the Nif'al Imperf., Imv., and

Aramaic Imperf.
i

and

Infins.

of the TSM, the a of the preformative

in the so-called
is

attenuated to

unaccented sharpened syllable and remains without further

in the

change.
c.

tive

In the

the tone

and

Hif'il Perf.

attenuated to

is

moves away

Remark. ^The

Part., the original a of the preforma-

and then lowered to e when pretonic; but when

original a

intransitive

is

reduced to compound S'wS,

'K.al

Imperf. with a as stem-vowel also

has e in the preformative syllable, but probably here

an

original

This

<1.

it

from

arises

i.

The preformative

d.

{-=r).

is

stem regularly lengthens

of the Hof.

li

to

probably due to the influence of the Middle-Vowel verb

( 86.).

Remark.
first

^Frequently forms appear with

radical doubled;

e. g.,

I^Dn-^"

Num.

34

1 Kgs. 7 15.
Ezek. 47 2.
1 Sam. 5:8.
2 Sam. 19 44.

'2 Sam. 5 23.

" Ps. 30 13.
" Job 16 7.

"

>

>

Isa.

7:8.

4.

Hos. 10

14.

unchanged and the

ii

Mic. 2:4.
Deut. 2 24.
" Isa. 24 3.
Nmn. 17 20.
" Ezek. 41 24.

'

2 Ohr. 14
Ps. 68 3.
:

29.

" Deut. 19

Job 24

6.

" Jer. 25
:

6.

24.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

85]

a.

6.

pphp

(49:10);

ijnQHDnn
AT

d-

bSn";

b!?lDy;

8.

-in^^'./or

nb^;

^^BHI

"^Vpl";

See forms cited under 3

The

(25:22);

(43:10).

7.

6.

^nDolii^ lifahn^

ib^Tl";

?)E^"D^^;

135

a, b, c,

a, d,

1pin3''./or

a, c.

TjI^D^f (27:21), /or

1pn3;

p^;,/("-pv i^^]'\for It;);

Intensive StsTus

assume

nD3-1.";

(20:7);

ynn /or ynv

These

special forms in these verbs.

are:
o.

The

b.

The

P6lel stem, as active intensive, with its reflexive Hidpdlel.

Polal stem, as passive of the Polel, with

its reflexive

Hiepolal.

The

c.

Note.

2d

stem appears as an active intensive

These stems serve both for

Vowel verb
of the

Pilpel

radical gives the desired tri-literality;

in place of another doubling of the

entire bi-literal root

is

2d

is

>

Pb. 90

>

Lam.

Jer.

6.

12.

51:25.

" Ps. 10
Isa. es

Pi. 91

3.

:
:

and

to express the

radical.

In the Pflpel, the

few verbs write the 2d radical twice and make intensive

tone

Middle-

doubled.

These are forms that developed

The

for the

lengthened (and rounded)

stems from this lengthened root exactly as in the

7.

and

few verbs.

In the P61el and Polal forms, the double writing

( 86.).

intensive idea, the vowel of the penult

d.

this verb

in a

20.
6.

late.

generally stays upon the

Ps. 131

Isa.

53

2.

5.

"Isa. 29:4.

Ps. 104 35.

" Ecd. 9:1.
" Isa. 42 4.
:

verb proper.

tri-literal

stem-syllable.

Judg. 10 8.
Isa. 24 19.
Jer. 51:58.
" Lev. 20 9.
ProT. 8 29.

As a

rule, it

Ps. 74 13.
Eccl. 10 : 10.
:

"2 Sam.

6:14.

Isa. 1 6.
Prov. 29
:

6.

ELEMENTS OF BEBBEW

136

leaves that syllable only

when pronominal
8.

The forms

when

[86

the separating vowels are used or

sufBxes are added.

of this verb

sometimes exchange with similar forms

of the Middle-Vowel verb ( 86,).

86.

The Middle-Vowel Verb

[For full inflection, see Paradigm

M, p. 208.1

TABULAR VIEW
Nirai.

Middle <2.

Perf.

<

Middle t.

Hirn.

H8r&i.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

86]

-^^^V;
....

!|n{<V;

t?l31T (32:9); {Sfl:iV;

c.

d.

t^^nn

(4:4);

137

nli^J

..

n^p^

^It^fn
(1:17);
... (14:16); "n^J^n
T
.

Q^pD

y^P^^ (50:15);

DDH

(44:8);

Ub''t2'n
J
v:

^^^^

(4:3);

nb'inr; n^^nn
n^r2\ (38:11);

e.

niD

D^pH^*;

(38:8);

I" T

(24:8);

(9:9);

(19:2);

(17:21);

J.

^nDpH

(50:15);
nti^H
T

"inNnni

Q^p

nit^^n (3:19);
(42:2);

nbDHV;

QD"!";

HJilZ^'n';

(9:17);

3Ey"n
" T

(20:9);

H^IDJ

(34:15).

(27:12).

(13:17);

^It^^ (31:3);

nJDp; nJ^S;."'

Remark.-D'nyi; ^^V^; -ijn";

Ypn"; Dp;'U4:8); Y'i;)Ul8:2);
^^ll

DCi^f"! (26:18);
T JT -

D^2^M30:42);

/.

(20:1); DJ^'l (39:12);

T JT-

T JT-

nJDJynV"
T
T "
:

pM49:16); |1^^

n"'K^"i< (3:15);

(24:23);

pDy; n^^3"; p.''

Remark. nV;
J

2t^''; nr*; r\Dp'';

g.

The Middle-Vowel verb

mate

tri-literality,

is

q^)-)

V JT-

(2:8);

ntS^'"')

D^Dp'"; D^^p^^; DN^-''^

a

bi-literal

verb which seeks to approxi-

mainly by emphasizing the characteristic stem-

Wherever the stem-vowel

comes naturally long,

a.

The a

if

is

characteristic of the form, it be-

the consonantal environment permits.

of the !^al Perf

becomes

k,

except before terminations

beginning with a consonant.

Remark.
>

Isa.

(30:40);

V JT-

Hence

vowel.
1.

q^izI;

^Jjl^o.

29

22.

Stative verbs have e or 5 in the l^a\ Perf.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

138

86

The original a of all Nif 'al forms is lengthened to S and rounded

6.

to

6.

Note.

way

^This 6 gives

to

fi

some forms

in

of the Perf., for

the sake of euphony.

c.-The same change to 6 takes place in certain verbs having a

as the original stem-vowel of the J^al Imperf.

The

d.
1

a of the Hif 'il attenuates to i, which lengthens to

original

Imv. 2d

in all forms except the Inf. Abs., the

sive

in the Imperf. before the ending

Note.

The

e.

An

Const.,

and

original

in the

HJT

Hif 'il of the

i in.

due to the influence of

this

li is

aid

>

in

masc, the Jus-

some exceptional
strong verb

tri-literal

forms.

probably

is

in the Middle- Vowel verb.

lengthened to

11

and

in the l^al Imperf.

Imv. except in the 2d fem.

pi.,

where

ii is

Infin.

lowered

HJ

before the affix

to

sing,

form of the Imperf., the Imperf. with W&w-conversive, sometimes

Remark.

In the Jussive form of the IfM Imperf.,

lowered to 5; and in the form with W&w-conversive, u

except where

6,

/.

An

carries the tone

it

original

lengthens to

Const, of the Middle

Remark.
conversive
g.

letter),

The

is

In

and becomes

ii

is

is

merely

deflected to

5.

IfM Imperf., Imv. and

in the

Infin.

verb.

the Jussive this

deflected to

becomes

e;

and with w&w-

e.

?!al Active Part, takes

& (sometimes with

{< as

vowel-

the vowel so characteristic of the penult of this Part, in the

verb, though in

tri-literal

The JpA

rounded form

its

rounds

Infin. Absol.

its

4 into

6; here it

remains as

as in the characteristic syl-

6,

lable of the corresponding tri-literal form.

2. a.

nb"'pn
(44:8);

h-

Pi. 130

64 10.
lav. 7 80.

18.

''np'in

(14:22);

^i'Tpn

^ny''p.T;

^njiDJ^ ^njisp; ^nj3x^

nrtpiDH';

I.

(6:18);

nrsiin'';

50
60
Mic. 2

ni'-ni^'n^;

'

Is.

5.

Pb.

laa.

8.

'

Ezok. 16 66.

12.

38

9.
:

n^ninn';

Isa. 10

13.

Bx. 13

19.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

86]

2.

Forms which lengthen the stem-vowel,

139

as indicated above, take

certain aeparating vowels before terminations beginning with a con-

sonant.

These make

possible to retain the lengthened stem-vowel

it

and, in addition, give a longer form.

a.

In the Nif'al and

b.

In the IKal Imperf. and rarely in the

separating vowel 6 0__)

c.

Hif'll Perfects

is

Just

as in the

ad

^"^

?|S^^^

3. a. niD''^ (38:11);

Ti^n

(1:17);

H"?

the

t^-i^n

^iDH

-j;

"TlillDJ';

D^J^23.'

(17:10);

j^SH'; ^btp\

Ul^H-'

Q^pD

niJCfn (14:16);

(4:4);

p]^;n';

(41:33);

y^^^

(17:21);

HiDK'n*;
t;j"T

jT

blSMl7:26); ^1^^17:12);

r^y^p^ (8:3);

(42:2);

Q-^p^

!|:DJ';

"OJIDJ^ Dp;'U4:8); |13:

(34:24);

vowels are

verb.

(50:15);

iiaDJ (10:18);
jT

(50:15);

3.

{)).

^D;

(3:15);

DE^n

"1^

verb, the separating

perhaps due to the analogy of the

d.

used.

heavy terminations Qf^

Note.

e.

is

Imperf.

Hif'll

These separating vowels regularly carry the tone, except

before the

*.

the separating vowel

^nbpn(6:i8); inb-in

U^pn*:

(9:9);

TjiK^pn";

(14:22);

See examples cited under 1 c above.

The vowel

of the preformative syllable,

when

the latter

is

open,

necessarily undergoes change:

o.

The

original

a roimds to

S'wd when ante-pretonic, in the

IDf'il Imperf.,
6.

The

Infinitives,

3.

when

>

is

reduced to

and

Part.,

in the Nif'al Imperf., Imv.,

and

and remains without further change in the sharpened

42 17.
Deut. 1 13.
Jjtr. 14 12.
Isa.

and

Imv., and Infinitives.

original a attenuates to

syllable, just as in the tri-literal strong

pretonic,

l^al Imperf., Nif'al Perf.

Job 20 10.
Ezek. 38 7.
u Ezek. 27 26.
'

verb in the corresponding forms.

'

Isa.

50

5.

Ex. 16:7.
" 2 Ohr. 15 16.
'

Ps. 38 : 9.
Josh. 4 9.
:

liLEMENte OF

140

c.

The

to e

a of the Hif "il Perf. and Part,

original

and lowered

HBBBEW

when

pretonic, but

is

is

86

attenuated to

reduced to 8'w& when ante-

pretonic.
d.

(1 c

In the preformative of the

changes as the attenuated

DE^in

4.

Imperf ., with a as stem-vowel

5. a.

0.

pl^^ W^IS';

ijjiD";
IT

n^^ln'^
T

"^Sb?^

(47:12);

The

DpIH^; npi"";

Qy*: 2a^1Sn

^^^^Y; "IDID-'

P^plv; (1=20);

b.

undergoes the same

of the preformative of the Hif'tl Perfect.

p^H';

(42:28);

(43:12);

4.

lEpll

above) of some intransitive verbs original

ir

plS^"; plan^it-"

ptenv"

(2:24);
is^t^^sn^
IT

)iT

^n^D^I

Hof'al stem, having

its

^3b";

(45:11);

^I^S^S";

characteristic vowel in the pre-

formative syllable, naturally strengthens that vowel rather than the

Consequently u

stem-vowel.

is

course without further change.

lengthened to u

The

which

(1),

is

of

inflection is otherwise as in

the strong verb.

5.

The Middle-Vowel

forms

a.

The

c.

known

The corresponding

Note.

and

intensive actives, corresponding to the Pi'el

of tri-literal verbs, are

b.

no middle radical to double,

verb, having

intensive stems in a different way.

its

^For

as the P6lel

Hiflpa'el

and HWpdlel.

intensive passive

is

known

as the Pdlal.

an explanation of the origin of these forms, see

Some Middle-Vowel verbs make an

intensive stem

85.

by simply

doubling the bi-Kteral root as a whole and vocalizing the resulting

form

like

a regular

These forms are known as the

tri-Uteral Pi'el, etc.

PUpel, Pilpal, and Hidpalpel.

Isa. 30 33.
Ex. 10 8.
Isa. 62
7.
"Prov. 24:3.
" Isa. 22 17.
n Ps. 119 28.
'

Ex. 40 17.
17 1.
Job 23 15.
"Jer. 20:9.
> Esth. 9
31.
'

Isa.

" Buth 4

7.

Num.

IS

35.

Ps. 9:8.
" Ps. 67 : 23.

1 Kgs. 20 27.
" Bsth. 9 27.
:

Lev. 4
Ps. 99

10.

4.

Job 15 7.
"Esth. 4:4.
:

Ps. 119

106.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

86]

forms of Middle-Vowel verbs are found only in the later

d. Pt'el

These were probably made

literature.

Middle-W,w verbs, such as ^)^,

6.

(8:3);
ni2;^
J\ T

pj

!|J<2

J-

n^o
as

from T^jp);

(from

^aSJT

(10:18);

^^^1

^nb"in

(14:22);

^""^^

(30:42);

HmiKl^n';

p^^

(3:15);

(24:23);

ninn."

if

^D^

from ^3);
- T

!)!3l"Ti'''

(from

from y\r2;
^lOJ,
T

(for

IT

DH;

as

if

from Q0"1); ^Q''"

:|!1D).

The tendency

6.

iinO (7:22);

(6:18);

^nlj''3;

(from t^3; as
if

nii?> etc.

7!)^,

Remark.H:n';
8.

after the analogy of genuine

J"

U^t\

(49:16);

(7:9);

JT

^nbpH

(34:24);

7.

141

of the

Middle-Vowel verb being to

stress the

stem-vowel, the tone naturally stays upon this strengthened vowel

wherever possible.

and

It loses the tone only

when

are added, which carry the tone;

|J^

(a)

the endings

or

(6)

Q^

the separating

vowels 6 or S are used, which always carry the tone themselves except before
etc., in

and 1^

fvhich the stem-vowel

or

(c)

in forms with WS,w-conversive,

was never strengthened.

Middle-f verbs differ from Middle-fl only in the ^al Imperf.,

7.

Imv. and
all

Qf^

of

Inf.

which

Remark.
form of the

Const.,

and sometimes

appears instead of

A few Middle-!

j^^al

Perf. with

in the JfM. Passive Part., in

(i.

verbs seem to show a characteristic

instead of k.

But

these forms are per-

haps better considered as HifUs with the preformative dropped.

8.

Since the Middle-Vowel verb and the so-called *^yin-doubled

verb are fundamentally the same,

often interchange forms.

Ezek. 16

55.

it is

As a matter

natural that the two should

of fact, the

same root some-

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

142

[87

times develops two sets of forms, one with strengthening of consonants, the other with strengthening of vowels,
")l|i{

and Tnit,
T

More

etc.

and ]]^;
~ T

e. g., '\)'2l

often, only sporadic forms of a second

development appear.

87.

1.

Comparative View of the Verb Forms

THE

I^AL

perfect AND IMPERFECT

Impf. with

Perfect.

5.

Impf. with

Impf. withe.

[yaktfl]

ft&tai]

[yattul]

[ySJjtai]

'pop

^OP''

^opi

^05|y

^0^.V

Active

&.

6op^)

Stative

'B laryng.
'y lexyng.

^p

^^pi

'7 laiyng.

nop

nop:

^^

A"

TB
- r

bOp
Op
op
nop

rv

op:

op

op"".

op^
nop^

^p(i)
(6)

bp:
^T'^

Or
s

Sb^;; also '^;.

Ji]aBli%

and

witii

Only in verba

Only in

W&w-convers. In pause.
J5<.

("e

and

'; larvng.

BT AN INBFCTIVB METHOD

87]

2.

THE

PI'EL

and PO'AL PERFECTS AND IMPERFECTS

PI'el Perfect

143

144

ELEMENTS OF HEBBEW
HifU

Perf.

H6f<5J Perf.

mf"H Imperf.

[87

Hdf &I Imperf.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

87]

5.

THE VARIOUS INFINITIVES CONSTRUCT

ESil.

[k'tul]

Strong

'b laryng.

'y laryng.

'^ laryng.

v'B

14S

Nifai.

Pi'el.

Hlf'U.

HOfU.

Nouns

XIII.
88.
1.

Saying, from

-IDN

The

Inflection of

"IDN;

13T

Nouns

Word, bom^'2'^^

HID

^<A,

from niD2.

,Tn

n^C^t^^

(1:24);

(1:1);

nIX-nhK

D^-D"'!?)'! (1:22);

(1:14); D^JIJf (3:6).

3-

rP"^-rp"1

(1

Y1N"1n^n
4.

'V-M\

(1:24);

(3:22);

inflection of

The formation

(1:26);

p-ia-'Sbp

(14:18).

nJBa
T
T

ti-

1.

n:n-n:n

|ljS;-DD''J''^

nStni<(20:l);
T

The

14);

(3:5);

D^JS-''JD

(1:2);

B^'{<-T|2f't< .(3:16);

(13:14).

nouns includes,
of the noun-stems

from the

root, or

from other

nouns;
2.

The

3.

The changes

addition of affixes for gender and number;

of

stem and termination in the formation of the

construct state;
4.

The

89.
1. o.

addition of pronominal suffixes and

Nouns

6tpD

affixes.

with One, Originally Short, Formative Votvel

k&tl];

yi^

Earth;

y\^^ Etening;

YJ,^ Stone;

f^^ Sworm.
t-

ibCD/o'-Wtl]; '^P^^Herb; "^ZlpBook; '^)^Help; ri^Eden.

60b

for

^iitl];

"lp3 Morning; ripj^ Darkness; lOi^

Saying.
2. a. iJ-^T

Seed; PiaJ Perpetuity;

mX Pdh;

-jm

^n2

,133

Youth;

nnH

Ufider.

e.

l^B

fruit; ^,"1^ I>esolation;

146

W'aate;

Weeping.

BY AN INDUCTIVE MJETHOD

89]

E^51 Honey; ^^J2 ^ H^U; ^^"2

3.

nS^D-

4. a.

"1^3

Stench;

Well.

Queen; ^\'^V2 Maiden; r\)b^ Rest.

r^'.\t:

mnO

6.

147

CoveH; nPlDK^ Glcdr^ss;

Soj/mj;

n"1D

nmO

Gift.

Food;
rh'D'^
T
T

c-

riDDn
T
T

These nouns, called

1.

(a, i

or

wrwcfoTO.

vowel was

first radical.

When

e; i to e;

ii

to

the root contains one or more

helping-

and the formative

then inserted under the second radical,

vowel was then changed: a to

2.

one short vowel

Se^olates, had, originally,

which, generally, stood with the

ii),

6.

weak

radicals,

certain

changes occur:
o.

In '^ or '7 laryngeal stems, a

is

the helping-vowel, instead

and, in '^ laryngeal o-class stems, the original formative a

of e;

stands unchanged.^
6.

In V'y stems, J

assimilated, represented in the following

is

consonant by D,ges-f6rte, and then rejected from this consonant

whenever
c.

it is

In

not followed by a vowel.

n'v

stems occur formations ending in 1__,

NoteFor
and
3.

so-called

^y,

and V'y

!)

and

Segolates, see 100.

109.

In a small number of nouns, the formative vowel stands under

the second radical, instead of under the

change; but

and

u,

first;

in these, a suffers

under the tone, become S and

6;

no

no helping-vowel

needed.

is

4.

Many

feminine nouns are formed from Segolate stems;

feminine ending being added to the primary form

PCDp); but an original

Note 1.The

ii

is

ihe

(^ppj 7pp

generally deflected to 6.

l^al Infinitive Const, (kiitiil

k'tul

and

kutl) is

with some sufiixes treated like a Segolate noun; while the Inf. Const,
of verbs

'

Cf.,

|"B and T'S

however,

on'; bread,

(H^D = H^D)
dht womb.

is

a Segolate formation.

BUBMBNTS OF HEBREW

148

Note 2.Segolates

in the plural

[90

form look

like

two-vowel nouns.

Whether this is a survival of an origmal two-vowel form in these

analogy is
nouns or is a later development of a one-vowel form by
not

clear.

Nouns with Two.

90.

Man; 0311 ^we; ^ID^ Word; "^2^^

V^^'> ^03 Cemd; pi Com; DDD

DIN

6|pr)/CT-ptal];

1. a.

^^2

Upright;

Vowels

Originally Short. Formative

Violance.

b.

ma^

(=saday) Field; HD"' BeavMfvl;

6lpp

for tatai;

2p;; Heel;

6bp /

e.

Weary;

r\'>^

8-

ffeorf;

I'"'!

nOna

Fat;

|ai< TraJy;

ffeai/;

"iDH

Defiderd.

y^a Rib;

Bitumm.

'^'Qf}

Ground;
r\D1^
TT~1

n^n^

Cofe; irhtDpl;

Spotted;

D^5< ^^

D't^lDp) SmoZZ;

tl01)iRi9Ji*e(rumes8;

tn^Dp];

(<if-

6ippM^tai]; 33^

IT^BDI;
TT|r

r^^'^^

Pregnant.

b'^ Bmmd; p'O^ Deep; Ip^

tatui];

D-)y Naked; |bp

d.

l^S

OZd man;

]p)

n^n

n^:ij; CAorw)<;

TTT

Possession.

second dass includes nouns which are formed by the employ-

rf two, origmally short, vowels, a

ment
nouns

are, for the

1. a. Original

most

few cases of

is

Original a

c.

Original a

i,

^ii

^i,

^ii,

strong stems, are rounded to

a.

3.

These

H'/

1,

to e; in a

&; in

deflected, after the loss of ^ or

/ stems, the

b.

part, adjectives or participles:

a, in

stems, the second a

a,

final

f^__

is

lacking.

in strong stems, are

are changed to 4

changed to &

5;

the latter

e.

(5),

however,

goes back to u before additions for gender and ntunber, a D,|eS-f6rte

being inserted in the final consonant.

d. Original

2.

The

a are changed to e

feminines of these stems are

this addition requiring

is

reduced to ^"wL

h.

made by

the addition of

a change of tone, Ute vowel of the

>

first radical


BT AN INDtJCnVB METHOD

91]

Nouns with One Short and One Long Formative Vowel

91.
1. a.

149

[b)lDp^

= b^pjoTmm: b)l^

Honor;

Q]^^

pl^

Peace;

^)1pHoly; 1^23

Great;

Lord;

llnO

Pure;

plHO

pD"' Right hand;

^im\

Sweet,

"TiDN

[!?''CDp for featti];

i-

JV^^

Prince;

Captive;

Anointed; J<^2J Prophet; H^pSl Overseer;

yi'^'^ LiUle.

[7IEOP /< Ptfil]; 11'ni< Cursed, and

"

Sfroni/;

7lDK^
T

Bereaved.

OT

^lOp

^al

an^ Cunning; ^^2^ Week;

Dia^

6E3p

<

all

2n3

/or kitai];

Work; rhVi God;

PTnitTM,;

pass,

parts.;

'^^'2^^

Grain;

3"^p

^]^^ Man; I^OH

Ass;

^mV,

^1p3

H^^

TTar;

Q^^n

^''eam;

"1^'' River.

Iptfl or

ib^^gp for

e-

Column; ^^DES

61DP /or b'tfll

Bme^i;
2.

n^na

Gra<

n^=in3

A third
of

an

(f.);

^ij-ffm;

31^^

nni:n

E^H^

i**<;

Z)m*; ^iJOa

yD2 Cherub; ^fDI Property.

n")n

Prophetess;

HJJ!''?;!

class includes

Girtzie;

C-wrsci

(f.);

r\b^mFl^^te; r\i)i2i< Truth.

nouns which are formed by the employment

vowel in the penult, and an originally long vowel

originally short

in the ultima.

^^3

kiitfil];

Strength;

TIl^S?

Fool;

"I^IH Svdne.

/<foi;

or

Tin;

'?"'"13

These nouns

are, for the

most

part, abstract sub-

stantives, neuter adjectives, or passive participles:

1.
S.,

a.

Original a

ii

the second to 6;

with

become k

the

first

this formation is to

5,

described in 90.

b.

Original a

passive,

6,

be distinguished from that

Here belongs the

become k

and a few with an active

^1;

vowel being rounded to

J^al Infinitive absolute.

here belong

signification.

many nouns with a

SLEUENTS OF HEBREW

150
Original a

c.

become a

fl

92

^; here belong all ^fal passive parti-

ciples.

Original

d.

t become a

duced, the second

rounded to
e.

or

'

the

6,

first

vowel being

re-

being sometimes retained, but more frequently

(S,)

6.

Original

Original

or

ii

become

'

i,

the

first

vowel being

re-

vowel being

re-

duced.
/.

H or u

become

11

'

H, the first

duced.

The feminines

2.

tion of

92.

of these stems are generally

the vowel of the

'6say)

Ch)^

Eternity;

Making; HE'D")

l^Olp/orfeata];

2.

(for

[^Iplp for Htsl]; '2y\V

Remark[^^CD'ip
E^lDIp

the addi-

for

''])i)^ Treasury;

b'^'lT]

(for

PHot; '^n^ Priest; ^^-^

^7(1 Walking,

Flyie, organ;

^'!^'\'^

1)^lp

kit^l];

r\i^^

Hfc'Dll) Creeping.

Enemy;

y^'ii^

Qoing forth; fl^D*^ Creeping;

3.

made by

becoming S*w&.

Nouns with One Long and One Short Formative Vowel

l!?ip1p /or tataij;

1-

radical

first

etc.

Fox.

Smoke;

"llfT'E'

NUe;

Nettle.

fourth class includes nouns with a naturally long vowel in the

penultima, and an originally short vowel in the ultima.

1.

a become 6

Original k

tives, all

(in

n__

n'7 ?al active

or

qf-fixes of
2.
all

f^)

of strong forms.

and

also the l^al act. part. fern,

The vowels do not change

before

gender and number.

Original a

become 6

g;

here belong a few substantives, and

strong ]^&1 participles; also those feminines of the form

3. Original

a become 6

Remark.
in

here belong, besides some substan-

,;

participles,

^There

H^Db-

are a few nouns with

an

originally long vowel

both penult and ultima; the former, however,

compensation for an omitted DlgeS-forte ( 30.

is

probably long

2. c).

in

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

93]

Nouns with

93.

6tSP

1-

r\^2\
T T Remark

V j

Thi^;

2-

[^(Dp/or

3.

[bejp /or ytta];

Bart;

n3C0
T-

bj5P

tattiil];

ITn^~

Burden;

Magnificmce.

T JV

C^oofe; E^""!!! Artificer;

TT

SAoo<, rod;

^20

tj^^p To

^J),") Jea/ot.

t|-

consecrate.

D^X ^w'n^; li;; fiZind; K^^n Deaf; ^^Jj

HpD Clear-sighted; 72n 8^a'; D^IN ^o%;

Perverse;

Blindness.

n*TIN
4. o.

[^tDp

^-

[^tSD
T )

= kittS.1 /rom tatt&l]; 12{<

c.

Sahbath;

HSC'

Drv land; nJ^CSH Sin;

T T "

ntL^2"'-

333
T-

Second RtuUcal RedupUcatad

the

h^^

f(^ Pttal];

151

tatt&l]; see

examples under

[^iGSp

= tm; nl3a

1.

R. above.

Husbandman;

1.

R. above.

ff^; "ll3E^ Drunkard; ^)Q)i Spar-

row.
5.

6^2Dp];

"inN

Grecrf;

yiptji Sirwi^;

p^a Righteous;

'n''Di<t

/"ettered.

"^DE^ Chadless;

mf]

6.

[bllSp];

TIS];

P^'Mo'-;

7.

[^lOp];

TlD^

Learner; D''10nJ Consolation.

Remark.Y^pCjf

AbomiruOion;

^!|^3

7<foZ;

Mereiful.

j!l?J}

Pt/Zar;

|?^]1S

Unclean Thing.

fifth class

includes nouns whose second radical

This doubling intensifies the root-idea, giving

it

is

reduplicated.

greater force or

greater firmness:
1.

Formations

like

^aft&l

are frequent, but with

no

special

significance.

Remark.
of occupation

have
2.

i,

It

is

a question whether nouns of this form indicative

have Slot k

(see 4.

a below); the corresponding Arabic

yet some of these have a in the Construct state.

Formations

Construct.

like

^^tt^l

are rare, except as Pi'Sl Infinitives

ELEMSNTS OF HEBREW

152
3.

Fonnations

formities
4. a.

and

like

The form

to

ka

like

are,

mostly, adjectives designating de-

1^ i

1 1

nouns indicative

are, properly,

R. above.

1.

11

mate a attenuated to
c.

1 1 e

95

faults, physical or moral.

Formations

occupation; but see

b.

11

is

^^ 1

of
/

the same as

^ a 1 1 i 1 with

the penulti-

i.

The form k i 1 1 ^ I

is

the same as k

1 1

^ith a rounded

6.

5.

Fonnations

like

like

ka11A1

like

k1

a.

1 1

adjectives expressing a pergonal

^.re

i 1

quality.
6.

Formations

are descriptive epithets of persons or

things.
7.

Formations

^1

1 1

^I'c,

for the

most

part, abstracts, and

are often used in the plural.

Remark.

^This is

a fovorite formation for terms designating or

and

characterizing idolatrous objects

Nouns with

94.
1.

"11*132^

CDIDt^i
2.

the Third Radical Reduplicated

^^0Traiiquil; ])^^_ Green:

Faint;

ideas.

Splendor;

HIW {=m^)

Cornely ;

^''bpH Dark;

bbtli

^J)IpJ<

Pasture;

Adulteries.

^n^np Pyil of

twisU;

"TjBDDn

Full of turns;

D"1P1NI ^<^

r^^^'Q^RtMle; bp^'n)^ Crooked.

dish; '^TT^'fy^ BlaoUsh;

sixth class, closely related to the fifth class, includes:

1.

Noun-formations with the third radical reduplicated, the

cation being, in general, the

2.

A few words

in

same as when the second radical

is

which the second and third radicals are

signifi-

doubled.
redupli-

cated, the signification being that of intensity, or repetition; in the

case of adjectives of color, there

95.
1.

^2^^ Finger;

2.

ina"'

Oil;

is

Nouns with
T^'^^^

CDID!?"'

Fist;

Pouch;

a diminutive force.

and

|ni^

cf.

Prefixed

Lasting;

^pj<|

the proper names

Violent.

D^i^^ nHD^-

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

96]

153

seventh class includes nouns formed by prefixing ^, or

1.

few nouns are formed by means of a prosthetic

Ji^;

this

Ji^

is

merely euphonic and has no significance.

Nouns with a

2.

prefixed

occur rarely as appellatives; but fre-

quently as proper names, where however they are really verbal forms.

Nouns with

96.
1.

HD^DD iS^mff'^; n^D5<D

6!DpD/or^CDpa];bDi^Dfoorf,-

|np (=|n:p)

Knife;

&/<;

Prefixed

NalD(=viD)^a:*<; nv^^D

(=^^"^0) Appearance.
2.

b^pp]; ]3pD

for

6:jpp

JDBE^P Judgment;
(=''JpP)
3.

[bapP

Dwellmg-place;

HDH^P

War;

l^ip

Desert;

n^p^'P Waich; ^^^^^

Property.

for

^ppp]; p3"iP

StaU;

nnDD

:^]p

iiTej/;

FZesA-

iSware.
4.

[^DpP

/or

^EJpp];

n?]P

5.

6bpp /or

bi^pp];

nb'^m Fvd.

6.

6lE5pp,
"^iDtD

biDpP
iSonj^;

for

b^pp]; Itonp

6"'ppp, ^'':pp]; ^'''l^P

8-

[^IDpp]; E^'IS^P

^irfiff;

is

1^E?PP

GarTTimt; b^)J^'Q Bolt;

eighth class includes nouns formed

element which

^a***;

nlp^D Booty;

7^52^30 Stumbling-block.

7.

An

Altar.

by

Raining.

DD^^D

prefixing

Gfranoiy.

p, the same

used in the formation of participles.

So

concerns the vowels employed the following combinations

far as

may be

noted:
1.

and

S,

^__

the latter of which

occur.

In

TQ

is

rounded from

stems, J

is

a.

assimilated;

Feminines in
in

y^

stems,

aw

ELEUXNTS OF HEBREW

154

becomes 6; in

H'?

97

fonns, the second a becomes i (probably a con-

traction of ay).
2. i

an

h,

the former of which

original a; the usual

3.

the latter of which

e,

attenuated, the latter rounded from

is

vowel changes take place in weak stems.

lowered from

is

the usual vowel

i;

changes take place in weak stems.

the of which the attenuation of a

the 5 of which lowered from an original
&
of which 6 rounded from while

4.

5.

6.

is

6,

7.

1,

8.

&,

used only in the formation of

is

attenuated

bi-literal roots, see 100.

The Sign0cation of Nouns with

Destroyer;

n^niS^D

Y^"1V0 ^* ""^

nDDD
bj^D

Hif'fl participles (m.).

not used to any great extent.

97.

2.

k,

u.

a.

For ^-formations from

1.

(c/. 3.).

is

5,

6, i

from

is

e,

7''3E^D

Prefixed

poem (=

didactic

^SQ Whd

inspires terror;

inttruetor)

falls off,

chaff;

Covering.

Food;

That which

nlp^p

Booty;

jno

Gift;

small;

pH^ID

3"Aa<

which

is

3.

rh^^P Knife; nplDD Key; ID^p

4-

j3t^

Dwelling-place;

5-

nE33D

Smiting;

Pialm;

l^ap

is remote.

Goad.

HSTD

"IS'ID Desert;

HUD Sickness;

n^DTD

Altar.

"lE^^D Straightness ; r]DT]bD

War.

The

letter

is

from "^Q (who) or

HQ

(what),

and

is

used in the

formation of nouns:
1.

in

To

denote the subject of an action;

Pi("6l, ffif "il

2.

To

cf. its

and Hi^a'el

denote the

its

use denoting agency

participles.

object of

an

action, or the subject of a quality;

use in Pu'al and Hof '3.1 participles.

The

instrument

4.

The

place (or tivw) in

5.

The actum

3.

cf.

by which an

action

is

performed.

which an action

or quality which

is

is

performed.

contained in the root.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

99]

Nouns Formed

98.
1.

6c:pn

for

oann

^ipj^ni;

Reproof; |D^ri Sotith;

3.

ibppn

ni^in

nnpln

Tenant;

Thanks; n"l1ri -^ow.

bppni; yaa^n

/o'-

by Prefixing f^
(?);

HTln

155

cAciered cbth;

HDinn

iJcep

sfeep.

4-

6"'ppn];

T^b:^

5.

[^IDpni;

Ci^^nn

Tjnpn

Disdple;

^^a^;

DiniH

Diseases;

n^^pn

Com^Z^e-

Comolatian;

n'2i6pi

Hyitt'in Deliverance;

n^lJ^DH

Drought; nlDVJ;?^ ^^ff^*-

Remark.

^D^*^^

I^^^P sleep;

Gfory.

A
fix is

ninth class of nouns includes those with the prefix

the same as that used in the Impf. 3 fern.

sense,

and

is

employed

assTuned

by nouns

instances, the feminine

1-

^D"!?

2-

weak

ending

("]

bXl^

CD'^n

j1'*ini< Lat;

b.

p^Jp Gain;

(?)

Table;

also, in

the majority of

by means of Affixes

^^^-J Cup

of a flower;

bOID

scribe.

jlE^N*! First;

^vh^

have

Iron;

Sacred

which

stems.

J^ prefixed

Nouns Formed

Garden;

Ankle;

but rarely

cases cited above exhibit the various forms

Nouns with

99.

This pre-

J^.

used in a neuter

of this class, as well as the vowel changes

take place in formations from

Remark.

is

in the formation of abstract nouns,

The

of concrete nouns.

It

Vp^^

l^lp

Poor; l^i^^ Most

Offering;

'n'2^

high.

Destruction.

ELEUENl^ OF HEBItEW

156

"

|1nS3

|1"TI^ Blindness;

)'r)^'3 Success;

Interpretation;

llinS

p'13] Memorial; |l2ai? Pain;

Confidence;

100

pJ^J)

Majesty.

tenth class of nouns includes those with

1.

Nouns formed by

no

2.

and may

a.

are few, and have

a.

J are numerous, including

Adjectives formed either from a noim-stem or from a root.

b.

Abstract substantives ending in In.

c.

Abstract substantives ending in on, rounded from tn.

3'! Great;

Qt<!

Nouns from

7|"1 Tender; 7"^

Bride;

HiJD

Mother; ^p) Mound;

1SJ|?

titvde;

Roots

Weak; "^Q

Bitter;

^^

Heart;

H ?D Word;

Q^QS

|^

("15^3

Qf^ Complete;
Hands.

Tooth;

^^

Swamp;

Shadow;

,";^3 Spcnl;
T

7^

CAa/;

^W;

pH

Statute;

l?^al

act. ptcp. of
V'i;

^1n rwm; 11^

Stranger; "^J

Lamp; HJ?

Ox;

'y^ Bear; 3*1

Qy'^ All

Integrity ; f'\i^^ Statute;

r\DV\

Dp; Dy. p;

^^

Bi-ldteral

^** mother.

J!) Completeness;

yb

of

Unleavened bread;

Measurement;
r\1t2
T

-Sfui-

of them.

and V'y verbs,

p)^ Leg.

i>eorf; );"^ Noise.

Dn;

Dip;

nJ^3

Understanding; jl^ Judgment; 3^'^ Sn/e; ^^3, H^^^

J02/;

2.

^^^ J

foreign influence.

Nouns formed by the addition

n?^

6-

7, J2

they should perhaps be regarded as quadri-

some

reflect

100.
1.

7 and

the addition of

special significance;

literals

affixes,

pp

^a^3 Wheel;
0/ Aead;

"Tlil;

niD;

Inf. Const, of

nrp ^^?e.
nnnH Frightful;

)y verbs.

Sort;

nbh^3

Skull;

13-13

p)2p2

Ewtj,; "Ip-jp Croam

Flask;

^p'pp

WoHhless;

BT AN INDUCnVB METHOD

100]

3. a.

^pD Circle; j;'nO Evil;

Tjpp Cover;
Desolation;

lyg

Shield;

"lai? Distress;

^W;

HpjiP

H^DD

riDTD Purpose;

157

Highway;

nSI?P

HJlJip Covering;

nnHD

^DO

2'error;

Divan; ("ISDD CoD&ring; HSCi^D ^<^e.

6.

U)1D Height; U)0^ P^^!

"llt^D Luminary;

IIJlD Terror;

^"21^ Entrance; ViM'ORest; 0):it2 FUght; 7]'!]^^ Lamp-

HIlJD

stand;

nana
T

rh]^^

Terror;

Rimmm^;

ny^ria Weeping ;

p^iaD PUlar;

nnUD

^ycwtas^;

nnitr^D
T

Dancing;

iJe**,-

Q^p^ Raising; H^^^D Strife ; ,-^^0

Province.
c-

3D1D

^-

Diip

4. a.

Surrounding (?);

Coverer (?);

TjDID

1D1D Removed.

Soundness; "71*10 Weakness.

n?nn
T*:

nVnn
T-:

-Pmwe;

n^DH
t*:

Beginning; r\17]T\ Pavor;

T:

Prayer.
6-

n^^DH
T

nniDH
T

l>eo<A;

Qpn

Established;

])D1 nJiDJ

7-

Dlp^ Being; 2^'T'

8.

D^D

9*

DDH

Xod(fer;

HDH

Melting;

^DH

To

iltpp^

-;

caruse to tmrn.

Desciasted.

PorcA; Dh"'V

i^^oAied;

DIV '^a**''-

Contempt.

head are treated those nouns which are formed upon

the foundation of

two

radicals

and have not progressed to complete

by actually writing one

izing the resultant

is

Adversary.

d':)!)^^

V JV

this

T -:

To raise;

6-

tri-literality

T T -:

shine;

Under

HDlin Offering; nJ^DH Idleness;

Exchange;
n^lOn
nDIDPl ^m;
T

Understanding;

form as a

of those radicals twice

tri-literal

noun,

e. g.

and vocal-

7^7^D.

a relatively wide range of forma in bi-literal nouns.

There

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

158

Monosyllabic nouns of various forms:

1.

Those with one

a.

e,

of the original short-vowels as the primary

The vowels i and

form.
to

100

6 and

St

respectively.

change under the tone

and occasionally

a,

When

added, the second radical

ii,

affixes are

These

takes DigeS-f orte and the stem-vowel remains short.

from so-called ^"^

b.

all

roots.

Those with an unchangeable vowel, which of course

by the addition

affected

come

but a regularly

of affixes;

These

except in the 5!al act. ptcp.

all

is

un-

rounded to

is

6,

come from Middle-Vowel

roots.
2.

Nouns made by

3.

Nouns with the

prefix

Q.

Those which

in the

primary form have the prefix

a.

reduplication of the bi-literal stem.

These assume several forms:

short stem-vowel.

These

becoming m&kil;

makil becoming mikel;

m^kol;

(2)

when

with a

regularly change both vowels, makal

(1)

affixes are

ma

and makiil becoming

added, the second radical of the stem

receives DSgeS-forte, the original stem-vowel remains imehanged, and

the a of the preformative

syl. is

reduced to a'wk (-)

ing a as the original stem-vowel generally retain

but the preformative syllable has

e,

absolute singular form, but

This formation

added.

comes

e,

c.

is

characteristic of

(2)

With
by

without change,

prefix

the stem-vowel

Middle-Vowel

either 6

i.

roots.

reduced to S'wS, whenever

The stem-vowel may be

either

those hav-

ma

The preformative a becomes k

is

(1)

{)),

<i

()),

or

and a
in the

affixes are

roots.
i

("'__).

0_.), the preformative vowel

be-

assimilation to the stem-vowel, or after the analogy

This

of the Hif'il perfect.

and ^"^

^"^

Those which in the primary form have the

naturally long stem-vowel.

(3)

probably from an original

This formation occurs only in the so-called

b.

it

is

the form of the Hif'il ptcp. of

V'i?

verbs.

Those having the prefix md, with the stem-vowel

rounded to

&.

This

is

a,

the form of the Hof'al participle of

which

is

bi-literal

verbs.
d.
4.

few exceptional forms.

Noims with the

ending and

fall

into

prefix

two

p.

classes:

These nearly

all

have the feminine

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

102]

a.

Those having

The preformative vowel

*wa upon the addition of the feminine

Those having

ft

Nouns with the

prefix

Nouns with the

and

Ntf'al participle
prefix regularly

when not

A
A

is

Infini-

and are prac-

Nif'al of bi-literal verbs

These are practically confined to the

prefix na.

which the a of the

Infin. of bi-literal verbs, in

rounded to h before the tone and

is

reduced to S*w&

pretonic.

few nouns are made with the prefix y

few bi-Uteral nouns with

There

the affix iim.

(6)

affix.

nouns.

tically all verbal

8.

affix.

These are few, aside from the

H-

and

tives of the Hif'Il, Hof'al

7.

in the

reduced to

as stem-vowel, without a following D&ges-

upon the addition of the feminine

6.

is

but with the same reduction of the preformative a to *w&

forte,

5.

by D&ggS-farte

as stem-vowel followed

second radical of the stem.

6.

159

is

room

(^).

affixes occur, viz. (a)

for

doubt as to the

the affix am;

origin of these

nouns.
9.

few isolated formations appear.

Nouns Having Four or

101.
1-

'2'lp^ Scorjnon; '^2]^ Treasurer ; ^J^'lVi Sickle ; ^^^T] Frott;

K'^P^n
2-

Five Radicals

jDa^lSt Purple;

1.

E'Ji^D Conctibine;

Piint;

Nouns with

1^^^^ A

hVd^

Bat.

hind of cloth; ryC\t}T\^ Mule.

four radicals are comparatively few; they have no

special classification or signification.

2.

Nouns with

five or

most part, of foreign

more

102.
1-

HDIND

2-

pny~^37D

Anything;

Kiv^

radicals are

still

fewer, and, for the

origin.

Compound Nouns

Sv'^S

Worthlessness ;

of righteousness;

^^DH^^

p^^^^'^ God

Formerly.
hears.

1.

Compound

words, as

2.

Compound

words, as proper names, are very numerous.

common

nouns, are few and doubtful.

EI^MENTS OF HEBREW

160

PorUr

"IJJE'

104

Nouns Formed from Other Nouns

103.
1.

{cf.

Gate);

'-\^J^

U'iD

Vine-dresser

{cf.

Vine-

D"13

yard).
2.

r^D

Place of the fountain

{cf.

j"i^

Fountain);

TSy^TVO

Pi<^e of

feet {cf.^y'^ Foot).

3.

|1"in{<! Last

{cf.

serpent

Coiled,

in""!^

ini(t After); lYy\^ Blindness

{of.

n"'')^

Wreath);

{cf. "yj)}

Blind).

IPipTll Brazen

{cf.

Bronze).
riE^nj
V
J

E'l^E^ TAird

4. a.

(c/.

^^cO;

't^''pn -Ft/^A; etc.

l^i^lD-a^oofcife; '^tp'-]^Aram(Ban; 1^\[f'^^Gershonite;

6.

^12^

ITeferew.

Foreigner;
^JlDii Northerner; I'^^J
T
*

5.

n^I2^X"1 Beginning;

HID^D

Kingdom;

^T^S
T

HliD/X

Nouns formed from other nouns, and not

directly

Nouns with the form

from the

root,

are:

of the ]^al active participle, indicating

'

agency.
2.

Widowhood.

The most common formations

are termed denominatives.

1.

Villager.

Nouns with the

prefix

Q, indicating the

ylojee

where a thing

is

found.
3. Adjectives

and nouns formed by the

affix 7^

4. Adjectives

formed by the

these are,

5.

affix t

o.

Ordinals formed from cardinals;

6.

Gentilics

and patronymics; and a few

Nouns formed by the

affixes

"^

or

>

(seldom

V().

others.

and HI. designating abstract

ideas.

104.

From
1.

88-103.

Directly
a.

from

By means
(1)

The Formation of Noun-Stems

it

has been seen that noun-stems are formed,

the root:

of vowels given to the root;

as in the case of

nouns with one, originally short, vowel (89,

100.);

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

105]

161

(2)

nouns with one originally long vowel (

(3)

nouns with two

(4)

nouns with one

(originally) short

vowels ( 90.);

short

(originally)

100.);

and one long vowel

(91.);
(5)

nouns with one long and one

(originally)

short vowel

(92.);
6.

By

a redupUcation of one or more of the consonants of the

root; as in the case of

(1)

nouns with the second radical doubled (

(2)

nouns with the

93.);

second and third radicals

third, or the

doubled ( 94.);

c.

(3)

nouns with the entire root doubled (

By

prefixing vowels

(1)

nouns with

J<,

(2)

nouns with

(3)

nouns with

fl prefixed

100.);

and consonants to the

as in the

root;

case of

d.

2.

(98,

100.);

By affixing vowels and consonants to the root;

as in the case of

D or J affixed, with a vowel (99,

(1)

nouns with

(2)

nouns with four or

(3)

nouns compounded of two distinct words (

From

prefixed ( 95, 100.);

prefixed ( 96, 97, 100.);

other

7,

102.).

h^'pW

103.).

The Formation of Cases

lOS.
in

100.);

five radicals ( 101.);

nouns (and called denominatives), by the various

means indicated above (

1-

or

(4:18);

!|DK^" in

hm^^'; UB

in

^WJS

")SV 1^2';

iP^D

(32:32).

Remark.-y-5-1n"!ri

2. a.

njba
T J

(13:14);

(1:24);

nj?2 1J3^

(13:14); DJiJin ni{"iN (20:1);

nD""
:jT
VwV "
T.,T

rhmn
T

v:

(18:6).
6-

Q'Dl"'';

>lSam.l:20
<

Ex. 13:21.

D"^n

(29:15);

Num.

Q-lE^b^"

24:3, 15.

(31:2) /or

Num.23:18.

Si[lS.m.

Ps.ll4:8.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

162

Very
1.

first

slight evidence of case-endings is

The only

serious

of! ^DIS^

'"'O''"'

found

in

name

106

Hebrew:

possible case of a nominative ending

is

the A in the

as in the examples cited above,

part of a few proper names;

l)J^Q

of; !)J2)

doubt since the words to which

= foce

This

of.

open

is

to

attached do not function

<i is

as nominatives in these cases.

Remark.
and

origin
2.

The

An old ending

significance are

accusative

(1) is

appears in a few forms, but

its

He

directive (X\

which

used to denote direction or motion; but

often used in a weaker sense to designate the place

(2) is

where,

and

many

(3) in
h.

= 6,

had the ending a and appears only

In the so-called

o.

unknown.

cases seems to be entirely without force.

In the syllables

&m and 6m

(the latter

by the rounding

of &),

which are found in certain adverbs.

3.

No

ending appears in our texts.

genitive

106.
1.

Affixes for Gender

and Number

"11K (1:3); 21C0 (1:4); Dl^ (1:5); -\'^2 (1:5); ^^p^^

2. a.

innpN

(4:23); ^'p\VJ^ (2:24);

^nmO

(4:5).

m^n (i:24); '^nnj:

nin irv^n)
'"
(1:26); HDETJ h^^l) (2:7).'
(mi)
T
T
(i:25)';

i-

n"'tS''n

(1:1);

niDT

(1:6).

(3i:39);

riiT

nDmO

(1:26);

(1:2);

TW1T\

(1:21).

npBnnp
(2:9);

c.

r\^y>
TT

HE^^
T
3.

Tim

4.

fl.

24);

nnp.

nbl^Pp

(1:16);

Vrh

(4:2);

T\T}.

HDli^
TT-:

(2:6);

(4:11).

(1:9);

r\^r\'2
T-: (1:24);

H^H
T-

(1:24);

(3:4).

(1:14);

rr\Ti

(3=7);

nn^ln

(2=4).

D^ib(l:l); D^PM1:22); D^pMl:14); D^l^lD

Wli (1:14).

(1:14);

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

107]

'tis (1:2);

b.

5.

^;;-l';

^^^

(3:5);

DlJtSf, whence 1JE? (1:16);

The Hebrew has two genders,

numbers,

singular, dual and

1.

The masculine

2.

The

^J2

(4:23);

QIJIU

163

(3:6), but

^^2^

(6:4);

l^lW

(6:4).

(3:7).

masculine and feminine;

and three

plural.

singular has no particular indication.

sign of the feminine singular

is

H-^- This feminine sign

has a threefold treatment:

o. It is

retained, with such change of its vowel as

whenever the noun of which

sary,

with what follows; as

(1)

inflection of

c.

but

is

from
3.

4.

a part

in close connection

is

(the feminine-sign, f^) stands

);

gives

many
way

(with laryngeals

nouns, participles and

to n> which then

)>

in the formation

infinitives.

ceases to be pronounced,

retained orthographically as a mere symbol of final i rounded

This form

a.

The feminine

which

it is

be neces-

the end of a noun in the Construct state ( 107.).

It appears as

b.

it

before a pronominal suffix ( 108

(2) at

and

when

may

more usual indication of

is the

plural

is

indicated

the

feminine gender.

by the ending p^

(66 for id),

unchangeable.

is

The masculine
a.

W_.

b.

^_^

Note.

plural

is

by the

indicated

endings,

(im) in the Absolute state ( 107.).

(e) in

the Construct state ( 107.).

Many

masculine nouns have plurals in 6^, and

many

feminine nouns have plurals in im.

5.

The

used chiefly of objects which go in pairs,

dual,

is

indicated

by the endings,
a.

Q^

b.

(ayim) in the Absolute state.

(^)

in the Construct state.

107.
1-

U^rh^

(1:1);

The Absolute and Construct States

D^D12^n
J- T -

(1:1);

V^^H
I

(i:i);

VJT T

"llHH
T

(1:3);

yipn(l:6).
2-

Dinn ^JS

{1:2) faces-of abyss;

of God; D^pCi'n i^^p"l3

W^W

XVn

(1:2) (the) spirii-

{1:14:) in-{t]ie)-expanse-of the heavens.

ELBMBNTS OF HEBREW

164

Of two nouns
the genitive,
in

e. g.,

The

first.

The same relation is indicated

dominus dominorum.

in close connection with

two words

effort thus to unite the

as one phrase results invariably in

in pronunciation

shortening of the

a.

first

word,

because the tone hastens on to the second, but involves also a

some old endings which hold

tention of
1.

tive or
2.

noun which
pronoun

3.

not thus dependent upon a following substan-

is

said to be in the Abaoltde

state.

thus dependent on a following substantive or

is

It

is

the first of two nouns, therefore, and not the second,

suffers change.

(4:2),

nj;'*!

rh)3;
4.

re-

their place in the phrase.

said to be in the Construct state.

is

Note.

which

is

noun which

pronoun

107

closely related, the second, in Latin or Greek, is in

Hebrew by pronouncing the second noun

the

^n

cf.

mpP (1:10),

r\)t\;

(42:15),

^^y

in';

cf.

cf.

nipO;

r\h)3, (3:7), c/.

^^ia.=

cf.

r|in (1:25) instead of HTI; T\yi (1:26) instead of r\T^.

T T T
:

5.

inin

6.

1JS

(1:24);

(1:2),

b^m

^H?::

(31:39);

D^:S;

c/.

""P^

1J3;

(3:17),

':2^"(l:16), c/.'diJ^;

Remark.^&.,

l-^B (1:11),

5^2^'; Ahs., '^y^

cf.

5 (1:29);

(32: 12), Comi.,

(14:17),C(w.,r|^P (14:1); ^6s.,

Ahi.,

'\)}^

So far as concerns endings or

Final

H^^

(*

Josh. 15

8.

6Deut. 33:16.
2 Kgs. 5:5.

(4:11),

cf.

c/.D^r^.

Ahs.,^'2,)i,^ Const.,

^'^^ (22:12); Vhs., "n^D

nSD,'

-|Bp

(5:1);

the Construct state

differs

<7ojwrt.,

affixes,

in the following particulars:

e.,

ay) gives place to

Note.Compare with
Imperfect ends in
I

"'P'^

(37:2), Const., ^^jy'^

from the Absolute

3.

D^p\

"'r;;(3:7),

Con**.,-)-]

"IJ3 (49:11);

\y^)jp*;

H-^
2

(),

Num. 21
Zech. 11

Ml Sam.

(*'

this the fact that in

but the Imperative in

:

20.
17.

13.

'

Num. 23 18
Num. 1 3.
:

e.,

H"^

ay).

verbs, the

(^)-

114 8
Ps
>Dsat4:19.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

108]

4.

The

affix f^

,,

preserved

by

with what follows, appears instead of the later

close connection
5.

form of the feminine

original

165

The endings 6

{])

and

0_.) appear occasionally

its
.

in Construct

forms, serving as connecting vowels binding the Construct to its genitive.

6.

The

affix ''__

dual endings Q''

(=ay) appears instead

and Ql

Remark

1.

of the ordinary plural

and

.J-

^The feminine plural

affix

66

is

the same in Absolute

and Construct.

Remark
well as final

(strong

2.
it

^Fmal vowels,

and laryngeal) do not

Remark

other than those just mentioned, as

when followed by

3.

^The

understanding that

suffer

J^,

and Segolates

change in the Construct

Construct form

it is really

in the singular

may

state.

best be explained

a constituent element of a phrase

which tends somewhat toward becoming a compound word.

Construct

itself,

therefore has

passed on to the next word.

by

The

no primary tone, the tone having

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

166

a-

1-

irab

^"^0^; lT

(1:11) /or

108

for)r\-T; U^Jf

(3:22)

(4:4).

ni^D^?
T

/or

(1 : 24)

n-rc^;
T

jT

nni

^5:^^^? (3:6) /or n-jy-'N;

jT
T

:-

(3:15).

p^lp^

D-^1p'; D-Vn^!?'; D"3"]^.'; O'Dl^^

6-

Tj^na

(3:10);

?|yp

in-lE^

Tj-J-^n

(23:9);

DD^SJ?

Tj^^] (3:15);

(3:14);

pS^?-'

l^-p^a

Tj-E^I^J (3:16);

(3:16);

(3:5).

(1:26).

VDK

Vni<
T

(4:23);

,TS
T

(4:8);

(4:11).

J'

n"l3n
T

&<

^n^3n

1.

r..

(4:23);

(4:7).

InplB^'n

The

(4:9);

J*

in"1D^

hut

n*lDi<
T

2.

WHt^

(2:24);

relation existing

between a noun and

The form

really the Construct relation.

its

pronominal

suffix is

of the noun, however,

not

is

always identical with that of the Construct, but varies with the

In

position of the tone.

by the

as affected
1.

suffix,

this section only the endings of the noun,

are treated.

Masculine nouns in the singular take,

a.

connecting vowel a

(1) in

the form of

before IH. H)

k,

*iid

the suffixes of

the 3d person;
(2) in

b.

the form of -r, before

connecting vowel

(1) in

Tl,

03,

|p.

the form of e before

IH

(in

n"7

stems and a few

poetical forms), T], ^J(2) in

the form of

ni^
T

Remark
to

Num

before

HSS
V

Certain

all suffixes

in the

words 3i<
T

father,

f^at^h.

changes take place,

viz., ^j^

to

),

the final vowel of the latter form having been dropped.

Remark
1

1.

brother,

14

>Buthl:0.

1.

2.

^Before T|,

QD, |3 a

Deut. 4 38.
3Ex.36:26.
>

is

>

deflected to e in pause.

1 Kgg.

2:4.

Jer.

16

S.

BT AN INDUCnVB METHOD

S 168]

2.

167

Feminine nouns in the singular preserve before

form of the feminine

earlier

standing in an open syllable

Note.

^The feminine

affix,
is

which

is

f^

when

rounded.

affix is

followed by the same connecting

vowels as those which occur with masculine nouns (see above,

3. a.

lDai;(2:23); 1D-T1>; "n-'D'Tn^

DiTJE^

h.

(2:25);

the

suflBxes

but the

Qp^rj;?

(3:5);

1. a, 6).

Tl^DJ^-^

Tl-'JE)';

jn^^H'

Dn^Db'

(4:4);

(1:21).
c.

Tj-l^n (3:14);

d.

VDK
T"

rni?ba

4.

^3^^';
tt: VJS3
tt

(2:7);

mhi

(2:21);

(31:26);

TjtJB (4:6);

?|1S5i? (3:19);

U^nlJ^

(4:5);

VDJ3.'
tt:

^rim'-, u^ninx*"; Tilja

(6:9);

(34:9);

^^nJ3";

Remark.-DntoN'^ and QntnlDK";

DriniK"; DOl"llT
3.

The masculine

in the Construct,

form of

in the

rV^Q}

'?)"'nJ3 (19:12).

UnW

/ also

(25:16);

(17:7).

plural has before all suffixes the ending ay, which,

appears in the form of

this

But

S.

certain modifications

ending take place, due to the character of the

following consonants:
o.

The form ay
(1) in

the

1 c. sg.

by the
(2) in

the 2

unchanged

^^ the ^ of the suffix having been absorbed

final ^ of

the ending.

f . sg. ?!"'__, TJ

The form ay

6.

(^__) appears

("i

) is

being joined by the helping-vowel

contracted to 6

(1

before

all

plural

suffixes.
c.

The form ay C^.^

d.

The

original

is

form ay

contracted to

0^

(^n changed according to 44. 4.

loses ^
c.

to)

),

(i)

before ?] and H-

and rounds a
the

to & before

being generally re-

tained orthographically.

58

>

Isa.

'

With -^ written

2.

'Deut. 10:13.
Eek. 16

: Jer. 2
> 1 Sam. 25
33.
defectively, instead of '-=-.

20,

sDeut. 32:11.
" Ex. 4:5.

'Ex. 7:3.
Chron. 4

"1

35.

38,

<

Jer.

34.

Bam.

P. 74
Ps. 74

1
:

9.
4.

18.

ELEMENTS OP HEBREW

168

4.

the

The feminine

plural with suffixes has (1) n1 ^^^ usual affix of

(2)

the masculine plural ending

manner

just described (see above, 3.

fern, plur.,

fied in the

I109

1_^ which is modia-d) and then (3)

;

the same suffixes as were used with the masc. plur.

Remark.

nV

Very

nb^'
-T

hut r\Db\if';

T":

b)ir

but

)t

nbnr

^3^"

6m<

n^i^'; ipT"

6w<

^jpr*;

6<

nil'"; IP!"

6<

DpD5^;

Remark 1.TIDD)''
Remark 2.-nD'13
(49:25)' (3)

Remark 3. >n3''

"

"
"

"
"

"

"

Gen. 15 16.
1 Chron. 28 9.
Ex. 25 20.
Gen. 2 21.
Gen 18 14.
1 Kgs. 7 8.
2 Kgs. 21 5.
Gen. 18 4.
Gen. 2 11.
Gen. 38 28.
Deut. 28 28.
Gen. 20 6.
Gen. 47 22.
Deut. 16 18.
:

Ti"

|pr'

an*^

Ipr';

nan"

d^d^s-""

but

n^lDE'-"
tt;

nnan.^

but

nnan.^^

&<

^?^'

D^^^jpr'''

3nr'

ninnb^
t:

but nni;'*

&< D^-*"

DT''

Dpnt'^.^

bid

""'^ Q?"]?'?"
^??5r'''
from'-rp^; (1) Hto'^S", (2)'nto"l2

^"1^?"''

(12:2)

n5"12

Dent. 25 15.
Gen. 1 16.
" Gen. 1 16.
" Gen. 2 23.
" Gen. 24 33.
" Josh. 21 12.
^ Gen. 24 52.
" Gen. 20 18.
" Gen. 2 12.
Gen. 41 35.
* Deut. 10
16.
" Gen. 40 19.
"Ps. 119: 162.

^***

(28:4).

but D^jrib'';

6<

6m< ^^88;

"IK'S"

but

^^3";
"IDE'"
"t:
tt

v^pv; lan"

Ds!?"

bid

but

j;ipn^'5 5j j;"ip"|'^

D^^n^^ n:3'

]DV'

Dnn.?n=;

&<

nni";

but

Nouns

nh^?a'; nnb^
-"

but

12^/'

>

and

but

-13^"

-inT"

3.

ni^D'
T

Tjjm";
^t2''
rr
|:i:

|1nil" but

3.

attached directly to

is

Stent- Changes in the Inflection of

109.
1.

frequently the suffix

done probably in order to obtain a shorter form.

this is

Na'D'"

&< ""J^ab"; ^DE'"''' but

Gen. 1 16.
Gen. 15 12.
"Lev. 11:42.
Num. 18 31.
' Gen. 19
4.
" Gen. 24 30.
" D^ut. 29 9.
n Gen. 19 4.
"s Gen. 1
6.
" Gen. 37 22.
" Gen. 2 21.

'

Ps. 21
" Gen. 4

7.

14.

Deut. 28 28.
Gen. 1 21.
" Gen. 3 14.

'

Jon. 1

Isa.

3.

24 23.
" Gen. SO 7.
a Nah. 2 8.
" Gen. 24 2.
*> Gen. 1
20.
" Gen. 9 6.
Gen. 17 13.
" Gen. 14 18.
Gen. 18 25.
:


BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

109]

The noun-stem,

it

if

168

contains two changeable vowels (7. 4),

is

subject to change,
(1)

when terminations

(2)

when

(3)

when pronominal

the

and number are added;

of gender

noun stands

in the Constnict relation with a fol-

lowing word;
suffixes are

The changes which take place

1.

With

D^__,

affixes for

D^.-;=->

added.

are due to the shifting of the tone:

gender and number {Absolute),

and with the

light ( 51.

1.

viz.,

^\

a) suffixes, the tone is shifted

one place; in which case,

An

o.
is

original a or

i,

which had become

S,

or e^ before the tone

reduced to S'wi;

An

h.

ultimate taae-hng

or e

is

retained, since it stands

now

directly before the tone.

2.

With

affixes for

Jl^ (also the sing.

gender and number in the Construct,

fem.

H J>

and with the grave

viz., ^

when

suffixes

at-

tached to plural nouns, the tone is shifted two places; in which case,

The penultimate vowel being now

a.

remains short, but a

syllable
b.

3.

is

in a closed

often attenuated to

The ultimate vowel reduces

to Sw^.

In the case of the Construct singular of masculine nouns and

when attached

with the grave suffixes

(DP> \^)
the tone is shifted
a.

to singular nouns,

one place; in which case,

The penultimate vowel

is

reduced to S'wi.

6. An ultimate tone-long (originally short)

or e
Remark 1. While an original a is rounded to
i,

Remark
and

2.

( 92.), in

affixes

whose

participles

?],

Q^,
1.

and nouns

of like formation

vowel becomes S'wa before

all

|3)> furnish an important exception to the

6 above.

The

the fact that the participial forms

difference in treatment

except in u-class SegQlates,

is

due to

have an unchangeable vowel

the penult.
o,

it

feminine nouns.

inflection the final

principle stated in

Tbe vowel

TfM active

3.

(except

Q3

way to a.

before Tl

^The principles here given apply also to the forma-

inflection of

Remark

gives

remains short before

tion

unaccented

i;

is

generally unchangeable.

in

HEBBEW

KLEIIBNTS OF

170
4- a-

ribn

(5:1);
*

Tj^D

(1*:17) ab-;

109

(14:1) Cmst.;

-|Dp*

IDD

*;

nyi*

lD^

'>3bD*; nj?-]l(3:15);

(1:27);

(1=26);

!|ipby

nBD*;

71"''-'''-'

fl^js^';

nlD^D'; Dn^""

(33 :i);

Dnp3.

c.

D-'D^D

d.

(Tp^P'; "'PV^(2:23); 1-]^M30:26); Tin^y"; ^\l2^1j?"

'D^P

f.

(14:9);

Dpn"jJ";

(17:16);

6m<

D^J"lp"

D^Jnp"; D^JriD"; Dnnif

5. a. "Tjin". r^)V\

Vnio

OyPll^''

"E^lp":

HSln

(1:2),

(27:2),

rnio";

(43:16).

niD", HlD

(41:48);

np (i7:i2),

n^3

(25:11).

(12: is), ^n""?

(15:2),1n^3 (12:17).
6.

21

(24:25),

niK'

nnfc' (2:5) 6<

QIJB

we),

7DD
U"
V

7Dp> /Dp
'

struct singular of
6.

form (
c.

''

is

(6:13), 6m<

IJS

(47:22),

(1:2),

lD

(3:20),

Q^^n"*,

nis
DiTJB

nliE''*, nfe'";

in the absolute, viz.,

/'owi 7 Dp, remains

'

(rf

(9:23).

^J^p from ^JDp,

unchanged

Con-

in the

words with strong consonants or laryngeals.

In the singular before

89.);

Dj^H

DN

deserve particular attention:

The form assumed

/'om

(21:34);

(47:22),

(14:7),

IJB

(32:31),

4. Sejolate-atemt ( 89.)
o.

D^3"l

DnbN"; ph

(2:24),

6.

(6:5),

n3"l

all suffixes

the noun takes the primary

sometimes attenuated and u regularly becomes

8.

Before the plural affixes (absolute) a pretonic k appears, and

the primary vowel becomes S*w4.

<

3 KgB. S 5.
Lev. 26 37.

Isa. 7

>

16.

" Ler. 22 16.

IT Deut. 33
11.
" Jer. 16 3.
:

Ruth

2.

>

Sam. 3

Deut.
' Deut.
" Szek.
Judg.
" Deut.

16
12

13.

14.

17.

20 40.
:

16

29.

4:5.

2 Sam. IS 44.
Cant. 6:8.
" Deut. 12 26.
< Dan. 8:6.
" Joab. 2 13.
Bx. 13 10.
>

'

Bx. 32 33.

Pa. 73

14.

Deut. 12
" Hab. 3
Iia. 53
" Neh. 12

4.
0.
:

SO.

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

110]

171

d.

In the pluraJ before light

e.

In the plural Const, and before grave suffixes the & disappears,

and the primary vowel

is

suffixes the pretonic & is retained.

though sometimes in attenuated

retained,

or deflected form.
/.

In the dual the form

plural (see
a.

5.

generally that which

ia

sometimes that used in the

c),

Nouns from

roots

bi-literal

class

have monosyllabic forms with

some

absol. sing,

forms in which

is

found

in the

sing, before suffixes (see 6).

(100.) of the Middle-Vowel

and

6, 6

and

everywhere except in

appear as middle consonants.

a similar development of diphthongs to consonants in English

Cf.

bower from older bur; dowel from older dowl;

fiyur,

from older

fyr.

der and number,

radical, the
6.

often pronounced

'Ayin Doubled (,^"^) Se|olate-stems, before

b.

and

fire,

and before

suffixes,

gen-

preceding vowel remaining short.

Lamed H (H" /) nouns ending

suffixes

affixes of

take DS,ge-f6rte in the second

in

beginning with a vowel;

lack this before affixes

the tone-long

of the first

radical,

retained

a. Is

when

it

would be pretonic, but

Yields to ^'w^ in the Construct (sing, or plur.),

b.

and when

it

would be ante-pretonic.

110.
1-

2.

3.

4.

Y"]i<,

nyi

"ip3,

TD.

:1:1b,

T"

ns, innnit,
VT

Dii;T

npV' r)2^, ch^, ^BpD, nnpy.

D^l^, T)i^.

bm

Noun-Stems

Dx. nip,

nn^,
\pi 1^3.
"T
TT mi<,
TT '^m.
Tt)J"T

5-

iDp.

Classification of

N""!!:,

an3, -iton,
For purposes of

nn,

-ii2-i'

inflection,

"iInd,
d^dqT
"
'

I'im- did, i)^, pi, onnouns

may

conveniently be divided into

five classes
1.

The

originally
2.

first

class includes

the so-called Segolates, nouns which

had one changeable vowel

The second

class includes

( 89.);

nouns which have two changeable

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

172

[111

vowels; here belong stems which had originally the vowels i

a ia,
ii,

3.

The

a,

^i,

etc. ( 90.).

third class includes

vowel, whether

by nature

nouns which have an unchangeable

or position, in the penult,

and a change-

able vowel in the ultima ( 92.).

4.

The fourth

in the penult,
5.

The

class includes

nouns which have a changeable vowel

and an unchangeable vowel

fifth class

may,

in the ultima ( 91.).

for convenience, include all

nouns of what-

ever origin, the vowel, or vowels, of which are unchangeable.

Nouns of the First Class

STRONG AND LARYNGEAL STEMS.TABULAR VIEW
111.

1.

1111

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

173

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

174

In a few

0^^312^, Q''^^r\, pretonic

plurals, like

-i^

111

does

not appear.

There are a few forms, especially '7 laryngeal, which make a

/.

Construct like

In reference to

2.

instead of
i-class

In a few cases,

a.

^1^0

stems

-r- (e)

^ 0^]^/

the original

a.

The o

b.

The writing

is

(^Z- i?"!!)-'

may

it

be noted that,

stands under the

first

radical instead of

^jp^j;).'

In reference to ^^class stems

3.

()

^^P

it

may

be noted that,

sometimes retained before

-r- (6) is

suffixes (^lii^n)-^

sometimes found as a substitute for

-tt

(D^Hi^'lp).'
tJit

Se|olates with the vowel under the second radical,

4.

final

a.

In some cases have the usual inflection

b.

In others treat this vowel as unchangeable

c.

In

still

others preserve

consonant before

f j;,

2.

affixes

it

by an

(rl'^'^l^}

artificial

from ^DC").*

(^lUJ^T)-'

doubling of the

(D^E)i?D)-*

1"^, |-|"b '^ND

y"y STEMS.TABULAR VIEW

const.

n^D

ns

d> di

-pn

i.8uf.

^nlD

^n^i

^nD

^pi

^sx

^pn

Dpnlp

DpmnpnB

DDs:i

Dps Dppn

D^niD

D^n^i D^i^i}

D^s:

niDK D^pn

gr.suf.
PI. ab..

const.

iniD

^rvi

^rpi

n)m

^pn

i.8uf.

iniD

^n^T

""D^.

inlisj^

ipn

Du. abs.
const.

>

Num. 11:7.

Ex. 30

36.

DTy

D'^^n^

D''B3

D''5ti^

I^lj;

l^rh

''S5

'JIT"

'Hx. 18:4.
Gen. 19 33.

'

>
'

1 Kgs. 12 38.
Zeph. 3:3.
:

<Isa. 52:14.
Fs. 109 : 8.

>

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

$ 111]

175

REMARKS
1.

The absolute forms

of

Middle-Vowel stems are perhaps develop-

ments from diphthongal forms which were the basis of both Absolute

and Construct forms; maud or maw0,

e. g.,

becoming both bdyid and

bayt or baid

becoming m&0 and mkwed;

bid;

the analogous case of

cf.

the Middle- Vowel K'el forms.

2.

In

the

"I'nS,

a reduction of the original

-;- is

the third radical with a helping vowel;

the

attenuation of the original

-7- of

-=-,

while the

-=-,

while

iy,

is

an

of 2J in ^"'^B

D!D^*1B

'3

deflec-

tion of a.
3.

y^

In

stems, the original vowel,

but before

in the abs. sg.;

affixes

a,

ii,

i,

generally changed

is

the second radical

the original vowel retained, though o

is

doubled and

rarely found for

is

fl.

NOTES
1.

In reference to Middle-Vowel stems,

o.

suffixes

Stems "J?,

be included in the

be noted that,

{e.

Forms

directive

g.,

(nn^3)-^
T :j~

^^'^'='{12^'^, |i^a*=^|^{V) ^'^

lengthened to

3.,

becoming

6;

"

these also will

fifth class.

In reference to
o.

He

and

class Segolates, the a,

2.

may

Full tri-literal forms sometimes occur in the plural ("'7^n).*

and before
6.

it

like

D'v

stems,

it

may

be noted that,

become, in pause,

^IS

"'"IS,^

the S being a

deflection of the original a.

6.

Inflected

forms

like

"''h^,"

Hl^E^/ U^'hV'^

Hl'i'lNl.'

also forms like

nD3," inh*";
these are some of the irregular forms assumed by n"7 stems.
3. In reference to
stems, it may be noted that,
)J")J
a. While IH" stands even in Abs., Q^" stands even in Const.
QlJ^na"' for

b.
c.

D''''DSi. occur;

c/.

Forms like ^H liave Const, like ^f|J.'*

-^ is often attenuated to -r- (TjriB** /or TinS)-

> 1 Kgs. 15
20.
Eccl. 2:5.
' Judg. 14 :
6.
:

" Jer. 50

6.

' Ex. 28 : 26.

Ps. 30:7.
1 Chron. 12
" Gen. 14 3.
:

Gen. 3 IS.
22 21.
" Ezra 10 1.
Gen. 42 15.

'

Jer.

Gen. 4

2.

'Num.11: 31.
" Gen. 1 2.
" Buth 2 14.
:

ELBHENTS OF HBBBEW

176

d.

Many

e.

ry

fully tri-literal

forms

like

P]J<

112

forms are in use.

(='anp) are inflected

"

112.

11

Nouns of the Second Class

TABULAR VIEW

like

yj?

forms

Hi]
5.

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

Many

words

artificially

the preceding vowel

affixes;

may be

double the last consonant before

Q-]^,
^pj,
T

all

Here

Nouns

in &,

^^^, the

etc.

b.

then necessarily sharpened.

is

included,

Adjectives in 6, ^J",

a.

177

adjective form jj^p, etc.

NOTES
1.

2.

The ^__ of ^"7 stems stands unchanged even in the Construct.

Some words of this class assume in the Construct state a Segolate

form, e.g.,

nHS^

from

HHS.

'T]"1''j'

from TT)^;

words have also the regular form in the Const.,

153'
3.

e. g.,

of these

133,

both

and 133-^

In some verbal adjectives the

in the

some

Construct state,

113.

e. g.,

e,

lowered from

VDn/ HD^/

is

retained even

jD*"'-'

Nouns of the Third

TABULAR VIEW

Class

''6-lSim

mS-pit

'a-yiv

'fl-Um

]^6-z9,y

'6-t&a

(elemity)

(judgment)

(.enemy)

(plind)

(prophet)

(icheel)

np

}di

^v^

r\m

]^)^

^D^X

^Th

^3D1N

Dppbl:; DDE:si^'p apnyj*

DD|n

sg.ab8.

D^i:;

Ds?^p

n:

const.

Q^ii;

css^p

i.suf.

ipbij;

^OBpD

gr.suf.

i,

PLabs.

D^p^li?

const.

ith)^

^tpSE'P

D^n^'4<

dV^?

D^D^^^

D^lh

D''3e1^?

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

178

113

REMARKS
This class includes nouns with an unchangeable vowel in the

1.

penult;

this

may be

a naturally long vowel, or a short vowel in a

closed syllable.

The

2.

following formations are included: ^CDlp,

7!Sp; many

7lSp. 72Dp' 7C3p.

70lp 7D1p

nouns with the

third, or the

second and third radicals reduplicated; some nouns with ^,

prefixed;

^DpD. b^^D, b^^D,

blDj^D,

7C3pn. /COpD; many nouns formed by

"^IDj?!?.

and

^BpPl.

some nouns

affixes;

with four radicals.

The

many

existence of

the form

who

trace such

scholars,

from

Ipdt&l

words to a

questioned by

is

Je^tdl

But many

form.

l^aKt&l

proper names and the kal active participle seem to

make

this

form

secure.

Original & in the sg. Const.,

3.

mains unchanged;
grave

and

in the sg. with grave suffixes re-

reduced in the

pi.

Const.,

and

in the pi. with

suffixes.

An

4.

it is

original

but sometimes

in the sg. before ?],

Q^, )p

is

usually unchanged,

deflected to e; b^ore all other suffixes

is

and

before qf-

/ixes it is reduced.

The ^al

5.

(n

as

verbs

act. participle of

was seen

in certain

H"?

the same ending

^^^s

nouns of the second

class, like

but
6.

its first

Many

in the

vowel

is

nouns of

in 112.

R.

5,

artificially

i. e.,

double the

and sharpen the vowel:

p)^

a.

|D1N(92.);

h.

pjf>

c.

!?n2. ^D"15

(99.);

^WD

];0 ( 94.); DnanN

i- 2"1pj;;.

changeable vowel

this class treat the ultimate

manner described

following consonant,

nTE^i
T T

unchangeable.

( 99.

Db"]n,

1.

(96.); and others.

( 94. 2);

and

a); ^J^^a ( 100. 1);

D^np

( 11. l);

and

others.

and

others.

others.

BT AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

114]

Nouns

114.

and

of the Fourth

179

Fifth Classes

TABULAR VIEW
"S-nly

g&-<Idl

TpB

^na

abs.

^na

const,

kl-ftv

(poor)

Unerseer)

(disciple)

DID

TDbF\

^WD
DpTp?)

gr. suf.

(writing)

l^pS

suf

1.

(ftorse)

n^p^n

DDDip Dpi^pl'n DD3n3

V

IT

PI
abSc

const. i|?^na
1.

on^p^n

^piD

n^pbn

i;!^:;;

n."'pB

suf.

D^piD

^piD

^1''pB

D''2n3

'TP^ri

np^TpS Dp^^J^

Sr. suf.

REMARKS ON NOUNS OF THE FOURTH CXASS

1.

The fourth

in the penult

many

class includes

adjectives

participles like
inally in

nouns which have a changeable vowel

and an unchangeable vowel

like

7lE3p

a closed

7^C3p and 7'*B3p

( 91.

syllable,

1. c);

In a few

radical

1,

when

formative vowel

H'^

t;

has become

-r- in

affixes of

pears in the form of D&geS-forte;

an open

^^pD

orig-

and a

b)

the

absorbed in

tiie

(8 91.

affix, is

1.

it

ap-

0^"^^^.-

CLAflS

This class includes those nouns which do not suffer diaoge of

any kind in
2.

syllable;

any kind are attadied,

REMARKS ON NOUNS OF THE FIFTH

1.

-=-,

-r- (99. 2. c).

the absence of an

but when

passive

( 91. 1. a, b);

stems with the form

final, in

Here belong

formations in which a

few noims ending in 6n with a pretonic

2.

in the ultima.

inflection.

Here belong monosyllabic nouns

unchangeable vowel; participles like

like

Qp

D1D
and

P%

HD;

*l1tS^

^th an

formations Kte

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

180

bW' b)W'

'?''Pp.

able vowel, with a

like

( 91- d-f) ^liich

S'wi reduced from an

btopP, ^""PpD. biDpP

/"'20pn>
fin

b^W

7lDpn

( 99. 2);

( 98. 4, 5);

I.

have an unchanged

original

or u; formations

formations

like

some formations with the

aflSx

( 96.

and a few denominatives

lis.

[115

6-8);

( 103.).

Feminine Nouns

FEMININES OF THE FIRST GLASS

TABULAR VIEW

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

115]

(10)

nSl.

(11)

ni5n.

of

which those numbered 3-6, 8-11

change of stem, following the inflection of

4.

Just as

"n^D

is

derived from

from "^53 by the addition of

Before suffixes the original -^

2.

181

^_,

is

Dpn

attenuated to

no

given above.

Tj^D, so VT^^i

and the

suffer

is

deflection of

derived
fi

to

6.

i.

FEMININES OF THE SECOND CLASS

TABULAR VIEW
s&-<I&-1f&

(.Hgliteousness)

Sg. abs.

g<xl-l&
icry)

(year)

(crojon)

(ia/mce)

ELEMENTS OF HBBBEW

182

5.

Several nouns with the form

6.

H/Dp

have

i t^* ^^^-

115

these in the singular as well as those which have the

in the Const. ;

form

H/tOp

n /Bp tJie Abs., attenuate the original a to

Nouns of the form H^pp frequently retain

before sufSxes.

the

-n- in

the

Construct.

NOTES
1.

Forms

like }^a-t^

2.

Forms

like

become

the stem-vowel

3.

is

when the
from

nHD.
T "

ilDTj

n*1il

ka-tal

T T

naturally long, retain

it

fern,

ending

is

bi-literal roots in

added.

which

in the Const.

FEMININES OF THE THHU) AND FOtlRTH CLASSES

TABULAR VIEW
gtU-gtUt

I;0-tI-I&

g'dO-l&A

t<hn-l&

($prout)

iskull)

(.killing t.)

(.great f.)

(praist)

(rut)

n^nn

r\m:r2

sg.ab8.

npav

nbiibii

const.

npJV

nbii^a n'?Dlp nb'-ia

i.8uf.

^npil""

gr. 8uf.

PL

abs.

const.

mnfl-^

yO-n&^t

}t

nbcDlp nhi^

^nbabrnbcDlp
"ITS'..
-Till

'

n^nn nnijo
^n-jnnTiniJD
-T-; -Ti:

DDnpjv Dpnbaba

Q^niTin

[nlp:V]

nl^^^nl^^lpniy-ianl^nnninuD

nlp:i^

nlb^l?!

nlhanl^nn

REMARKS
1.

Feminines in

^^ ^^^ third class arise in the

as those described in 115,

1.

R.

4,

the groimd-form generally hav-

ing a in the ultima, though sometimes

2.

As

same manner

ii.

before, the original a (or 5 deflected

from

ii)

appears before

suffixes.
3.

The feminine

though
nbCOb.
J'

is

participle

H/CDp
'
:

I'

is

most frequently assumes the form

common;

the form

ppS'^ (Gen.
:

16:11)

:-

of interest.
4.

Feminines of the fourth class present no points of

difficulty.

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

116]

116.
1.

2^

Irregular
with

father; Const, l^t?;

1<T2i^ or TI2.

3.

plur..

uym.

etc.

(for

int<
T T

with D.
in{<.
T -

f.

'^'2^,

falheT),

IH^

(wiy brother),

nin^).

^T\^>

-^m, ?jin,

suf.,

implied) One; Const.,

TSTi^ (=

fem.,

Some,

D^THi^
T ~;

suf.,

D'lnN; const., in^; with

also before |p);

plur.,

(my

suf., I^J^t

Hi? jBroiAr; Const., ^HJ^; with

uy^m-.

Nouns

UyZ^ Plur., nl2K; Const., nlDN-

n^3,
T
T
J-

2.

183

int<
- -

(used

in pause, VT}!^;

fAe same.

4.

nlnt^SMfer; Const., nlni^; with

rrpm;

suf.,

ty>i<Jlfon; plur., D"'E^J^^ (three times

6.

HDN

7.

rH^t<^omon;

Maidservant; with

Const.,
Ctt^i;
T

"

9.

= 'it;
with

ICS^J;
...

n"'5^oe; Const., n''3;

D''I''''i?);

TIHDN;

suf.,

Const., ni^'{<

8.

plur.

with

suf.,

^ty^m, Dp"'nln^f from nni<.

also

5.

plur.,

inlHN;

plur.,

with

suf., Ti{2fJ,

D^ri2;

jnlUDi^; Const.,

suf., ipltS'i^, ?|Plt2^5<;

plur.,

Const, ^K^Ji<.

Df'T'E'J-

Const.,

in3;

withsuf.,

IT

|2 Son; Const., "D."j3, ''33 (Gen. 49:11), ^33 (Num. 23:18);

with

plur.,

133, ?]J3;

suf.,

QlJS;

Const., i;j3;

with

suf.,

33. T|^J3, Dn"'J310.

nS

(for

nJ3,

=""^3);

fem. of |3) Daughter; with

plur.,

nlJ3
T

(qf-

D^J3
T

on

12.

DV

Doy;

13.

1^3

Vessel; plur., D''b3; Const.,

J-

plur., D''P^^;

"'03 (=-"'1^33

om); Const., nl33-

11.

Father-irUaw ; with

suf.,

suf.,

Tl^pn;

DIDH

McAher-ivAau)

Const, "ipi and

HID^

dual,

1^3; withsuf., 1^3,

D^D^^
Dll''!??-

ELBMBNTS OF HEBBEW

184
14.

QlD

(plur.)

Water;

Const.,

IQ,

IJO^O;

..

.J-

..

15.

-1"';;

City; plur., U''^^; Const., 1'^^^.

16.

nS

il^OMiA;

Const.,

17. ii'^in (/or !2^"^n

Const.,

(plur.)

(cf.

suf.,

with

plur.,

1JKfi<1.
J"

Heavens; Const.,

^p^.

suf.,

..

I^J^, in^?); with

=ia'^^n) Bead;

'^^^y, with
T

18. p"'l?52'

13

D-iE^^n

VDIQ,
T

suf., "tB,

(/or

117

Tjip,

D^^Xn);

BT AN INDTJCTIVE METHOD

117]

100 r\^r2

Const.,

fern.;

4,000

185

D^pb^? Hy^'lN

nD; vu niNo

but
nDD'^>
T T

in later books,

D'TlND

SOO

dual

(for

^^131,

10,000

n1^2"!

^hV2

SOO T\^'^'Q

^0,000

Qin^-l

m nip yan^
1,000 Pj^JSi; plural,

plural,

(contracted

{dual) sAso

T\W)
'^X^'^

nisi

D^D^^f

2,000 Qisb^it (<^0

Qis^^? HE'bK^"

3,000

131;

30,000

n1^53n ^hvj

4(?,ooo

nli^3n

60,000

nli^SI^E^a^

V31^

REMARKS
1.

The numeral Hni?

T

agreeing with
2.

its

"^^^

is

an

adjective,

standing after and

noun.

The numeral 0"*^^

(fem. Q'^nt-^j

pronounced Sta-yim)

is

noun, used either in the appositional or Construct relation with the

word which
3.

it

enumerates, and agreeing with

The numerals from

tives,

it.

three to ten are abstract feminine substan-

used in appositional construction with the noun which they

enumerate.

The feminine form

masculine

a shorter form used with feminines.

4.

is

The numerals from

o.

used with masculine nouns; the

eleven to nineteen are

')iif^ ten (or the feminine

may be

is

formed by uniting

form r\*^^}}) with the imits; here

it

noted:

In

eleven,

HH^

nHJ^ have

^^'^

a form

like that of the

Construct.
b.

^f\1i^^, in the second

an Assyrian word

form

iSten (=:one).

of eleven,

is

to be connected with

ELEUENTS OF HEBREW

186

c.

In

twelve,

is

D^JtS^

a contraction of

117

and "i^^ a

D''^12'>

shortened form of D^J2^, the contraction and shortening being due

to the close connection of the words;

these forms cannot be called

Constructs.
d.

The

feminines from

thirteen,

upward have a shortened, but

not a real Construct, form.

The numerals

5.

ending Q^

plur.

to ninety are formed

thirty

by adding the masc.

to the units, but twenty (D"'"1K'^)

is

^^

plvaal

of ten ("it'i?)-

The

6.

units are

added to the tens by means

of

in the earlier

");

books preceding the tens, in later books following them.

7.
it,

The

units take the

noun

in the plural;

take the noun in the singular,

8.

The numerals

The

10.

ordinal ^-<<

The

ordinals

ing cardinals

after

is

)W^'']

common nouns
{cf.

^^1,

when

before

in the plural.

it,

noun

eleven to nineteen take the

except in the case of a few very

9.

when

the tens,

in the plural,

like day,

man,

etc.

head).

from two to ten are formed from the correspond-

by means

of the termination ''__, another

serted between the second

and third consonants.

1__ being

in-

Note that "'^''21

lacks the initial ^.

11.

Above

12.

The

parts.

ten, cardinals

are used for ordinals.

feminines of the ordinals are used to express fractional

XIV.

Separate Particles
Adverbs

118.
1. a.

"It?

Where?:

There;

]{<
T

HiH

Bere;

6.

r\]

c-

1'$<P

H^her;

^^^

nai.n Much; 3EJ\n

e.

"p^

TF;

Firmly; '2)^ Well;

^^
-

Not.

U^E^ Snen

Tkriee;

H^^

Very; y!|n ^iroad;

d.

Not; QE^ There;

T

^ione;

DSK^n

rT'SD

arfy;

timet.

R^t<Mn.

-|np

SpeedOy.

n^)^^"! Formerly ; n'H^t)^ Won-

derfully.

vnD

(=;?n''-na) why?; nb}jrhD

i=nbvD

with

^d

and 7) Upward; ("ID? Whereforef

T T
iTere

w; ^^^H, ?||n.

Qp^n, Qin,

2. a.

|n

6.

2;i

c.

p5St

d.

Where is f; HS''^. I'X, D^Nn'i?

Tjv
r -

There is;

TAere

!|J^n,

rip\ 1JE^\
no<; 1^J1{<5,

etc.

DDE'""'-

^J^N, ^rt?, DDrt;?.

etc.

*"

e.

1.

sm

'^]^

is;

laniv. rp)^,

mV'

Adverbs, and words used adverbially,

n|nl;;, ijnl;;, Dniv-

may

be briefly

classified

as follows:
a.

Those which may be

b.

Pronouns and numerals used in an adverbial

c.

Nouns, either alone or with a preposition.

called primitive.

d. Infinitives absolute, especially of

Hif "il and K'el stems.

e.

Adjectives of

/.

Words formed by the composition

all

sense.

formations, especially in the feminine.

of

two or more

distinct

words.
2,

Certain adverbial particles, involving a verbal idea and thus

187

ELEMENTS OF HEBBBW

188

The

often dispensing with the copula, take sufiBxes.

are, in

tive

most

(71.

and N.

1) is of

119.
1.

account of;

7^ Upon; Q^

until;

nnnp
out!

ing
3. a.

h.

^2^

''^3D

to

"|^3 Ahmd; inbiT Besides; |^1

With;

P^om under; |p^

Before;

^JJ

nHD

Since;

Under, in place

r3"bi<

of.

TUl between;

l^zh

^^33

With-

During; ^"13 Accord-

Ti^2

without;

f'"' '''"A: of,

During,

'~\^

Before;

According to; 7J?D^ For the sake of;

measure

of.

in^^/fer, more

-^^

frequent occurrence.

Over against;

7IQ

Demonstra-

Prepositions

V>2 Between;

in^jt After;

On

The

cases, the verbal suflSxes.

2. c. (3)

attached

sufiixes

so-called Nlin

119

often

Unto, poet.,

nn^;

with

with

suf.,

l^Nl;

suf.,

n_n^{,

'h\^,

T'"in|>?. etc.

Dp^^N,

Tj"i^^)t,

p^^^,etc.
c.

|13 Betoeew; with

with piur.

d.

suf.,

sg. suf.,

!)rr3, DD'trs,

3^13D Arowid; with

rnTDD,

suf.,

^ni^ntp,

poet., I-Ij;;

e.

"ly

?7rato,

/.

?;;

f/pon, poet.,

i;i3, TjJ^3, IJI3,

'n^3"'3D.

also

with

I^W; with

suf.,

suf.,

11^3);

i^nijis, Dnij^3-

V3^3D.

cn^nb^sD,

(|^ri

also with fem.

etc.

Iiy,

T]''iy,

ny.

I^U, TJI^y, y^V-

iT'^S?,

Dn\?i;, D3\?y;
ff.

nnn
c/.

1.

under; with

also the

suf.,

inHrv rnnn, Dn^nnn, onnn;

form with Nfin Demonstrative

D^nnn-

Prepositions were originally, in most cases, nouns;

generally Constructs, governing the following

noun

as

if

they were
it

were a

genitive.

Note.

^Many words

in

common

their original force as substantives.

use as prepositions

still

retain

BT AN INDUCTITB MBTHOD

120]

2.

composed

Prepositional phrases,

preposition

and a noun, or

189

two prepositions or

of

of a preposition

of a

and an adverb, occur

frequently.
3.

Many

prepositions, especially those denoting space

are in reality pliu'al

when

nouns; some of them,

the form of the plural Construct, ending in

most

suffixes,

Note.

of

them assume

^For

standing alone, have

before pronominal

this form.

inseparable

the

and time,

prepositions,

1-5;

47.

see

51. 3-5.

120.
1.

"1

Conjunctions

And; ]^ Or; r\^ Aho; QJ^ When,

2.

^3

That, becaiise, for, when.

3.

^^

That not; |S That not,

4.

"lE^'^-b^.

3 Dp^. Because,
According

Conjunctions
1.

in

of

or.

Q *^t? 3 -Be/ore <Ao<; '^^^.

lest;

^^^ nnn,

^^-bV'

if,

nnn.

^3

In order

since; "ll^r^ |;i;p^

npy,

"ins^'t^

that;

*^la^^)|^

as.

may

be

classified as to their origin as follows:

Certain words used only as conjimctions, the origin of which

most

is,

cases, doubtful.

2.

Certain words which were originally pronouns.

3.

Certain words which were originally substantives, or composed

a substantive and a preposition.

4.

by the addition

Prepositions which,

themselves a part of a

Note
followed

1.

by

Note

2.

^In

general

"H^'ji^ or

In

compound
it

'HE^i? or '^^,

of

become

conjunction.

may be

said that

any preposition may be

^3> ^^^ be used as a conjunction.

many

cases the '^{2^5^ or ''3

is

omitted, and the

preposition standing alone used as a conjunction.

121.
1-

2-

nni<>
T -;
'>^^,

n^
T

Interjections

Ahl nj<n ^ol aha!

TV

on

^w**-'

'N ^laal

lln Woe! |n, r\^r] Behold! ni?"1 -^'

Come on! rh'^U Far

HD^
T
T

Interjections

may

J-

be it! ">3

nan

come

/ beseech! ^'^ Pray!

be divided into two classes:

mi

ELB1INTS OF

190

1.

Those whicli were

called forth
2.

originally

by some impression

Those which were

HEBREW
interjections,

121

"natural sounds

or sensation."

originally substantives or verbal forms,

have become interjections by usage.

which

PARADIGMS

V
ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

192

The Personal

Paradigm A.

Genitive of the Pronoun, or Suffix

Nominative of the Pronoun or Separate Pronoun.

of the

Noun

{possessive Pron.).

With Nouns

With Nouns

Plur.

Singular.

and Dual.

Sing.
1.

com. "i^^^, in pause

J-

IT

my

my.

(prop. Gen.

mei).

"'Di3J<;"'Ji< in pause

AT

JT

2.

-:

J-

pause

pause r\f\^
T AT

Tthy.

(tui).

1.

m. J^!|n

thy
7]

in,

he.

^ J(
1;

^v

in_.

his (ejus

and

(h)

swtw).

his.

r\''her.

f. ii,^n she.

JV

Plur.

l.com.

Ijnj^

2.

(!|jnj),

1J;

1J_; (1i_J

owr.

1i^

^our.

your.

ye.

P= P-.I

on, nsn
3.

DH; D_; 1a_

\they.

their.

10'

V' ]^

our.

1-T-

3T AN INDUCTIVE METHOD

Pronoun and Pronominal Suffixes

Accusative of the Pronoun, or Suffix of the Verb.

193

194

BY AW INDUCnVB MBTHOD

195

Strong Verb
pi>a.

pa'&i.

^&1.

NIf"51.

Sg. 3 m.

J-

)\

p)^^p;i

n^Dp

3/.

n^CDp

2 m.

r>^3p^

2/.

ir

Ic.

=ibDp;

iVcpp

P/. 3

Dn^bp

c.

2 m.
2/.

IJ^IDP

bispri

=ljbC3p

u^iDp:

i^i^pp

^c?p'

h'w^

Ic.

Sg

^E)pn'

btDpn
^^CDpn
(it

^bispn

yc3p
i^p'.

njbiDpri

n;^23pn

i^>pn

i'?C3pn

n:)b!spn

n:^C3pn

^E>p:

^'c?pJ

bCDp

nj^ippn

nibbpn

^c?pn

bbp

i9j.

2 m.

"^EJp

^Ejp

2/.

I'pcsp

ibpp PI

2 m.

wanting

nj^Dp
yDpjjy^pn

^top

biDP
Const.

bCDp

blDPD
^G3pD

2/.

^!2P3

^2?p

ad.

^ICDp

pass.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

196

Paradigm
3pl.f.

C.

Strong Verb

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD
with Suffixes
3 sg. m.

197

Verb Pe

Paradigm D.

198

HlfU.

HOf&l.

Laryngeal

('S)

%u.

Nlf'fil.

m.

Sg. 3
- ^I

IT

nbovn
T

't

IT

J-

^:

IT

3/.
T

J'

v: IT

2 m.

J- 't

2/.
Ic.
PZ.
.

4-

c.

^:iv

2 m.

2/.

in

uteyn

Ic.

u^^j(j
Sg

^iPr,

J"

^:

I-

J" ^: IT

bE3j;n

VcDyn

^E55[J<

bbjiK

"

"it

J- "t

J-

I"

J- ^: IT

^:

i-

^'Pi?^
iSjT.

2 m.
2/.

wanting
PZ. 2

nj/ui/t^.

m.

2/.

abs.

IT

bain
*

T I"

Const.

act.

^D^p

pass.
T

^:ti?

Paradigm

200
HMp&'el.

F.

Verb Ldmed

('^)

Laryngeal

202

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD
<fi!em /.

Verb PS

Wdw

(VB)

203

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

2C4

Paradigm K.
Hi9p&>el.

Verb

BY AN INBUCTIVB METHOD

UmSd He

(H'b)

205

2oe

BY AN INDUCTIVE METHOD
'Ayttt

Doubled

(j;"J?)

207

Paradigm M. Middle-Vowel

208
P61&1.

Verbs (|'y and r'^j

209

SU

K&l 0").

NIf'&l.

(V7).

^p
nblp:

Sg.

n^p.

3 m.
3/.

n^p.

n^p

2 m.

nbp

n^p

2/.

"nlbip;!

^nbp

Ic.

i^lp;

*p

Pi. 3 c.

etc.

urop

Qr?)p

2 m.
2/.

M)b)Oi

le.

ijS':>

bip^.

blpri

bipn

Sff.

'

rpn
Tpn
L

^ipn
bipn

'

"Jjipn

TpK

^ipi<

ib^p^,

n^ypn ,nrbipn
T

J i

T JV

ibipn

mbpn
T

nj"'}ipn

)j" T

b^pi

^li?J
'P

^ipn

b)p
v"'p.

nib'p

TO.

2/.

bip
=ibip

^ipj ,^lpn

Sjr.

P/.

2 m.
2/.
abs.

^'p

'

"^ipn

^p

act.

ELEMENTS OF HEBREW

310

Paradigm N. Verb L&mSd'Al&f

HWp&-a.

({i^"^)

INDEX OE SUBJECTS
[The references are to sections, unless otherwise indicated.]
a-dass vowels
a-class vowels, what they include
&, naturally long, where found
&, pure short, where found
&,

tone-long,

Assimilation of 7 and '

39. 3.
Assimilation of 3 in 1"^ verbs
78. 2.
Assimilation of J, exceptions to. .39. 3. B.
Assimilation of Waw, verbs 1"B
80. 4.
Assimilation of weak J
39. 1.
Assyrian Personal Pronoun. .50. 3. N. 2.
'ASnSJj
22. 1,2.

7.

33.

30. 1.
29. 1.

where found

31. 1.

107.
Absolute and construct states
106. 5.
Absolute Dual
67. 1.
Absolute infinitive
106. 4.
Absolute masc. plur
98.
Abstract Ideas expressed
98.
Abstract nouns, formation of
20. 4. N. 2.
Accent defined
20. 4. N. 1.
Accent in Inflected words
Accent in verbs with sufBxes. 71. 1. c. (3).
20.-25.
Accents

'AflnSh

Accents, relative power of. . 24. 2. N. 2.

22.
Accents, table of
105. 2.
Accusative, formation of
Accusative of Pronoun, table of. .p. 193.
.62. 2. a.
Active Intensive, pointing of.
68. 1. a.
Active Participle, ?ai
60.
Active Verbs
Adverbs
118.
1. e.
Adjectives as
99. 2.
Adjectives in j
118.
Adverbs
118. 2.
Adverbs and 3uQxes
AfBx, feminine
106. 2.
103. 4.
Affix '__
.

W&w
waw
Wkw

)__ (seldom |i)

gender and number
AfBxes of noims
Aflormatives and Preformatives
Affix

jl

Biliteral

106.

Change

in noun-inflection
Characteristic long vowel

1.

Closed syllable, accented

Closed syllable, quantity of
Closed syllables
Cohortatlve Imperative
Cohortative Imperfect
Command, how expressed
Commutation ofl into'

Analysis of noun-forms
110.
Anomalous form of 1"3 verb
78. 2. R. 2. 3.
82. 5.
Apocopatlon
verbs
Arabic Personal Pronoims. .50. 3. N. 2.
Aramaic form inP"P verbs
85. 1. b.
Aramaic Personal Pronouns. .50. 3. N. 2.
Archaic construct forms
107. 5.
Article and Prepositions
45. 4. B. 3.

in n"'?

Article,

Article

The
with D&geS
doubling In

Artificial

Commutation of letters

45. 2, 3.
45.

d. nouns
112. B. 5.

Assimilation

100.
55. 3.

106.
30.
28. 2.
28. 2.
26. 2.
69. 3.

69. 1.

69. 2. b.
44. 1.
41. 3.

75. 3.

Compound SwS and'' laryngeals... 76.

Compound S^wS in 'P laryngeals.. .75.

39.

how

39. 3. N.
indicated
Assimilation of n and 1
39. 2.
Assimilation of l in ]"V S'gol's ... 89. 2. b.
Assimilation,

30.
Compensation
15. 1.
Compensative D&geJi-ffirte
9. 2.
Compound S'wa
32. 3.
Compound Sw&, forms of
42. 3.
Compound S"wS and laryngeals
Compound S'wS and laryngeal verbs

45. 1.
II.

84-87.
Verbs
2. 1.
Breathings
117. E. 10, 11.
Cardinals
105.
Cases, formation of
59. 6.
Causative passive stem
69.
Causative verb-stems
7. 4. a.
Changeable vowel-sounds

104. 1. c. d.

Article before laryngeals

.25. 1.
7. 3. c.

Biliteral

99, 100.

Alphabet

nouns

Biliteral roots

103. 3.

or

Affixes for

of.

24. 2.

Silifllf

Attenuation, when it occurs

38. 3.
Siyim, dual-ending
106. 5. a.
'Ayin doubled Segolate stems.. 109. 5. b.
'Ayin doubled verb. Paradigm of.p. 206.
'Ayin doubled verbs
85.
"Ayin laryngeal verbs
75.
'Ayin laryngeal verb, Paradigm of p. 199.
Ayin "W4w or Y6d verbs
86.
"Ayin
Segolate stems
109. 5. a.
verb, Paradigm of . p. 208.
"Ayin
verbs
"Aiyn
86.
"Ayin Y5d verb. Paradigm of
p. 208.
86.
Ayin YOd verbs

and

'A9nah and Silifllf, consecution

Attenuated Vowel-sounds

Conjunction, with verb

Conjunctions

211

2.

3.

70.

130

INDEX

212

108.
Connecting vowels
24.
Consecution of accents
25.
Consecution of accents, table of
Consonant additions in inflection of
n"'?

verbs

82. 3.

vy verbs

86. 2.

85. 3.
V"V verbs
Consonantal character of lost. .79. 1.
Consonantal force of 1 or ^ retained 44. 5.
Consonants liable to rejection
40.
.

Construct, archaic
Construct, dual
Construct form explained

107. 5.
107. 6.

107. 6. B. 3.
67. 2.
Construct Infinitive
107. 6.
Construct masculine plural
Construct sing., stem-changes of. 109. 3.
107.
Construct state
Constructs and Prepositions
119. 1.
Contracted weak verbs
77. 2.
36.7.
Contrsiction
44. S.
Contraction of 1 or '
Contraction producing long vowel.
.30.
Contractions of nouns w. sufl. 108. 1. R. 1.
Contractions with suffixes. .71. 1. u. N.
Conversive, Wiw
73.
.

Counts (accents)

22. 1.

cl.

4; 23. 3.

Dageg-fBrte
13.
D&geS-fSrte after np
54. 2. N. 1.
Digeg-f6rte and 1
42. 2. N. 1.
DageS-fOrte as a D&geS-lene 13. 2. N. 1.
D.g^-fdrte, characteristic
15. 2.
D5;ge5-f6rte, conjunctive
15. 3.
DageS-fartP, emphatic
15. 5.
Da#e5-f5rte, flrmative
IS. 6.
DageS-fOrte, separative
15. 4.
Dageg-fOrte flrmative in rh
52. 1. d.
DSgeg-fdrte implied 14. 3. n'i ; 42. 1. b., N.
D&geg-fSrte in IV. cl. nouns.
114. H. 2.
D5geg-f6rte in Pe laryngeals
74. 1.
DigeS-fBrte, kinds of
15.
DSgeS-lene
12. l.
D&gei-lene after a silent wa
12. 2.
D&geS-lene after disj. accents
12. 3.
DageS of the article omitted. .45. 4. E. 1.
DageS of
conversive. .73. 2. a. (1).
.

Waw

DSrga

22. 2. 22.

Declension of nouns
88-117.
Def. written, tone-long vowels 31. 4. N. 1.
Defectively written, vowels 6. 4. N. 2.
Deflected vowel-sounds
7. 3. b.
Deflection, occurrence of
36. 4.
Deflection of preformative vowel 78. 2. b.
Deformities, nouns expressing
93. 4.
.

Demonstrative pronoun
52.
Denominatives
103.
Dentals or sibilants
4. 1.
Dependence of noun on noun. 107. 1, 2.

Dukes

22. 1. cl. 3; 23. 3.

naturally long, where found

S,

short,

30. 4.

where found

29. 4.

Elision of K
43. 1. E. 2.
Elision of 1 and '
44. 2.
Emperors (accents).
.22. 1. cl. 1; 23. 3.
Emphatic forms w. suffixes. .71. 2. c. (3).
Endings char, of abs. and const
107.
Endings of nouns with suffixes
108.
.

Epenthetic NOn
Epithets expressed

Etymology
Euphonic change of 6 to
Euphonic n__(n"'?)

N.

71. 2. c.

1.

93. 7.

45-121.
tt.

.86. 1. b.

82. 4.

Euphony
Euphony

of consonants
of vowels
Exhortation, how expressed

N.
N.

39-44.
29-38.
69.

1.

b.

Feminine ending, modifications of. 106. 2.

Feminine in verb
60. 2.
Feminine nouns
115.
Feminine nouns and suffixes
108. 2.
Feminine nouns, declension of
115.
Feminine nouns, lY class
115. 3.
Feminine nouns f^om Seg. stems 89. 4.
Feminine nouns in n
.91. 2; 98. B.
Feminine nouns. III class
113. 3.
Feminine plural
106. 3.
Feminine pliu'al affix
107. 6. B. 1.
Feminine pliu'al and suffixes
108. 4.
.

Feminine, singular sign

106.
Feminines with two short vowels. 90.
.

2.

2.

Fifth class nouns

114.
Final N and n not cousouants. .42. 2. N. 2.

Final N (verbs N"'?)

Final short vowel lost
Final vowelless consonant
First class feminine nouns
First class

83. 1.
103. 2. E.
14.

1.

115.

1.

nouns

111. 1.
Foreign words, how formed
101. 2.
Formation of cases
105.
Formation of noun-stems, table of.
104.
Formative vowel In Segolates
89. 3.
.

Forms of
Fourth

letters

class

3.

nouns

114.

a.

Fractional parts, how expressed 117. B. 12.

Fragments in KSl perfect
60. 1.
Full vowel to follow doubling
13. 1.
Full writing in later O. T. books. 6. 4. N. 4.
Fully written vowels
6. 4. N. 2.
4.3.
Function of consonants
Future idea and
70. 1. b.

3.

Gender

a.

Gender,

how

expressed
69. 1.
Determination, how expressed ... 69. 1.
Diminutive idea expressed
94.
Direction expressed
105. 2.
Disjunctive accent and spirants
12.
DiBJunctive accraits
22. 1 23. 2.
Desire,

Double consonants (y"V)

85.
Double plural
108. 4.
Doubling in verb-stem
57. 1. b.
Doubling of final consonant in III
cl. nouns
94. B. 6.
Doubling of laryngeal refused
74. 1.
Doubtful vowels
7. 2. N.
Dropping of N (N"S
83. 3. R. 2.
Dual number
106. 5.

b.
b.
2.

Wiw

affixes for

106. 3.
106.

INDEX
Gender in verb
Gender of verb
General view of strong verb
Genitive case
Genitive ofpronoun, table

60. 2.

N.

57. 3.

2.

72.

105. 3.
p. 192.

of.

Gentilics

GTSiayim

103. 4. b.
22. 1. 14.

GerSg
Ger6 with other accents

22. 1. 13.
26. 2, 3.

Grave suffixes
51. 1.
Grave suffixes and II cl. nouns. .112. R.
Grave suffixes and tone
109.
Grave terminations and changes ... 60.

Impf

7. 2. c; 27. 1

1
s.
8.

interrogative

S3.

b.
69.

l.

64.

.'

3.

65. 6.

65, 3.
65. 4.

65. 1.

82. 6. b.
64. 1.

E and Middle O verbs

of Middle

2.

4.

Half-vowels
gatef-pasaij
Hatef-g:amS
natef-s^gai
directive

Imperfect, cohortative and jussive

Imperfect, with the form Sop
Imperfect, Hifil
Imperfect, Hiep9,<el
Imperfect, Hfifai
Imperfect, Nif 51

2.

S'vrS,

He
He

a.

Half-vowel synonymous w.

N.

Imperfect (active), analysis of

Imperfect and Perfect with Wiw 70.

Imperfect of n""? verbs

Imperfect of Middle A verbs

Half-open syl., quantity of

28. 4.
Half-open syllables
26. 2. N. 2.
Half-vowel
9. 1.
Half-vowel before ^ changed to S in
pause
38. 1. N.
Half- vowel restored In pause
38. 1
32. 3.

213

64.2.
Imperfect, original stem of

63. 2.

Imperfect, Pe 'AlSf verbs

79. 1, 2.
Imperfect, PI'el
66. 2.
Imperfect, Pii"S,l
65. 4.
Imperfect ^5.1 (active) prefixes of. 63. 1. a.
Imperfect i^&l, weaJc and strong
verbs compared
87.
Imperfect, Stative, view of
64.
Imperfect, vowel-additions to
63. 3.
,

Imperfect with suffixes

Imperfect with W&w, form of
Implication, DaeS-f. omitted by

71. 2.
70. 3.

8.

14. 3.

105. 2. a.
46.

Implied doubling in 'V laryn

75.
Imv. and Impf., stem-vowel of. .63.

N.

1.

1. b.

2. a.

Helping-vowel
71. 1. u. (3).
Helping-vowel in '*? laryngeals. .76. 1. d.
Helping-vowel in Segolates
89.
Helping-vowel with fern, ending. 106. 2. b.

Indefinite pronoun
54. 2. N. 5.
Infinitive absolute as adverb.
118. 1. d.
Infinitive absolute, vowel of. .67. 1. R. 3.
Infinitive construct njja
80. 2. b. R. 1.

Hifil

Infinitive construct Fi'el

58.5.

andHQfai

72. 6. 7.

Inf. const.

Hifil, characteristic of

58. 5. b.

Infinitive with suffixes

Hif'il

waw

Hifil form with

conv
70. 3. R.
Hif n forms, r'V verbs
85. 4. d.
Hifil Imperative and suff. .71. 3. b. R. 2.
Hifil of verbs Pe YBd
81. 2.
Hifil with suffixes
71. 1. b. R. 2.
.

HirSt

8.

HiepS'el, characteristics of
HiepS'el with suffixes
71.
Hiepeial stem
HIp61el stem

H&f ai
H5f ai,

58. 7.

R.

1. b.

i,
i,

86.

1.

pure short, where found

29. 2.
vowels
7. 1. b. 2.
i-class vowels, what is included in.
.34.

i,

i-cJass

Imperative with suffixes

Imperatives of l"fl verbs
Imperatives, inflection of
Imperatives, view of
Imperfect, accent of
Imperfect, affixes of

and nominal
nouns

66. 2.

N.

1.

69. 3.

57. 3.

N.

3.

71. 3. b.
80. 2. b.

N.

66. 2.
66.
21. 3.
63. 1. b.

N.

vowels of

N.

1.

87. 5.
67.
57.

between verbal
36. 3. N.

Inflection of

not

1.

71. 3.

lost

1.

88.
78. 1.

R.

10. 1.

45-49.
Inseparable particles
47.
Inseparable prepositions
Inserted comp'd S'wS. for euphony
42. 3. b.

f.

30. 4. N.
30. 2.

. .

Inflection
Inflection, difference

S'wS

naturally long, where foimd

of Hif il before suffixes
71. 3. b. R. 2.

Imperative, aflorraatives of.

Imperative, cohortativje
Imperative, how used.

Infinitives,

3,

8.

"Ayiu YSd verbs

from g, in active perfects

.89. 4.

comparison of
view of

Initial

58. 6.

in

Inf. const.,

Initial

58. 6.

93. 3.
.

67. 2.

85. 6. b.

characteristics of

a Segolate.

Infinitives, changeableness of

85. 6. a.

H616m
I

2.

IJiai,

Insertion of euphonic vowel

27. 3.

Insertion of helping vowel (n"7). .82. 5. a.

97. 3.
Instrument, expression of
59. 2. a.
Intensity expressed by PI'el
Intensity, how expressed in nouns 94. 2.
59. 5.
Intensive reflexive stem
59.
Intensive verb stems
121.
Interjections
.

Interpunction and accent

Interrogative particle
Interrogative pronoun

Interrogative pronoun no,

23. 2.

46.
54.

how

pointed

54. 2.

Irregular nouns
Jussive Imperffect

69. 2.

116-

214

INDEX

the Hifll
Jussive of n"S verbs
Jussive of l"j) verba
Jussi-re of

69. 2. a.
82. S. b.
86. 1.

Kaf with the 'wa

Keiv

19. 1, 2, 3, 4.

Kings (accents)
Labials.

E.

f.

11. 2. a.

22. 1.

cl.

2; 23. 3.

4. 1; 7. 1. c.

LS,m6d 'Aief verb. Paradigm

of.

.p. 210.

LimSa 'Algf verbs

98.
L&mSd He stems and changes .... 109. 6.
L&m6d He verb, Paradigm of.
p. 204.
82.
L&mSd He verbs
L&mSd laryn. verb, Paradigm of. .p. 200.
LimSd laryngeal verbs
76.
L&mSd W&w and Y6d, see L&mSd He.
Laryngeal Verbs

73-76.
42.

Laryngeals, peculiarities of
Late Hebrew and full writing. 31. 4. N.

L'garmeh
L'g&rmeh and other accents

22. 1. 15.
25. 6. N.

Lengthening, occurrence of
Letters, classification of
Letters, extended
Letters, forms of
Letters, how written
Letters, the
Letters to be distinguished
Letters with two forms
Light sufBxes
Linguals
Logical pauses and accent
Long and short vowel nouns
Long vowel before MSilFlj:ef

Long vowel-sounds
Long vowels
Long vowels, naturally

1.

36. 7.
4.
3. 1.

3.
1. 1.

1-4.
3. 3.
3. 2.

4. 1.

N.

24. 2.

2.

92.
17. 2.

7. 3. d; 7. 3. e.

7.2.b.
30.
43. 2.
36. 8.
7.

22. 2. 24.

Matlfef

17.

MSppllf

N.

54. 2.

.'

M&ppl^ in n in verbs 'S

3.

18.

laryn.

. .

76. 2.

N. 3.

Marginal (1E*r6) readings. 19. 1, 2, 3, 4.

109. 1.
Masculine nouns and suffixes
Masculine plural
106. 4.
Masculine plural and suffixes
109. 1.
Masculine singular
106. 1.
Massoretes and the text
19. 1, 2.
M'5yyli
22. 2. 27.footn.
Medial N (verbs H"h)
83. 2.
Medial consonants omitting D.-f. .14. 2.
Medial first radical and pointing. 74. 3. b.
10. 2.
Medial wa
80. 3.
Medial W4w in V'B verbs
4. 2.
Medl\mi consonants
.

MSrki
MBrki kf(U&
MSrka with SillQIf
M6g

eompoimd 'wS

18. 3.

MitWf 5f.

18. 4.

18. 1.
tone
vocal "wa pretonic. 18. 3.
.

and run

18. 5.

MSfleg with unaccented

__

18. 0.

MlddleA verbs
Middle E l"p verbs
Middle E verbs
Middle E verbs and
Middle O verbs
Middle O yp verbs

61. 1.

B.

86. 1. a.

61. 2.
suffixes. 71. 1. b. R.l.

61. 3.
86.

E.

1. a.

20. 1.
20. 1.

Mil'el
Milri'

Modal idea

intensified

by

Mfln&lj

B.

69. 3.

ni

Monosyllabic nouns
Moods in Hebrew verb

1(X).

N. 1.
N. 6.
N. 1.

87. 3.

22. 2. 21; 25. 5.

Mto&bforMS9Sg

18.

MOn&Ij with "ASnaif

24. 8.

Mfinaii with S'golta

Musical notes expressed

24. 9.

by accent
23. 1. a.

Names

of vowels

8.

Naturally long distinguished from

tone-long vowels
30. 7. N. 1.
Naturally long vowel-sounds
7. 3. e.
Naturally long vowels
30.
Nat. long vowels unchangeable 30.
7.

Nature of vowel-sounds
Nifai

N.

2.

7. 3.

62. 1. a.

Nifai, characteristics of
Nifai Infinitive absolute

72. K. 2.
67. 1. B. !

Nifai Inf., abs., 'S laryngeal. .76. 2. N. 1.

Nifai Participle
68. 2.
Nif"51, strong and weak compared. .87. 4.
Nominal infection, exceptions 36. 3. N. 3.
Nominal suffix withinf
71. 3. a. E. 2.
Nominative of pronoun, table of. .p. 192.
.

78. 1.

MShpSx
ni?

before
before
before
before
in nin

51. 1. b.

Loss of n
Loss of ] in ]"D verbs
Loss of vowel takes place
Lowertog of vowels

M&Wfef and

Meseg
MSSg
Me66g
M696g
MSSSg

22. 2. 19.
22. 2. 20.
24. 7.
IS.

Nouns

88-117.

Nouns, as adverbs
Nouns, I class, tabular view
Nouns, infiection of

Noun-stem formation
Noun-stems
Noun-stems classified

of,

118.

111.
88.

table

104.
88. 1.
110.
p. 167.
99.

Noun-suffixes, table of

Nouns and

affixes

Noims, changes in inflection

Nouns, compound
Nouns from other nouns
Nouns, irregular

Nouns

109.
102.

of four or five radicals

Nouns, plural, as prepositions

Nouns, II class, declension of
Nouns with D prefixed
Nouns with one formative vowel
Nouns with prefix n
Nouns with two voweLs (short)

Number, eiffixes for

Numerals
Numerals as adverbs

1. c.

103.
116.
101.
119.
112.
96.
89.
98.
90.

108.
117.

118. 1. b.

INDEX
NQn demonstrative and

adverbs. .118. 2.
Ntln demonstrative and verb suffixes,
table of
p. 169.
Nfln epenthetic or demonst.Tl. 2. c. N. 1.
a, long, from au or aw, where foimd. 30. 7.
0, long by obscuration, where found. 30. 6.
.71. 2. b. (1).
o of ^lSI, before suffixes.
29. S.
6, short, sound, where found
97. 2.
Object of au action expressed
.

Obscuration of vowels (T'S) .82. 1. d, e.

Occupation, nouns expressing. .93. 5. a.
Older endings restored in verb. . .71. 1. a.
Omission of DageS-fSrte
14.
Open syllable, accented
20. 2.
Open syllable, quantity of
28. 1.
.

Open

syllables

26. 1.

117. K. 9, 10, 11, 12.

103. 4. a.

Ordinals
Ordinals,

how formed

4.
Organic formation
Organic formation of vowel-sounds 7.
Origin of vowel-soimds
7.
Original vowels in stems, general
.

view of
Orthography

1.
1.

3.

Bemarks.

72.

1-44.

Otlant N

43. 1. R. 1.

Pazer
P&zer and other accents
Pe'AlSf verb. Paradigm

pp. 192-210.

Participle,

feminine

106. 2. b.

Participle,

KM

82. B. 5.

58. 2. a.

act. n"'j

vy

Part., J^S,\ act.

86. 1. g.
92. 1.

Participle, ^3,1 active, fern

Participle,

^al

act., inflection

Participles

and

suffixes

Participles,

of

109. 3. B. 3.
71. 3. b. N.

formation of

90.

Participles, passive

91.

view of

68.

Participles,

45-49.

Particles, inseparable

vowels

of,

changed.

R.

.32. 2.

Passive force of HMpa'el

58. 7.
Passive intensive, pointing of. .58. 4.
Passive of l^&l
58. 2.
Passive participle, '^il
68. 1.
Passive participles declined. .114. B.
Passive stem, usual
58.
Past idea and verb with W5,w
70. 1
PSSti
22. 1.
23.
PS^t& and K&dma distinguished
.

c.

2.

a.
8.
7.

c.
6.

103. 4. b.

VV

Pausal forms,
imoontracted .85. 2.
Pausal forms with suffixes
71. 2. c. (3).
.

Pause
Pause and accent
Pause affecting PSflS.h-fm'tive.

38.

21.2.
.

76.

1. c. (3).

Pause, perfect in, with

W. conv.

70.
3. b.

2.

42.
21. 4.

Perf and Impf stems compared 64. 3 N. 1

Perfect and Impf. with W&w
70. 1.
Perfect, form of, with Wiw
70. 3. b.
Perfect, Hifil
62. 2. c.
.

Perfect, HiSpi'el
Perfect, HOfai
Perfect, '^^l, analyzed
Perfect, :gai, strong and

62. 2. b.
62. 1. c.

60.

weak verbs

compared
Nifai

87. 1.

Perfect,

62. 1. a.

Perfect, Pi'el
Perfect, Pfi'SI

62. 2. a.
62.

b.

1.

Perfect (stative), view of

61.
Perfect with suffixes
71. 1.
Personal pronoun
50.
Personal pronoun, table of.
p. 192.
Phonetics
7.
Phrases, prepositional
119. 2.
Pi'el and Pu'ai Perf. and Impf. strong

and weak compared

Pi'el, characteristics
Pi'el,

87. 2.

of

B.

72.

derivation of word

3.

N.

58. 2.

Pi'el, how used

58. 3. c.

Pi'el inflnitive absolute

R.
N.

67. 1.

2.

Pi'el

1.

27. 1.

N.

6.

Peculiarities of laryngeals
Perfect, accent of

Pi'el Inflnitive with suffixes. .71.3. a. R. 1.

8.

Patronymics

78.
203.
80.
202.
81.

c.

76. 1. d.

201.

a.

PMah

P&Sh-furtive in ''' laryngeals. .76. 1.

PSWSb-furtive w. postpos. accent.
23.

79.

198.
74.

Pi'el inflnitive in 'S laryngeals 76. 2.

PSah
as a helping-vowel
PaeSh-furtive

p. 202.

of.

b.

24. 1.

PSsfllf

22. 1.10.
25. 6. 6.

Pe'AlSf verbs
Pe laryngeal verb. Paradigm of. .p.
Pe laryngeal verbs
Pe Nfln verb. Paradigm of
p.
Pe NOn verbs
Pe Wiw verb. Paradigm of
p.
Pe W4w verbs
Pe Yad verb. Paradigm of
p.
Pe Y8d verbs
Peculiarities, many. In one stem. .77.

4. 2. d.

Palatals

Paradigm word Sj>9

Paradigms of verbs

Particles,

215

with

suffixes

71. 1. b.

B.

2.

2.

86. 5. u.
PilpSl stem
Pilpel stem
85. 6. c. 86. 5. c.
103. 2.
Place, how expressed
Place of an action, how expressed 97. 4.
20.
Place of the accent
Poetic accents, diff. from prose. .25.
;

6.

Poetic construct form.

Poiai stem
Peiel stem
Postpositive accents
Preflx D
Prefix D of participles
Preflx n
Prefixes

105.

N.

1.

R.

1.

85. 6. b.

85, 6. a.
23. 5, 6.

96.
68. 3.

98.
tt,

and ^ with nouns

95.

Prefixes in verb-stems

57. 1. c.

78. 2. N. 1.
Preform, vowel info verbs
86. 3. d.
Preformative vowel 0"J')
Freformatives and aSormatives. 65.
.

N.

5.

N.

2.

216

INDEX

PreformatiTes of all stems, table of

mttei forms
N.

65. 5.

1.

Prepositional Phrases
119. 2.
Prepositions
119.
Prepositions and article
45. 4. E. 3.
Prepositions and Inf.'s const 67. 2. N. 2.
Prepositions and vowel changes. .47.
.

5.

N.

1.

Prepositions as conjunct. 's. .120. 4. N. 2.

Prepositions, how written. 47. 1,2,3, 4, 5.
Prepositions, Inseparable
47.
Propositions preflxed
47.
Propositions still subst. in force. 119. 1. N.
Prepositive accents
23. 4.
Primary section, accents of
24. 4.
Primitive adverbs
118. 1. a.
Prohibition, how expressed
69. 2. b.

Pronominal fragments in Ijai

60. 1.
Pronominal suffix and changes
57. 3.
Pronominal suffix and verb
71.
Pronominal suffixes
51; 108.
Pronominal suffixes and nouns
108.
Pronominal suffixes, table of
p. 192.
Pronoun and verb
51.
Pronoun, demonstrative
52.
Pronoim, indeSnite
54. 2. N. 5.
Pronoun, interrogative
54.
Pronoun, relative
53.
Pronouns
50-54.
Pronouns as adverbs
118. 1. b.
Pronouns as conjunctions
120. 2.
Pronunciation of spirants
12.1.N.
Fronimciation of letters
Pronunciation of vowels
Proper names, compound
Proper names in J
Prosthetic N

2.

5.

102. 2.
99. 2. d.
95. 1.

Pfl'Sl, characteristics of
Pil'Sl,

derivation of word

Pii'&l,

how used

72. E. 4.

N.

59. 4.

59. 4.

strong and weak vbs. comp'd. 87.

Pure vowel bef. doubled letter. 13. 2. N.
Pure vowels
7. 3.
Pti'ai,

^&ami,

^&dma and other accents

K&l

perfect,

view of

61.
72.

E.

K&mg$

1.

8.

]^&mg; and :^Sjnes-9&{0f

5. 5.

N.

:g:&me.;-Qataf

l^Sme pari
second-class

forms
forms
forms
:g:&ttfll forms

4.
s.

22.

K&mS F&r& and other accents

K^attal

a.

60.

view of
simple verb-stem
68;

^&tn forms,

3.

22. 2; 23.
25. 4.

jpil perfect (stative),

:^ill,

2.

1.

17.

25. 6.
91. 1. b.

93. 1.

I^&t'tel

93. 3.

KWl

93. 6.

KTS
^ibbd;

93. 7.

c.

93. 8.

Quality of root expressed

Quantity of vowel in syllables
Quantity of vowels

97. 5.

Quiescent weali verbs

Quiescing of n
Quiescing of medial n (n"S)

77. 2.

101.

28.
7. 2.

43. 1.

83.3.

Quluqueliteral nouns

101.

Eadicals

55. 1.

EifS

Bank

16,

of accents

23. 3.

22. 1.7; 24.

Eeciprocal force of HiSpa'el
Eeciprocal force of Nif'il

5. b.

EvI(aL)"

Eeduction
EedupUcation of jn

59.
59.
7.

N.

48. 2.

Eeduplication of )p before suffixes. .51.

EedupUcation of second

rsidical

Eeduplication of third radical

Eeflexive force of Nifai
Eeflexive, intensive,

5.

93.

94.
59.
59. 7.
40.

stem

Eejection of a consonant
Bejection of 1 in V'fl verbs
80. 2. a.
Rejection of y6d (r\"h)
83. 1.
Eelationof words shown by accent.23. I.e.
Eelative pronoun
53.
Eepetition expressed by PI" el
59.
E'epetition expressed (nouns)
94. 2.
Eetrocession of accent, why
70. 3. (3).
Boot, how pronounced
55. 2.
,

Boot not a word

Boots of l"p or vy

vbs.,

55. 3. N.
pronounced

1.

55.3.

Boots of strong verb

Bounding of vowels

55.
7.

sa,lSS169.

Second
Second
Second

22. 1. 4.

class feminine

nouns

115. 2.
112.
class nouns, declension of. . 112.
class

nouns

S'gol
Segolate form of second class
Segolate Inf. construct
Segolate Inf. const, in Pe

8.
.

112.

N.

2.

78. 1. a.

Waw vbs.
80. 2. a. (3).

Segolate stems and changes

109. 4.
Segolates, accent of
20. 4.
Segolates, construct state of
107. 5.
S^olates, changes in
89. 2.
Segolates defined
89.
Segolates of I class
110. 1.
Segolates, v'p, "'P, n"S and J}"P stems
111.2.
Segolates, weak feminine. . .115. 1. B. 3.
S'golta
22. 1. 3; 24. 3,
Semitic and Hebrew final vowels. 36.
.

19. 2, 3, 4.
8.

Batt&l forms

93. 2.

forms
flttel forms

93. 5. b.

:5ittai

93. S.

Klttai forms
Quadriliteral nouns

93. 4.

8.N.
Separate Particles
Separating vowel in v'p verbs
Separating vowel In P"y verbs
Separative D&geg-f6rti

118-121.
86. 2.

86. 3.
IS. 4.

INDEX
erS

8.

Servants {accents)
22. 2. d. 5.
S'wa, compovmd, three forms of. .32. 3.
'wa, compound and simple standing
together
74. 3. c, d.
S'wa, simple
8.
. .

'wa, simple and

compound

9.

S'wa, vocal, under Initial consonant 27.2.

Sharpened syllable, quantity of
28. 3.

Sharpened syllables

26.

Sharpening, occurrence of
36. 6.
Shifting of the tone
21.
Short form of verb
69. 2. a.
Short forms of niunerals
117. R. 4. d.
Short vowel becoming long
31.
Short vowel lowered in pause
38. 2.
Short vowel prec. doubled letter. 13.
.

2.

N.

3.

Short vowels
7. 2. a.
Sibilants or dentals
4. 1.
Sign of definite object and sufBx
51. 2.
Signification of nouns with D prefixed. 97.
Silent N (verbs N"'?)
83. 3. R. 1.
SUent S'wa
11. 2. R. N. 2.
SaiQlf
SiUflk:

and MSeeg

22. 1. 1; 24. 1, 2, 3, 4.
distinguished 24. 1. N.

SillO^ distinguished

Simple wa
Simple S'wa for short vowel
Simple verb-stem

.23. 7.

8; 9. 1.
32. 3.

72. R.

1.

24. 1.

119. 3.

Imv

69.
12.
14. 2.

64.

K^

61.
perfect, view of
68. 1. b.
Stative Participle, g:ai
Stative, Perf. Kai, inflection of. 61. 1. 2. 3.
Statlve,

61.
Stative verbs
85. 5. c. R.
Stative verbs V'V
Statives and infinitive construct 67. 2. R.
66. 1.
Stem of imperatives
57. 1.
Stem of verb, formation of
72.
Stems, characteristics of
71. l.b.2.b.
Stems of verb, changes of
Stems of verb classified, view of, 59. Notes.
58.
Stems, verbal, characteristics of
109.
Stem-changes in noun-inflection
.

71. 1. b.
Stem-changes of perfect
85.
Stem-vowel in y"V verbs
79. 2.
Stem-vowel in t<"B verbs
4. 2.
Strength of consonants
Strong and laryn. forms compared
42. 3. R. 1.
87.
Strong and weak verbs compared
4. 2.
Strong consonants
110.
Strong noun stems
56. 1.
Strong verb defined
72.
Strong verb, general table of

Strong verb. Paradigm of

Strong verb, the

Subject of an action expressed

97. 1.
Substantives as conjunctions
120. 3.
Substantives as interjections
121. 2.
SufBx and imperfect
71. 2. c.
Suffix directly attached
108. 4. R.
Suffix, how attached to verb
71. 1. c.
Suffixes and adverbs
lis. 2.
Suffixes

and

infinitive construct.

. .

67.

2.

Suffixes

and perfect

Suffixes aijd strg. vb..

Suffixes and verb

N.

2.

71. l.

Paradigm of.

p. 196.

71.
51; 108.

Suffixes,

pronominal

Suffixes,

pronominal, and nouns.

.88. 5.

Suffixes, table of

p. 192.

Suffixes with imperfect

71. 2.

SQr6k

s.

Syllabification

27.

Syllables
Syllables begin with consonants.
Syllables, closed
Syllables, ending
Syllables, open
Syllables, quantity of

26-28.
.

.27. 2.

26. 2.
27. 3.
26. 1.

28.

sharpened
26.
Synagogue, cantillation and accent In
Syllables,

3.

23. 1. a.

from Mg^gg.

S6f P&sflk
Space, prepositions of
Special forms of Impf. and
Spirants
Spirants and DageS-fOrte
Stative, KSl imperfect

217

Tables of vowel-changes

36. b.
22. 1. 11.

T'vlr
T'lisa g'deia

22. i. is.

T11a g'dSia and other accents

.25. 4. 5.

T'lisa If'tauna

22. 2. 25.

T11gaii:t&nna and other accents.. 25. 4, 5.

Tense and noim relation
117. R. 7.
Tenses in Hebrew verb
57. 3. N. 1.
Termination of verb, changes of
71.
Terminations, vowel, and changes. .63. 3.
Third class nouns
110. 3.
Third class nouns, declension
113.
Third syl. bef. tone with M66g
18.
Tifha
22. 1. 10; 24. 6.

Time

of an action,

how

expressed

97. 4.

Time, prepositions of
119. 3.
20. 4. N. 2.
Tone, definition of
Tone in yn vbs
85. 7.
Tone, In construct relation. .107. 6. R. 3.
Tone-long, distinguished from naturally long vowels
30. 7. N.

1.

31. 3.
Tone-long __, where found
31. 4.
Tone-long -i_, where found
Tone-long vowel from rej. D.-f. 31. 4. N. 2.
7. 3. d; 31.
Tone-long vowel-soimds
38. 4.
Tone restored in pause
21. 1.
Tone shifted from ultima
.

Tone
Tone

shifted in noim-inflection 109. 1, 2, 3.

21. 2; 38. 3.
shifted in pause

Tone-syllable and accent

Tone unchjanged in perf. w.

23. 1. b.

waw
71. 3. b.

N.

41. 2.
Transposition of letters
Transposition of n in Hi9p5,"el. .59. 5. b.
.

and

p. 194.

Triliterals

59-72.

u-class vowels

55. 3.

biliterals
7. 1

c, 2.

IHSBX

21S

n-elan haa one tone-long Tovel

31.
n-class Towels, what they Include
3S.
tl, naturally long, where found
30. 3.
fl, plural sign of verbs for On. . 122. 5. N. 2.
fl, pure short, where found
29. 3.
Ultimate vowel of ^91
58. 2.
Unchangeable vowel in 'V laryngeal
verbs
75. 1. N. 3.
Unchangeable vowel-sounds
7. 4. b.
Unchangeable vowels
30. 7. K. 2.
Uninflected words and accent
20. 3.
Union of suffls with imperfect. .71. 2. c.
Union of sufflx with perfect
71. 1. c.
Verb and suffixes. Paradigm of
p. 196.
Verb, Paradigm of strong
p. 194.
77-87.
Verb, weak
Verb with sufBxes
74.
Verbaladjectivesin second class. 112. N.5.
Verbal form with W5.w conversive ..71.3.
Verbal forms as interjections
121. 2.
Verbal Inflections, exceptions in. .36.
.

3.

Verbal sufttx ij
Verbal suffixes, table of
Verbs, classes of

N.

2.

51. 1. c.
p. 192.

56.

Verbs, Paradigms of
Verbs 'D laryngeal

pp. 194-210.
74.

Verb-stem, formation of
57. 1.
Verb-stem, simple
58.
Verb-stems classifled, view of. .59. Notes.
Verb-stems, general view of
59.
Vocal S'wa
11. 2. R. N. 1.
Vocal 'wa before spirants
12. 2.
Vocal Swapretonlc, with MBflgg. . .18. 2.
Vocalization of 1 to l
44. 4.
Vowel-additions and Tvh verbs
82. 2.
Vowel and S'wS, stand'g together
42. 3. R. 4.
Vowel-changes, tables of.
36. b.
Vowel-letters

6; 6. 4.

Vowel-signs
Towal-signs, introduction of

N.

Vowel-soonds, claaslflcation of

7.

Vowels

6-11.

Vowels, changes of
Vowels, euphony of
Vowels in Hifll of Vy vbs

36.

29-38.
86. 1. d.

Vowels In verbs, variations of

S6.

Vowels, names of
Vowels, naturally long
Vowels, pronunciation of

30.

Vowels of

8.

5.

58. 1, 2.
31.

?:&1

Vowels, tone-long

Waw conjunctive, how written 49. 1 2, 3, 4.

W4w conversive
49. 4. N. 2.
,

WS.W conversive and Hifll.

WS.W conversive and tone

.70. 5. b. (1).
21. 3, 4.

Wiw conversive with n"'? verbs. .82. 5. b.

W&w conv. with 1"? verbs
85. 2. R. 4.
W&w conv. with Perf. and Impf
71.
Waw conversive, the name. .70. footn. 1.
waw in ""'?, vy and '"P verbs.. .70. 3. N.
Wiw with Impf. strengthened 70. 2. a.
W4w with Mil
49. 4. N. 1.
Wiw with perfect, form of
70. 2. b.
.

Weak
Weak
Weak
Weak
Weak

consonants
feminine segolates

4. 2.

115. R. 3.
89. 2.
56. 2.

nouns
verb defined
radicals in

verb, the

77-83.

lof land'
iof and 1
Wish, how expressed
Words accented on ultima.
Words, how written

44.
43.
69. 2. b.
.

.20. footn.
3. 1.

Words receiving in inflection no endings

accented on ultima
YfirSlJ
Yfiri,!}

20. 3.

bSn y6m5
22. 2. 26.
bSn ydmd and other accents 25. 6.

Y'Wv

22. 1. 9.

1.

Ye!v and MS,hp5x distinguished

23.
ZSkef gadSl
22. 1. 6; 24. 5.

5.

Z&tefkatou

6. footn. 1.

Zar4:4

7.
a.

22. 1. 5; 24. 4.
22. 1. 12; 24. 6.